Compaq StorageWorks 6000 - Virtual Library System User guide

Compaq StorageWorks 6000 - Virtual Library System User guide
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library
System User Guide
This document describes the HP StorageWorks VLS6000 systems to facilitate their installation, operation, and
maintenance. This document is intended for system administrators who are experienced with setting up and
managing large storage systems.
*AH809-96049*
Part Number: AH809-96049
Twelfth edition: September 2010
Legal and notice information
© Copyright 2004, 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set
forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Acknowledgments
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Warranty
WARRANTY STATEMENT: To obtain a copy of the warranty for this product, see the warranty information website:
http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty
Revision History
Revision History
Revision AH809-96049
release of firmware version 3.4.0
Revision AH809-96038
release of firmware version 3.3.1
Revision AH809-96024
release of firmware version 3.2.1
September 2010
March 2010
September 2009
Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................... 19
VLS6000 Models ......................................................................................................................
VLS6100–series .................................................................................................................
VLS6200–series .................................................................................................................
VLS6500–series .................................................................................................................
VLS6600–series .................................................................................................................
VLS6800–series .................................................................................................................
19
19
20
21
23
24
2 Hardware Installation ....................................................................... 29
Preparing for the Installation .......................................................................................................
Tools for Installation ............................................................................................................
Taking ESD Precautions .......................................................................................................
Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................
Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................
Removing the Packing Materials ..................................................................................................
Rack Planning Resources ............................................................................................................
Rack Requirements ....................................................................................................................
Rack Warnings .........................................................................................................................
Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents ...............................................................................
VLS6100 and VLS6500 System Shipping Carton ....................................................................
VLS6200 System Shipping Carton ........................................................................................
VLS6600 System Shipping Carton ........................................................................................
VLS6800 System Shipping Carton ........................................................................................
Disk Array Shipping Carton .................................................................................................
Installing the Disk Arrays into a Rack ...........................................................................................
Rack Mounting Requirements ...............................................................................................
Mounting a Disk Array into a Rack .......................................................................................
Installing the VLS6100 and VLS6500 Nodes into a Rack ...............................................................
Install Rails in the Rack ........................................................................................................
Attach Rails to the Node .....................................................................................................
Install Appliance in Rack .....................................................................................................
Installing the VLS6600 Node into a Rack .....................................................................................
Install Rails in the Rack ........................................................................................................
Attach Rails to the VLS6600 Node (appliance) .......................................................................
Install Appliance in the Rack ................................................................................................
Installing the VLS6800 Node into a Rack .....................................................................................
Install Rails in the Rack ........................................................................................................
Install Appliance in Rack .....................................................................................................
Installing the VLS6200 Node into a Rack .....................................................................................
Installing VLS6100, VLS6200, VLS6500, and VLS6600 Cables ......................................................
Installing VLS6800 Cables .........................................................................................................
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
35
35
39
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
48
49
51
53
55
60
3 Storage Configuration ...................................................................... 65
Managing VLS6000–series Capacity .......................................................................................... 65
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
3
Configuring the RAID Level ..................................................................................................
Adding Capacity by Adding an Array ..................................................................................
Adding Capacity by Upgrading Disks in the Array .................................................................
Removing Arrays ................................................................................................................
Managing Storage Pools .....................................................................................................
Viewing the Storage Pool ..............................................................................................
Rebuilding the Storage Pool ..........................................................................................
Installing Additional Licenses ......................................................................................................
65
67
67
68
68
68
69
69
4 Automigration/Replication ................................................................ 73
Understanding Automigration Concepts .......................................................................................
Echo Copy Concepts ..........................................................................................................
Smart Copy Concepts .........................................................................................................
Replication Concepts ..........................................................................................................
Tape Initialization ...............................................................................................................
Connecting a Destination Library ................................................................................................
Supported Destination Library Configurations .........................................................................
Connecting a Destination Library to the VLS6000–series ..........................................................
Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library ........................................................................
Managing a SAN Library ....................................................................................................
Managing a LAN/WAN Replication Library ..........................................................................
Unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN Library ...........................................................................
Echo Copy Pool Operations .......................................................................................................
Creating an Echo Copy Pool ................................................................................................
Creating Virtual Tapes ........................................................................................................
Restoring from a SAN Physical Cartridge ...............................................................................
Restoring from a LAN/WAN Virtual Cartridge .......................................................................
Loading Blank Media into an Echo Copy Pool ........................................................................
Loading Media into an Echo Copy Pool for Overwrite .............................................................
Restarting a Broken Mirror ...................................................................................................
Viewing Cartridges in Automigration Source Libraries .............................................................
Viewing Automigration Cartridges in the Firesafe ....................................................................
Smart Copy Pool Operations ......................................................................................................
Editing SMI-S Settings .........................................................................................................
Creating a Smart Copy Pool ................................................................................................
Changing the Number of Drives in a Smart Copy Pool ............................................................
Loading Blank Media into a Smart Copy Pool ........................................................................
Loading Media into a Smart Copy Pool for Overwrite .............................................................
Editing Copy Pools ....................................................................................................................
Moving a Copy Pool ...........................................................................................................
Changing the Slot Mapping for a SAN Library ......................................................................
Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN/WAN Library .............................................................
Editing the SAN or LAN/WAN Policy ...................................................................................
Editing the SAN or LAN/WAN Availability Windows .............................................................
Deleting a Copy Pool ..........................................................................................................
SAN Destination Library Operations ............................................................................................
Monitoring Destination Library Status ....................................................................................
Cartridge Status and Slot Details ...................................................................................
Advanced Search for Slots ............................................................................................
Mailslot Details ...........................................................................................................
Copy Pool Details ........................................................................................................
Import/Export Pool Details ............................................................................................
Tape Drive Details ........................................................................................................
Forcing a Replication Job ....................................................................................................
4
74
74
75
75
76
77
77
77
78
79
79
80
81
82
85
85
86
86
87
88
88
88
89
89
89
90
90
91
91
91
92
93
94
94
94
95
95
95
98
99
99
99
99
99
Placing a Library Offline or Online ....................................................................................... 99
Moving Media from One Slot to Another ............................................................................. 100
Ejecting Media from a Slot into an Empty Mailslot ................................................................ 101
Ejecting Media from a Drive into an Empty Mailslot .............................................................. 101
Restarting Automigration/Replication Services ...................................................................... 101
Scanning a SAN Destination Library ................................................................................... 102
Editing the Management URL ............................................................................................. 102
Uploading SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware ................................................... 102
Deploying SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware ................................................... 103
Generating a SAN Destination Library Support Ticket ............................................................ 103
Generating a SAN Destination Library Drive Support Ticket ................................................... 103
Running a SAN Destination Library Assessment Test .............................................................. 104
Running a SAN Destination Library Drive Assessment Test ...................................................... 104
LAN/WAN Destination Library Operations ................................................................................ 105
Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization .......................................................... 105
Stopping a Tape Export .................................................................................................... 106
Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape Initialization ...................................................... 106
Forcing Non-Deduplicated Replication ................................................................................ 106
Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling Replication Jobs .............................................................. 107
LAN/WAN Replication Target Operations ................................................................................. 107
Creating a LAN/WAN Replication Target ........................................................................... 107
Viewing the Replication Target Slot Details ........................................................................... 109
Setting the Global LAN/WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings ................................. 109
Editing a LAN/WAN Replication Target .............................................................................. 109
Deleting a LAN/WAN Replication Target ............................................................................ 110
Changing the LAN/WAN Replication Target Password ......................................................... 110
Clearing the Source VLS from the LAN/WAN Replication Target ............................................ 110
Automigration/Replication Reporting ......................................................................................... 111
Cartridge Status ............................................................................................................... 111
Cartridge Summary ................................................................................................... 112
Cartridge Details ....................................................................................................... 112
Configuring the Cartridge Status .................................................................................. 113
Viewing the Current Status of Jobs ...................................................................................... 113
Configuring Automigration Job Reports ............................................................................... 113
Viewing the Job History ..................................................................................................... 114
Exporting the Job History to a CSV File ......................................................................... 115
Viewing the Job Summary ................................................................................................. 115
Configuring the GUI Displays ............................................................................................. 115
5 Deduplication ................................................................................ 117
How It Works .........................................................................................................................
Getting Deduplication Running on the VLS .................................................................................
Considerations .................................................................................................................
Installing the Firmware ......................................................................................................
Installing the Deduplication Licenses ...................................................................................
Configuring Deduplication Options ...........................................................................................
Editing the Data Protector Configuration ..............................................................................
Viewing Deduplication Statistics and Reports ..............................................................................
Deduplication Summary ....................................................................................................
Deduplication Backup Report .............................................................................................
Deduplication Cartridge Report ..........................................................................................
Deduplication System Capacity ..........................................................................................
117
118
118
118
119
119
120
120
121
121
122
123
6 Operation ..................................................................................... 125
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
5
Powering on VLS6000 Disk Arrays ............................................................................................
Powering on the VLS6000–series System ....................................................................................
Rebooting the System ..............................................................................................................
Powering Off the System ..........................................................................................................
Powering Off VLS6000 Disk Arrays ...........................................................................................
125
125
129
130
131
7 User Interfaces ............................................................................... 133
User Interface Requirements .....................................................................................................
Command View VLS ...............................................................................................................
Window Regions .............................................................................................................
Opening a Command View VLS Session from a Web Browser ...............................................
Opening a Command View VLS Session from Command View TL ...........................................
Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web Browser ..............................................................
Restarting Command View VLS ..........................................................................................
Closing a Command View VLS Session ...............................................................................
Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces ......................................................................................
Opening a Secure Shell Session .........................................................................................
Closing a Secure Shell Session ...........................................................................................
Opening a Serial Session ..................................................................................................
Closing a Serial Session ....................................................................................................
133
133
134
135
136
136
137
138
138
138
139
139
139
8 Configuration ................................................................................ 141
Setting the Network Settings .....................................................................................................
Setting the Network Settings using the VLS Discovery Utility ...................................................
Setting the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set ......................................................
Setting the Network Settings using Command View VLS ........................................................
Setting the User Preferences .....................................................................................................
Editing the Default Fibre Channel Host Port Settings .....................................................................
Managing Oversubscription .....................................................................................................
Enabling and Disabling Oversubscription ............................................................................
Shutdown at 98% Capacity ...............................................................................................
Reclaiming Storage Space ..........................................................................................
Managing Virtual Device LUNs .................................................................................................
Default LUN Numbering ....................................................................................................
Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions ............................................................
LUN Masking ..................................................................................................................
LUN Masking (v3.x) ...................................................................................................
LUN Masking (v2.x) ...................................................................................................
LUN Mapping .................................................................................................................
LUN Mapping (v3.x) ..................................................................................................
LUN Mapping (v2.x) ..................................................................................................
Dual Port Virtual Devices ...................................................................................................
Creating a Virtual Library ........................................................................................................
Editing a Virtual Library's Slots and Drives .................................................................................
Creating Tape Drives ...............................................................................................................
Creating Cartridges ................................................................................................................
Destroying a Virtual Library ......................................................................................................
Destroying a Tape Drive ...........................................................................................................
Deleting Cartridges .................................................................................................................
Moving Cartridges ..................................................................................................................
Adding and Removing Barcode Templates .................................................................................
141
141
143
145
146
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
151
152
152
153
158
159
160
162
162
164
167
167
168
169
170
9 Management ................................................................................. 171
6
Changing the Account Passwords .............................................................................................
Managing Cartridges ..............................................................................................................
Unloading a Cartridge from a Drive ..........................................................................................
Freeing up Storage Space ........................................................................................................
Restarting VLS Device Emulations ..............................................................................................
Updating the Firmware ............................................................................................................
Saving Configuration Settings ...................................................................................................
171
171
172
172
172
173
174
10 Monitoring .................................................................................. 175
Status Information in the Status Pane ..........................................................................................
Status Icons ............................................................................................................................
Device Status Icon ............................................................................................................
Navigation Tree Icon ........................................................................................................
Notification Alerts ...................................................................................................................
Command View VLS .........................................................................................................
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................
Editing the Email Server Settings ..................................................................................
Edit the Email Settings ................................................................................................
SNMP Notification ...........................................................................................................
Editing the SNMP Settings ..........................................................................................
SMI-S Support ..................................................................................................................
Trace Log Files ........................................................................................................................
Viewing Trace Log Files .....................................................................................................
Saving a Trace Log File .....................................................................................................
Creating a Support Ticket ..................................................................................................
Performance and Storage Use Reports .......................................................................................
Exporting CSV Data .........................................................................................................
Configuring Performance Reports and Notifications ..............................................................
Current Status Tab ......................................................................................................
Performance History Tab .............................................................................................
SAN Health Tab and Notifications ...............................................................................
Physical Capacity Notifications ....................................................................................
Logical Capacity Notifications .....................................................................................
Current Status ..................................................................................................................
Performance History .........................................................................................................
Logical Capacity ..............................................................................................................
Physical Capacity .............................................................................................................
SAN Health .....................................................................................................................
Workload Assessment .......................................................................................................
Running a Workload Assessment Simulation ..................................................................
Using the Workload Assessment Templates ...................................................................
Editing the Notification Alerts ......................................................................................
Replication History ...........................................................................................................
Receiving Automated Reports .............................................................................................
Stress Testing Hard Disks .........................................................................................................
Configuring the Storage Exerciser .......................................................................................
Storage Exerciser CLI Commands .................................................................................
Starting and Reviewing Read-only Jobs ................................................................................
Starting and Reviewing Background Jobs .............................................................................
Log Monitor Summary ................................................................................................
Log File Fields ..................................................................................................................
Clearing the Hardware Compression Faults ................................................................................
175
175
175
176
176
177
177
178
178
179
180
181
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
185
185
186
187
187
189
189
189
190
190
190
192
192
193
194
194
195
195
196
11 CLI Command Set ........................................................................ 199
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
7
Commands ............................................................................................................................
Conventions ....................................................................................................................
CLI-only Commands ................................................................................................................
Connection Commands .....................................................................................................
Output Commands ...........................................................................................................
VLS Commands ......................................................................................................................
Network Settings Configuration Commands .........................................................................
Configuration Commands ..................................................................................................
Management Commands ..................................................................................................
Monitoring Commands .....................................................................................................
199
199
199
199
200
200
200
202
209
210
12 Component Identification .............................................................. 213
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons ....................................................
Front Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons .............................................................................................
Rear Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ..............................................................................................
System Board Components ................................................................................................
System Board LEDs ...........................................................................................................
Node LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations ................................................................
Fan Module Locations .......................................................................................................
Processor Zone Fan Module LED ........................................................................................
VLS6200 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons .........................................................................
Front Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons .............................................................................................
Rear Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ..............................................................................................
System Board Components ................................................................................................
Accessing the VLS6200 HP Systems Insight Display ..............................................................
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs ...................................................................................
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations ...................................
Hard Drive LEDs ...............................................................................................................
Hard Drive LED Combinations ............................................................................................
Fan Locations ...................................................................................................................
VLS6600 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons .........................................................................
Front Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons .............................................................................................
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs ...................................................................................
Rear Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ..............................................................................................
System Board Components ................................................................................................
FBDIMM Slots ...........................................................................................................
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations ...................................
Hard Drive LEDs ...............................................................................................................
Hard Drive LED Combinations ............................................................................................
Fan Locations ...................................................................................................................
VLS6800 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons .........................................................................
Front Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons .............................................................................................
Rear Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ..............................................................................................
System Board Components ................................................................................................
Processor Memory Board Components ................................................................................
QuickFind Diagnostic Display LEDs .....................................................................................
8
213
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
221
221
222
223
224
225
226
226
227
229
229
230
230
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
240
240
241
244
245
245
246
247
Fan Locations ...................................................................................................................
Fan LED ..........................................................................................................................
VLS6000–series Disk Array Components, LEDs, and Buttons .........................................................
Front Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Front Panel LEDs ...............................................................................................................
Rear Panel Components ....................................................................................................
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ..............................................................................................
249
250
250
250
251
252
252
13 Component Replacement .............................................................. 255
Safety Considerations ..............................................................................................................
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge .......................................................................................
Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Damage .............................................................
Warnings and Cautions ....................................................................................................
Preparation Procedures ............................................................................................................
Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only) ............................................
Extending a VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node from the Rack ........................................
Extending a VLS6600 Node from the Rack ..........................................................................
Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack ........................................................................
Removing a VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node from the Rack .........................................
Removing a VLS6600 Node from the Rack ..........................................................................
Removing a VLS6800 Node from the Rack ..........................................................................
Removing the VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node Access Panel .......................................
Removing the VLS6600 Node Access Panel .........................................................................
Removing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel .........................................................................
Installing the VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node Access Panel ........................................
Installing the VLS6600 Node Access Panel ..........................................................................
Installing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel ..........................................................................
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node Component Replacement ..............................................................
SATA Hard Drive ..............................................................................................................
CD-ROM Drive .................................................................................................................
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................
Power Supply Zone Fan Module .........................................................................................
Processor Zone Fan Module ...............................................................................................
DIMM .............................................................................................................................
VLS6200 Node Component Replacement ..................................................................................
SATA Hard Drive ..............................................................................................................
DVD-CD Drive ..................................................................................................................
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................
Fan Module .....................................................................................................................
FBDIMM .........................................................................................................................
VLS6600 Node Component Replacement ..................................................................................
SATA Hard Drive ..............................................................................................................
DVD-CD Drive ..................................................................................................................
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................
Fan ................................................................................................................................
FBDIMM .........................................................................................................................
VLS6800 Node Component Replacement ..................................................................................
SCSI Hard Drive ...............................................................................................................
Diskette Drive ...................................................................................................................
DVD-CD Drive ..................................................................................................................
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................
Fan ................................................................................................................................
Processor Memory Board ..................................................................................................
Processor Power Module ...................................................................................................
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
255
255
255
256
256
257
257
258
259
261
262
262
262
263
264
265
265
265
265
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
271
272
273
275
277
278
278
279
281
282
283
284
284
286
286
287
288
289
290
9
DIMM .............................................................................................................................
Processor ........................................................................................................................
VLS6000–series Disk Array Component Replacement ..................................................................
Hard Drive ......................................................................................................................
Fan Module .....................................................................................................................
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................
Controller Module ............................................................................................................
291
292
294
294
295
296
297
14 Disaster Recovery ......................................................................... 299
Recovering from Operating System Failure .................................................................................
Restoring the Configuration Settings ....................................................................................
Restoring the Virtual Library Configuration from a Configuration File .................................
Rebuilding the Virtual Library Configuration ..................................................................
Re-installing the VLS Licenses ..............................................................................................
Warm Failover .................................................................................................................
Recovering from a VLS6000 Disk Array RAID Volume Failure ........................................................
Recovering from a Node RAID Volume Failure ............................................................................
299
300
300
300
301
301
301
302
15 Support and Other Resources ........................................................ 303
Related Information .................................................................................................................
Documents ......................................................................................................................
Websites .........................................................................................................................
Document Conventions and Symbols .........................................................................................
Rack Stability .........................................................................................................................
Contacting HP ........................................................................................................................
Before you Contact HP ......................................................................................................
HP Contact Information .....................................................................................................
Subscription Service ................................................................................................................
Customer Self Repair ...............................................................................................................
HP Insight Remote Support software ..........................................................................................
Product Warranties .................................................................................................................
Documentation Feedback .........................................................................................................
303
303
303
304
305
306
306
306
306
307
307
307
308
A Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 309
VLS Common Issues ................................................................................................................
Automigration/Replication Issues ..............................................................................................
Destination library status icon ............................................................................................
Replacing a library ...........................................................................................................
Deduplication Issues ................................................................................................................
309
316
316
317
317
B Specifications ................................................................................ 319
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node ..................................................................................................
VLS6200 Node ......................................................................................................................
VLS6600 Node ......................................................................................................................
VLS6800 Node ......................................................................................................................
VLS6000–series Disk Array ......................................................................................................
Environmental Specifications ....................................................................................................
319
320
321
322
323
323
C Regulatory Compliance Notices ....................................................... 325
Regulatory Compliance Identification Numbers ........................................................................... 325
Federal Communications Commission Notice ............................................................................. 325
FCC rating label .............................................................................................................. 325
10
Class A equipment .....................................................................................................
Class B equipment .....................................................................................................
Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo, United States only ...............
Modification ....................................................................................................................
Cables ............................................................................................................................
Canadian Notice (Avis Canadien) ............................................................................................
Class A Equipment ...........................................................................................................
Class B Equipment ............................................................................................................
European Union Notice ...........................................................................................................
Japanese Notices ...................................................................................................................
Japanese VCCI-A Notice ...................................................................................................
Japanese VCCI-B Notice ...................................................................................................
Japanese Power Cord Statement .........................................................................................
Korean Notices ......................................................................................................................
Class A Equipment ...........................................................................................................
Class B Equipment ............................................................................................................
Taiwanese Notices ..................................................................................................................
BSMI Class A Notice ........................................................................................................
Taiwan Battery Recycle Statement .......................................................................................
Laser Compliance Notices .......................................................................................................
English Laser Notice .........................................................................................................
Dutch Laser Notice ...........................................................................................................
French Laser Notice ..........................................................................................................
German Laser Notice ........................................................................................................
Italian Laser Notice ..........................................................................................................
Japanese Laser Notice ......................................................................................................
Spanish Laser Notice ........................................................................................................
Recycling Notices ...................................................................................................................
English Notice .................................................................................................................
Bulgarian Notice ..............................................................................................................
Czech Notice ..................................................................................................................
Danish Notice .................................................................................................................
Dutch Notice ...................................................................................................................
Estonian Notice ...............................................................................................................
Finnish Notice .................................................................................................................
French Notice ..................................................................................................................
German Notice ................................................................................................................
Greek Notice ...................................................................................................................
Hungarian Notice ............................................................................................................
Italian Notice ...................................................................................................................
Latvian Notice .................................................................................................................
Lithuanian Notice .............................................................................................................
Polish Notice ...................................................................................................................
Portuguese Notice ............................................................................................................
Romanian Notice .............................................................................................................
Slovak Notice ..................................................................................................................
Spanish Notice ................................................................................................................
Swedish Notice ................................................................................................................
Turkish Notice ..................................................................................................................
Battery Replacement Notices ....................................................................................................
Dutch Battery Notice .........................................................................................................
French Battery Notice .......................................................................................................
German Battery Notice .....................................................................................................
Italian Battery Notice ........................................................................................................
Japanese Battery Notice ...................................................................................................
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
325
326
326
326
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
327
327
328
328
328
328
328
328
329
329
329
330
330
330
331
331
331
331
332
332
332
332
333
333
333
333
334
334
334
334
335
335
335
335
336
336
336
336
337
337
338
338
339
339
11
Spanish Battery Notice ..................................................................................................... 340
Glossary .......................................................................................... 341
Index ............................................................................................... 347
12
Figures
1 VLS6100, VLS6200, and VLS6500 disk array rack mounting order ............................... 36
2 VLS6600 disk array rack mounting order ................................................................... 37
3 VLS6800 disk array rack mounting order ................................................................... 38
4 Positioning the rack mounting template ...................................................................... 40
5 Engaging the rack rail with the marked hole in the front of the rack ............................... 41
6 Engaging the rack rail with the marked hole in the rear of the rack ................................ 41
7 Loosening the locknut on the shipping bracket ............................................................ 42
8 Aligning the disk array with the rails ......................................................................... 42
9 Removing the mounting bracket covers ....................................................................... 43
10 Sliding the bracket forward to engage with the disk array ............................................ 43
11 Install rails ............................................................................................................. 44
12 Remove slides from rails ........................................................................................... 45
13 Attaching rails to the node ....................................................................................... 45
14 Attaching the rear bracket of the slide rail to the rack .................................................. 47
15 Attaching rails to the VLS6600 node ......................................................................... 47
16 Measuring with the template .................................................................................... 49
17 Pulling the rail compression lever ............................................................................... 49
18 Inserting the rail tabs on the rear of the rack ............................................................... 50
19 Inserting the rail tabs on the front of the rack .............................................................. 50
20 Attaching a node rail to the node ............................................................................. 51
21 Locking the inner slide rails into place ....................................................................... 52
22 Loading the node onto the rack rails .......................................................................... 52
23 Sliding the node to the rear of the rack ...................................................................... 53
24 Tightening the thumbscrews ...................................................................................... 53
25 VLS6100 and VLS6500 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node .................... 55
26 VLS6200 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node ........................................ 55
27 VLS6600 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node ........................................ 56
28 VLS6100 and VLS6500 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays .................. 57
29 VLS6200 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays ....................................... 57
30 VLS6600 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays ....................................... 58
31 Connecting the node power supplies to an AC power source ........................................ 59
32 Securing the power cord with the strain relief clip ........................................................ 59
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
13
33 Connecting the disk array power supplies to an AC power source ................................. 59
34 Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node .......................................................... 60
35 Connecting the VHDCI connector on each disk array to the appropriate VHDCI connector
on the node ........................................................................................................... 61
36 Connecting power supply AC power connectors to AC power sources ........................... 63
37 Securing the power cords ......................................................................................... 63
38 Connecting the disk array power supplies to an AC power source ................................. 63
39 Disk array volume configuration: 4 data + 2 parity disks and 5 data +1 parity disks ....... 66
40 Disk array volume configuration: 3 data + 1 parity disks .............................................. 66
41 Storage Pool details window .................................................................................... 69
42 Config port mode ................................................................................................... 78
43 Configuring deduplication options .......................................................................... 119
44 VLS6100 and VLS6500 node LED status during normal operation ............................... 126
45 VLS6200 node LED status during normal operation ................................................... 126
46 VLS6600 node LED status during normal operation ................................................... 127
47 VLS6800 node LED status during normal operation ................................................... 128
48 VLS discovery utility — main window ...................................................................... 142
49 VLS discovery utility – Device Configuration window .................................................. 143
50 Set Network Configuration Wizard window ............................................................. 145
51 Fibre Channel Host Ports window ............................................................................ 147
52 Host LUN Mapping Mode window .......................................................................... 152
53 LUN Mapping Device View window ........................................................................ 154
54 LUN Mapping Host View window ........................................................................... 155
55 LUN Mapping Host Setup window .......................................................................... 157
56 Library Parameters – Map LUNs window .................................................................. 159
57 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (1 of 12) ....................................................... 160
58 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (2 of 12) ....................................................... 161
59 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (5 of 12) ...................................................... 163
60 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (6 of 12) ....................................................... 163
61 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (8 of 12) ....................................................... 165
62 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (9 of 12) ....................................................... 166
63 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (10 of 12) ..................................................... 166
64 Device status icon in the status banner ..................................................................... 176
65 Navigation tree icon ............................................................................................. 176
66 Notification alert examples .................................................................................... 177
67 Edit Email Settings window .................................................................................... 179
68 Edit SNMP Settings window ................................................................................... 180
14
69 CSV data fields for VLS performance reports ............................................................ 185
70 SAN Health tab .................................................................................................... 188
71 Removing the Torx T-15 tool ................................................................................... 257
72 Extending the node from the rack ............................................................................ 258
73 Sliding the node back into the rack ......................................................................... 259
74 Loosening the front panel thumbscrews ..................................................................... 260
75 Extending the node from the rack ............................................................................ 260
76 Sliding the node into the rack ................................................................................. 261
77 Tightening the thumbscrews .................................................................................... 261
78 Removing the access panel .................................................................................... 264
79 Removing a node hard drive .................................................................................. 266
80 Ejecting the CD-ROM drive ..................................................................................... 267
81 Removing a node power supply .............................................................................. 267
82 Installing an AC power supply ................................................................................ 268
83 Placing the power cord in the strain relief clip ........................................................... 268
84 Removing the node power supply zone fan module ................................................... 269
85 Removing the processor zone fan module ................................................................. 270
86 Removing the node DIMM ..................................................................................... 270
87 Removing a Node Hard Drive ................................................................................ 271
88 Preparing the Node Hard Drive .............................................................................. 272
89 Installing the Node Hard Drive ............................................................................... 272
90 Removing a node hard drive .................................................................................. 279
91 Installing a node hard drive .................................................................................... 279
92 Removing the DVD-CD drive ................................................................................... 280
93 Installing the DVD-CD drive .................................................................................... 280
94 Removing a node power supply .............................................................................. 281
95 Installing a node power supply ............................................................................... 282
96 Installing the node FBDIMM ................................................................................... 284
97 Removing a hard drive .......................................................................................... 285
98 Installing a hard drive ............................................................................................ 285
99 Removing the diskette drive .................................................................................... 286
100 Removing the DVD-CD drive ................................................................................... 287
101 Removing a power supply ...................................................................................... 288
102 Removing a fan .................................................................................................... 289
103 Removing a processor memory board ...................................................................... 290
104 Removing a processor power module ...................................................................... 291
105 Removing a DIMM ................................................................................................ 291
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
15
106 Removing the processor heatsink ............................................................................. 293
107 Removing a processor ........................................................................................... 293
108 Removing a disk array hard drive ............................................................................ 295
109 Removing a disk array fan module .......................................................................... 296
110 Removing a disk array power supply ....................................................................... 296
111 Removing the disk RAID controller module ................................................................ 297
16
Tables
1 VLS6200–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration) ......................................................................................................... 21
2 VLS6500–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration) ......................................................................................................... 22
3 VLS6600–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration) ......................................................................................................... 23
4 VLS6800–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration) ......................................................................................................... 26
5 VLS user interface requirements ............................................................................... 133
6 CLI connection commands ...................................................................................... 199
7 CLI output commands ............................................................................................ 200
8 CLI network settings configuration commands ........................................................... 201
9 CLI configuration commands .................................................................................. 202
10 CLI management commands .................................................................................. 209
11 CLI monitoring commands ...................................................................................... 210
12 Power supply LED combinations .............................................................................. 242
13 Hard drive LED combinations .................................................................................. 243
14 Hard Drive LED Combinations ................................................................................ 251
15 Document Conventions .......................................................................................... 304
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
17
18
1 Introduction
The HP StorageWorks virtual library system (VLS) family consists of RAID disk-based SAN backup
devices that emulate physical tape libraries, allowing you to perform disk-to-virtual tape (disk-to-disk)
backups using your existing backup applications. The VLS family includes different series of models
that vary in storage capacity and performance.
The VLS emulates a variety of physical tape libraries, including the tape drives and cartridges inside
the libraries. You determine the number and types of tape libraries a VLS emulates, and the number
and types of tape drives and cartridges included in each tape library to meet the needs of your
environment. You configure the size of the virtual cartridges in your VLS, which provides even more
flexibility.
The VLS automigration features allow you to establish data pools to create and manage mirror (echo
copy) or snapshot (smart copy) replication of data for additional protection against data loss.
Deduplication provides the functionality in which only a single copy of a data block is stored on a
device. Duplicate information is removed, thereby reducing the amount of storage used by a given
data block.
The VLS accommodates mixed IT platform and backup application environments, allowing all your
servers and backup applications to access the virtual media simultaneously. You can specify which
servers are allowed to access each virtual library and tape drive you configure. You can change the
default LUNs assigned to the virtual library and tape drives for each host as needed to accommodate
different operating system requirements and restrictions.
Data stored on a VLS is easily cloned to physical tape for off-site disaster protection or long-term
archival using a backup application.
This section describes the HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system models.
VLS6000 Models
VLS6100–series
A VLS6100–series consists of a VLS6100–series node (head unit) and one Modular Smart Array 20
(MSA20) disk array. The node includes a single processor, two 2 GB Fibre Channel host ports, and
two VHDCI connectors. The disk array contains twelve SATA disks.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
19
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Disk array 0
An optional second MSA20 disk array can be added to a VLS6100 by purchasing a VLS capacity
bundle. A VLS capacity bundle includes a disk array with twelve SATA disks and a capacity license
for the additional disk array.
Adding a second disk array doubles the VLS6100 storage capacity. Adding a second disk array also
increases the performance. See the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library system Quickspec on the
HP web site (http://h18006.www1.hp.com/products/storageworks/6000vls) for performance data.
NOTE:
You can also re-use an existing MSA20 disk array with twelve blank SATA disks of the same, supported
type (all 250 GB, all 500 GB, or all 750 GB disks) and the latest MSA20 firmware. Purchase a
capacity license for the additional disk array (two licenses for each 750 GB disk) separately.
VLS6200–series
A VLS6200–series consists of a VLS6200–series node (head unit) and one Modular Smart Array 20
(MSA20) disk array. The node includes a single processor, two 4 GB Fibre Channel host ports, and
four VHDCI connectors. The disk array contains twelve SATA disks.
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Disk array 0
Up to three disk arrays can be added to a VLS6200 by purchasing up to three VLS capacity bundles.
A VLS capacity bundle includes a disk array with twelve SATA disks and a capacity license for the
additional disk array.
Adding disk arrays expands the VLS6200 storage capacity as shown in VLS6200-series capacity.
Adding disk arrays also increases the performance. See the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library
system Quickspec on the HP web site (http://h18006.www1.hp.com/products/storageworks/6000vls)
for performance data.
20
Introduction
NOTE:
You can also re-use an existing MSA20 disk array with twelve blank SATA disks of the same, supported
type (all 250 GB, all 500 GB, or all 750 GB disks) and the latest MSA20 firmware. Purchase a
capacity license for the additional disk array separately.
Table 1 VLS6200–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration)
Model
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
No
8.8 TB
Yes
17.6 TB
No
13.2 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
No
17.6 TB
Yes
35.2 TB
No
13.2 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
No
19.8 TB
Yes
39.6 TB
No
26.4 TB
Yes
52.8 TB
2
VLS6218
(all 500 GB disks)
3
4
2
VLS6227
(all 750 GB disks)
3
4
VLS6500–series
A VLS6500 consists of a VLS6500 node (head unit) and two MSA20 disk arrays. The node contains
dual processors, four 2 GB Fibre Channel host ports, and four VHDCI connectors. Each disk array
contains twelve SATA disks.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
21
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Disk array 0
3
Disk array 1
An optional third and fourth disk array can be added to a VLS6500 by purchasing one or two VLS
capacity bundles. A VLS capacity bundle includes a disk array with twelve SATA disks and a capacity
license for the additional disk array.
Adding a third and fourth disk array expands the VLS6500 storage capacity as shown in
VLS6500-series capacity. Adding a third and fourth disk array also increases the performance. See
the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library system Quickspec on the HP web site (http://
h18006.www1.hp.com/products/storageworks/6000vls) for performance data.
NOTE:
You can also re-use an existing MSA20 disk array with twelve blank SATA disks of the same, supported
type (all 250 GB, all 500 GB, or all 750 GB disks) and the latest MSA20 firmware. Purchase a
capacity license for the additional disk array separately.
Table 2 VLS6500–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration)
Model
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
No
5 TB
Yes
10 TB
No
7.5 TB
Yes
15 TB
No
10 TB
Yes
20 TB
No
8.8 TB
Yes
17.6 TB
No
13.2 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
No
17.6 TB
Yes
35.2 TB
2
VLS6510
(all 250 GB disks)
3
4
2
VLS6518
(all 500 GB disks)
3
4
22
Introduction
VLS6600–series
A VLS6600–series consists of a VLS6600–series node (head unit) and two Modular Smart Array 20
(MSA20) disk arrays. The node includes dual processors, four 4 GB Fibre Channel host ports, and
eight VHDCI connectors. The disk array contains twelve SATA disks.
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Disk array 0
3
Disk array 1
Up to six disk arrays can be added to a VLS6600 by purchasing up to six VLS capacity bundles. A
VLS capacity bundle includes a disk array with twelve SATA disks and a capacity license for the
additional disk array.
Adding disk arrays expands the VLS6600 storage capacity as shown in VLS6600-series capacity.
Adding disk arrays also increases the performance. See the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library
system Quickspec on the HP web site (http://h18006.www1.hp.com/products/storageworks/6000vls)
for performance data.
NOTE:
You can also re-use an existing MSA20 disk array with twelve blank SATA disks of the same, supported
type (all 250 GB, all 500 GB, or all 750 GB disks) and the latest MSA20 firmware. Purchase a
capacity license for the additional disk array separately.
NOTE:
Hardware compression is automatically enabled upon installation of a VLS6600–series system.
Table 3 VLS6600–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration)
Model
VLS6636
(all 500 GB disks)
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
Yes
13.2 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
3
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
23
Model
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
Yes
17.6 TB
Yes
35.2 TB
Yes
22 TB
Yes
44 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
Yes
52.8 TB
Yes
30.8 TB
Yes
61.6 TB
Yes
35.2 TB
Yes
70.4 TB
Yes
19.8 TB
Yes
39.6 TB
Yes
26.4 TB
Yes
52.8 TB
Yes
33 TB
Yes
66 TB
Yes
39.6 TB
Yes
79.2 TB
Yes
46.2 TB
Yes
92.4 TB
Yes
52.8 TB
Yes
105.6 TB
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
VLS6653
(all 750 GB disks)
6
7
8
VLS6800–series
A VLS6800–series consists of a VLS6800–series node (head unit) and four MSA20 disk arrays. The
node contains dual processors, four 2 GB Fibre Channel host ports, and sixteen VHDCI connectors.
Each disk array contains twelve SATA disks.
24
Introduction
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Disk array 0
3
Disk array 1
4
Disk array 2
5
Disk array 3
Up to twelve disk arrays can be added to a VLS6800 by purchasing up to twelve VLS capacity
bundles. A VLS capacity bundle includes a disk array with twelve SATA disks and a capacity license
for the additional disk array.
Adding disk arrays increases the VLS6800 storage capacity as shown in VLS6800-series capacity.
Adding disk arrays also increases the performance. See the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library
system Quickspec on the HP web site (http://h18006.www1.hp.com/products/storageworks/6000vls)
for performance data.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
25
NOTE:
You can also re-use an existing MSA20 disk array with twelve blank SATA disks of the same, supported
type (all 250 GB, all 500 GB, or all 750 GB disks) and the latest MSA20 firmware. Purchase a
capacity license for the additional disk array separately.
Table 4 VLS6800–series capacity (based on RAID5 configuration; capacity is lower in RAID6
configuration)
Model
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
No
10 TB
Yes
20 TB
No
12.5 TB
Yes
25 TB
No
15 TB
Yes
30 TB
No
17.5 TB
Yes
35 TB
No
20 TB
Yes
40 TB
No
22.5 TB
Yes
45 TB
No
25 TB
Yes
50 TB
No
27.5 TB
Yes
55 TB
No
30 TB
Yes
60 TB
No
32.5 TB
Yes
65 TB
No
35 TB
Yes
70 TB
No
37.5 TB
Yes
75 TB
4
5
6
7
8
9
VLS6840
(all 250 GB disks)
10
11
12
13
14
15
26
Introduction
Model
Disk arrays
Data compression (2:1)
enabled
Capacity
No
40 TB
Yes
80 TB
No
17.6 TB
Yes
35.2 TB
No
22 TB
Yes
44 TB
No
26.4 TB
Yes
52.8 TB
No
30.8 TB
Yes
61.6 TB
No
35.2 TB
Yes
70.4 TB
No
39.6 TB
Yes
79.2 TB
No
44 TB
Yes
88 TB
No
48.4 TB
Yes
96.8 TB
No
52.8 TB
Yes
105.6 TB
No
57.2 TB
Yes
114.4 TB
No
61.6 TB
Yes
123.2 TB
No
66 TB
Yes
132 TB
No
70.4 TB
Yes
140.8 TB
16
4
5
6
7
8
9
VLS6870
(all 500 GB disks)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
27
28
Introduction
2 Hardware Installation
This section details the steps to install the VLS hardware from installation preparation to final cabling.
Preparing for the Installation
Tools for Installation
• Two people
• #1 and #2 Phillips screwdriver
• Box cutting knife
CAUTION:
Do not use any power tools. They could strip or damage connections.
Taking ESD Precautions
To prevent damaging the system, be aware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up
the system or handling parts. A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor may
damage system boards or other static-sensitive devices. This type of damage may reduce the life
expectancy of the device.
To prevent electrostatic damage:
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid hand contact by transporting and storing products in static-safe containers.
Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free workstations.
Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers.
Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
Always be properly grounded when touching a static-sensitive component or assembly.
Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
Several methods are used for grounding. Use one or more of the following methods when handling
or installing electrostatic-sensitive parts:
• Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis.
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of 1 megaohm ±10 percent resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snug against the skin.
• Use heel straps, toe straps, or boot straps at standing workstations.
Wear the straps on both feet when standing on conductive floors or dissipating floor mats.
• Use conductive field service tools.
• Use a portable field service kit with a folding static-dissipating work mat.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
29
If you do not have any of the suggested equipment for proper grounding, have an authorized reseller
install the part.
For more information on static electricity or assistance with product installation, contact your authorized
reseller.
Unpacking
Place the shipping carton as close to the installation site as possible. Before unpacking the VLS, inspect
the shipping carton for damage that may have occurred during shipment. If you detect any damage,
notify the carrier and HP before unpacking the unit.
Removing the Packing Materials
To unpack the VLS:
1.
Open the top of the shipping cartons.
2.
Carefully lift the units out of the boxes and remove the packing materials.
3.
Place the units on a stable work surface.
NOTE:
Inspect the units for any damage that may have occurred during shipment. If damage is
detected, contact your authorized service representative.
4.
Remove the accessory kits and documentation from the shipping cartons. Set them aside for later
use.
5.
Place shipping materials back into the shipping cartons.
6.
Set the shipping cartons aside for later use.
Rack Planning Resources
The rack resource kit ships with all HP or Compaq branded 9000, 10000, and H9 series racks. A
summary of the content of each resource follows:
• Custom Builder is a web-based service for configuring one or many racks. Rack configurations
can be created using:
• A simple, guided interface
• Build-it-yourself model
• The Installing Rack Products video provides a visual overview of operations required for configuring
a rack with rack-mountable components. It also provides the following important configuration
steps:
• Planning the site
• Installing rack servers and rack options
• Cabling servers in a rack
• Coupling multiple racks
30
Hardware Installation
• The Rack Products Documentation CD enables you to view, search, and print documentation for
HP and Compaq branded racks and rack options. It also helps you set up and optimize a rack in
a manner that best fits your environment.
Rack Requirements
HP supports the HP System E racks and the HP 10000 Series racks for use with VLS systems. Other
racks might also be suitable, but have not been tested with the VLS.
Rack Warnings
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, be sure that:
• The leveling jacks are extended to the floor.
• The full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
• The stabilizing feet are attached to the rack if it is a single-rack installation.
• The racks are coupled together in multiple-rack installations.
• Only one component is extended at a time. A rack may become unstable if more than one component is extended for any reason.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage when unloading a rack:
• At least two people are needed to safely unload a rack from a pallet. An empty 42U rack can
weigh as much as 115 kg (253 lb), can stand more than 2.1 m (7 ft) tall, and may become unstable
when being moved on its casters.
• Never stand in front of a rack when it is rolling down the ramp from the pallet. Always handle a
rack from both sides.
Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents
Unpack the VLS shipping cartons and locate the materials and documentation necessary for installing
the VLS. All the rack mounting hardware and documentation necessary for installing a VLS node into
a rack is included in the node shipping carton. All the rack mounting hardware and documentation
necessary for installing a VLS disk array into a rack is included in the disk array shipping carton.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
31
VLS6100 and VLS6500 System Shipping Carton
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Node power cord
3
Serial cable
4
1U rack mounting hardware kit and documentation
5
Printed VLS node installation poster
6
Documentation CD and VLS Quick Restore CD
32
Hardware Installation
VLS6200 System Shipping Carton
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Node power cords (2)
3
Serial cable
4
1U rack mounting hardware kit and documentation
5
Printed VLS6200 node installation poster
6
Documentation CD and VLS6200 Quick Restore CD
7
Loopback plugs
VLS6600 System Shipping Carton
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
33
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Node power cords (2)
3
Serial cable
4
1U rack mounting hardware kit and documentation
5
Printed VLS6600 node installation poster
6
Documentation CD and VLS6600 Quick Restore CD
7
Loopback plugs
VLS6800 System Shipping Carton
Item
Description
1
Node
2
Node power cords (2)
3
Serial cable
4
Rack mounting hardware
5
Printed VLS node installation poster
6
Documentation CD and VLS Quick Restore CD
34
Hardware Installation
Disk Array Shipping Carton
Item
Description
1
MSA20 disk array
2
SCSI cable
3
Printed VLS disk array installation poster
4
Disk array power cords (2)
5
2U rack mounting hardware kit and documentation
Installing the Disk Arrays into a Rack
This section describes how to install the MSA20 disk array.
WARNING!
Do not use the handles on the disk array power supply units to lift or hold the disk array. These handles
are designed only for holding the power supply units or removing them from the disk array, not for
supporting the weight of the disk array.
Rack Mounting Requirements
Each disk array requires a vertical rack space of 2U (equivalent to 89 mm, or 3.5 inches).
HP recommends that you mount the disk arrays in the order shown in Figure 1, Figure 2, or VLS6600
and VLS6800 disk array rack mounting order, depending on model.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
35
Figure 1 VLS6100, VLS6200, and VLS6500 disk array rack mounting order
.
Item
Description
1
Disk array 3
2
Disk array 2
3
Node
4
Disk array 0
5
Disk array 1
36
Hardware Installation
Figure 2 VLS6600 disk array rack mounting order
.
Item
Description
1
Disk array 7
2
Disk array 6
3
Disk array 5
4
Disk array 4
5
Node
6
Disk array 0
7
Disk array 1
8
Disk array 2
9
Disk array 3
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
37
Figure 3 VLS6800 disk array rack mounting order
.
Item
Description
1
Disk array 15
2
Disk array 14
3
Disk array 13
4
Disk array 12
5
Disk array 11
6
Disk array 10
7
Disk array 9
8
Disk array 8
38
Hardware Installation
Item
Description
9
Node
10
Disk array 0
11
Disk array 1
12
Disk array 2
13
Disk array 3
14
Disk array 4
15
Disk array 5
16
Disk array 6
17
Disk array 7
Mounting a Disk Array into a Rack
WARNING!
The disk array weighs 24.6 kg (54.3 lb) full. At least two people are required to lift,
move, and install the disk array.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
39
1.
Use the 2U rack mounting template as a guide to indicate where on the rack the rails for the disk
array are to be mounted.
a.
At the front of the rack, with the front of the template facing you, align the lower edge of
the template with the bottom of the rack (or the top of the previous rack component). Be sure
that the lower edge of the template is level.
b.
Push the template tabs into the holes in the rack uprights to hold the template in place.
Figure 4 Positioning the rack mounting template
.
c.
Use a permanent marker pen to indicate the holes in the rack uprights into which the
scissor-like locking latches are to be inserted, as specified by the template.
d.
Repeat these steps to mark the back of the rack, using the information on the back of the
template as a guide to the required location of the locking latches in this case.
WARNING!
The pins in the rails are load-bearing. Do not remove the pins except to replace them with
the pins for round-hole racks.
2.
If the holes in the rack uprights are round instead of square, remove the standard pins from the
rails and replace them with the round-hole pins provided in the rack mounting hardware kit.
3.
Identify the left (L) and right (R) rack rails by markings stamped into the rails.
40
Hardware Installation
4.
Slide the front end of the right rack rail toward the inside front of the rack until the locking latch
engages with the marked hole in the front rack upright.
Figure 5 Engaging the rack rail with the marked hole in the front of the rack
.
5.
Extend the back end of the rail toward the inside rear of the rack until the locking latch engages
with the marked hole in the rear rack upright.
Figure 6 Engaging the rack rail with the marked hole in the rear of the rack
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
41
6.
Loosen the locknut on the shipping bracket, and move the bracket to the rearmost position on the
rail.
Figure 7 Loosening the locknut on the shipping bracket
.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the left rack rail.
8.
Align the disk array with the rails, and slide it into the rack.
Figure 8 Aligning the disk array with the rails
.
42
Hardware Installation
9.
Remove the mounting bracket covers, and tighten the thumbscrews to secure the disk array to
the rack.
Figure 9 Removing the mounting bracket covers
.
10. Replace the mounting bracket covers.
11. If you intend to move the rack while the disk array is installed, adjust the shipping brackets on
each rail to secure the disk array to the rack.
a.
Loosen the shipping bracket locknut.
b.
Slide the bracket forward until it engages with the disk array chassis.
c.
Tighten the locknut.
d.
Repeat this procedure for the other rail.
Figure 10 Sliding the bracket forward to engage with the disk array
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
43
Installing the VLS6100 and VLS6500 Nodes into a Rack
NOTE:
Install components starting with the first available slot at bottom of the rack and working toward the
top of the rack. Starting at the bottom distributes the weight correctly in the cabinet.
NOTE:
If you are installing the node into a telco rack, order the appropriate option kit at the RackSolutions.com
web site: http://www.racksolutions.com/hp. Follow the instructions on the web site to install the rack
brackets.
To install a node into the rack involves three main tasks:
• Install Rails in the Rack
• Attach Rails to the Node
• Install Appliance in Rack
Install Rails in the Rack
1.
Locate the appropriate rail kit—part number 360332–003.
2.
Install the two slide rails to the sides of the rack.
a.
Adjust the side rail assemblies to the approximate rack depth.
b.
At one side of the rack, align the rail holes with the holes in the rack and secure with the
provided mounting hardware using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Figure 11 Install rails
.
c.
44
Repeat these tasks for the rail on the other side of the rack.
Hardware Installation
3.
Remove the inner slide rails from the outer slide rails. To do so, extend the inner slide rails from
the front of the rack until they lock in place. Then press the inner rail release latch (see Figure
12) and pull the inner slide rails straight out.
Figure 12 Remove slides from rails
.
Attach Rails to the Node
To attach the rails to the node:
1.
Align the rail with the node so that the word “FRONT” on the rail is seen right-side-up and at the
front of the node.
Figure 13 Attaching rails to the node
.
2.
Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node.
3.
Put the rail onto the node with the tabs extending into the holes on the side of the rail, then slide
the rail toward the front of the node until the tabs are locked into the rail.
4.
Perform these steps again to Install the other rail on the other side of the node.
Install Appliance in Rack
1.
Align the rails on the node with the rails in the rack.
2.
Slide the node fully into the rack.
The rails on the node will lock into the rails on the rack.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
45
3.
With the node fully seated in the rack, tighten the thumbscrews just until the node bezel is secured
to the rack.
Installing the VLS6600 Node into a Rack
NOTE:
If you are installing the node into a telco rack, order the appropriate option kit at the RackSolutions.com
web site: http://www.racksolutions.com/hp. Follow the instructions on the web site to install the rack
brackets.
NOTE:
Allow enough rack space above and/or below the node to mount the disk arrays. A disk array
requires a vertical rack space of 2U (equivalent to 89 mm, or 3.5 inches).
To install a VLS6600 node into the rack involves three main tasks:
1.
Install Rails in the Rack
2.
Attach Rails to the VLS6600 Node (appliance)
3.
Install Appliance in the Rack
Install Rails in the Rack
To install the rails in the rack:
1.
46
Locate the appropriate rail kit—part number 365517-B21.
Hardware Installation
2.
Install the two slide rails in the rack.
a.
Locate the slide rail with the words REAR LEFT and align it with the rear of the left side of
the rack as you face the front of the rack.
b.
Adjust the slide rail assemblies to the approximate rack depth.
c.
From the outside rear of the rack, insert the screws of the slide rail rear bracket into the
appropriate holes in the rack and pull the rail forward until the rear bracket of the rail snaps
into place.
Figure 14 Attaching the rear bracket of the slide rail to the rack
.
d.
From the outside front of the rack on the left rail, insert the screws of the slide rail front bracket
into the appropriate holes in the rack and push the rail back until the front bracket of the
rail snaps into place.
e.
Repeat these steps with the right bracket on the right side of the rack.
Attach Rails to the VLS6600 Node (appliance)
To attach the rails to the appliance:
1.
Align one of the rails with the left side of the node (as you face the front of the node) so that the
word “FRONT” on the rail is seen right-side-up and at the front of the node.
Figure 15 Attaching rails to the VLS6600 node
.
2.
Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node.
3.
Put the rail onto the node with the tabs extending into the holes on the side of the rail, then slide
the rail toward the front of the node until the tabs are locked into the rail.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
47
4.
On the other side of the node, align the remaining rail so that the word “FRONT” on the rail is
seen at the front of the node. It will be printed upside-down.
5.
Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node.
6.
Put the rail onto the node with the tabs extending into the holes on the side of the rail, then slide
the rail toward the front of the node until the tabs are locked into the rail.
Install Appliance in the Rack
To install the appliance into the rack:
1.
Align the rails on the appliance with the rails in the rack.
2.
Slide the appliance fully into the rack.
The rails on the appliance will lock into the rails on the rack. When fully seated against the rack,
the appliance will also lock into place.
Installing the VLS6800 Node into a Rack
Follow the steps in this section if you are installing the VLS6800 node into a rack with square holes.
If you are installing the node into a rack with round holes, order the appropriate rack installation
option kit, and then refer to the installation instructions that ship with the option kit for more information.
If you are installing the VLS6800 node into a telco rack, order the appropriate option kit at the
RackSolutions.com web site (http://www.racksolutions.com/hp). Follow the node-specific instructions
on the web site to install the rack brackets. After installing the brackets, follow the steps in this section.
WARNING!
When installing the node in a telco rack, be sure that the rack frame is adequately secured to the top
and bottom of the building structure.
NOTE:
Allow enough rack space above and/or below the node to mount the disk arrays. A disk array
requires a vertical rack space of 2U (equivalent to 89 mm, or 3.5 inches).
Plan to mount up to four disk arrays below the node and after that up to four more disk arrays above
the node as shown in VLS6600 and VLS6800 disk array rack mounting order.
To install a VLS6800 node into the rack involves three main tasks:
• Install Rails in the Rack
• Install Appliance in Rack
48
Hardware Installation
Install Rails in the Rack
1.
Mark the rack.
WARNING!
Always plan the rack installation so that the heaviest item is on the bottom of the rack. Install
the heaviest item first, and continue to populate the rack from the bottom to the top.
Figure 16 Measuring with the template
.
2.
From the front of the rack, identify the rear rack holes on the inside of the vertical rack that you
marked with the template.
3.
Pull the rail compression lever toward you.
Figure 17 Pulling the rail compression lever
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
49
4.
Insert the two rail tabs from the end of the rack rail assembly into the marked holes on the inside
of the rear of the rack.
Figure 18 Inserting the rail tabs on the rear of the rack
.
5.
Adjust the rack rail depth by sliding it forward.
6.
Insert the two rail tabs from the rack rail assembly into the marked holes on the inside of the front
of the rack.
Figure 19 Inserting the rail tabs on the front of the rack
.
7.
Release the rail compression lever to seat the tabs in the rack post.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the other rail.
50
Hardware Installation
Install Appliance in Rack
1.
Attach the node rails to the node.
Figure 20 Attaching a node rail to the node
.
WARNING!
The node is very heavy, 44.5 kg (98 lb) full. To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage
to the equipment:
• Remove the hot-plug power supplies to reduce the weight of the node before lifting it.
Do not remove any other hardware.
• Observe local occupational health and safety requirements and guidelines for material
handling.
• At least two people are required to lift and rack mount the node.
2.
Remove the node power supplies. See Power Supply.
3.
Pull the inner slide rail forward from each rack rail assembly until it locks into place.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
51
4.
Slide the inner bearing brace forward until it stops.
Figure 21 Locking the inner slide rails into place
.
CAUTION:
Keep the node parallel to the floor when sliding the node rails into the standard rack rails.
Tilting the node up or down can result in damage to the rails.
5.
Lift the node using the four lift handles on the sides of the node.
6.
Align the node, and carefully insert the node rail into the inner slide rail until the rail-release
levers engage.
Figure 22 Loading the node onto the rack rails
.
52
Hardware Installation
7.
Reach around the front of the node to press the rail-release levers at the front of both node rails,
and continue to slide the node into the rack.
Figure 23 Sliding the node to the rear of the rack
.
8.
Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the node to the rack.
Figure 24 Tightening the thumbscrews
.
9.
Reinstall the power supplies.
Installing the VLS6200 Node into a Rack
NOTE:
If you are installing the node into a telco rack, order the appropriate option kit at the RackSolutions.com
web site: http://www.racksolutions.com/hp. Follow the instructions on the web site to install the rack
brackets.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
53
Install the node in the rack as follows:
1.
Locate the rail kit — part number 360332–003.
Install the two outer slide rails to the rack. The outer rails are marked “FRONT” and “REAR.”
On both sides of the rack, align the rail holes with the holes in the rack and secure.
2.
Attach the inner rails to the sides of the node.
Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node.
NOTE:
The inner rails are identical.
The word “FRONT” should face away from the node, but will appear updside-down on one
side.
3.
Align the rails on the node with the rails in the rack, and slide the node fully into the rack.
4.
Tighten the thumbscrews.
54
Hardware Installation
Installing VLS6100, VLS6200, VLS6500, and VLS6600 Cables
1.
Connect Fibre Channel cables from your SAN media server or from your physical tape libraries
(for automigration) to the node Fibre Channel host ports, starting with Fibre Channel host port 0
and working towards Fibre Channel host port 3 (Figure 25, Figure 26, and Figure 27).
NOTE:
For Automigration, you will be asked to select the number of Fibre Channel ports to reserve
for Automigration. The software will then reserve that number of ports, beginning with port
3, then port 2, etc. so that the left-most ports as you face the back of the library are used
to connect to physical libraries, either directly or through an Fibre Channel switch.
a.
VLS6100 and VLS6500
Figure 25 VLS6100 and VLS6500 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node
.
b.
Item
Description
1
FC host port 0
2
FC host port 1
3
FC host port 2
4
FC host port 3
5
10/100/1000 NIC 1 connector
VLS6200
Figure 26 VLS6200 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
55
c.
Item
Description
1
FC host port 0
2
FC host port 1
3
NIC 1 connector
VLS6600
Figure 27 VLS6600 — Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node
.
2.
Item
Description
1
FC host port 0
2
FC host port 1
3
FC host port 2
4
FC host port 3
5
NIC 1 connector
Install a Fibre Channel loopback plug in any unused Fibre Channel host ports. Loopback plugs
are included in the server accessory kit.
NOTE:
Unused Fibre Channel ports without loopback plugs cause connection failures and associated
failure notifications.
3.
Connect a standard Ethernet (CAT-5) cable from your local IP network (LAN) to the 10/100/1000
NIC 1 (RJ-45) connector (Figure 25, Figure 26, and Figure 27).
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not
plug telephone or telecommunications connectors into RJ-45 (NIC) connectors.
56
Hardware Installation
4.
Connect the VHDCI connector on each disk array to the appropriate VHDCI connector on the
node (Figure 28, Figure 29, and Figure 30).
Figure 28 VLS6100 and VLS6500 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays
.
Item
Description
1
VHDCI connector A1, connect to Disk array 0
2
VHDCI connector A2, connect to Disk array 1
3
VHDCI connector B1, connect to Disk array 21
4
VHDCI connector B2, connect to Disk array 31
1
Not applicable to the VLS6100.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
57
Figure 29 VLS6200 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays
.
Item
Description
1
VHDCI connector A1, connect to Disk array 0
2
VHDCI connector A2, connect to Disk array 1
3
VHDCI connector B1, connect to Disk array 2
4
VHDCI connector B2, connect to Disk array 3
Figure 30 VLS6600 — Connecting the VHDCI connectors to disk arrays
.
58
Item
Description
1
VHDCI connector slot 4, A1, connect to disk array enclosure 0
2
VHDCI connector slot 4, A2, connect to disk array enclosure 1
3
VHDCI connector slot 4, B1, connect to disk array enclosure 2
4
VHDCI connector slot 4, B2, connect to disk array enclosure 3
5
VHDCI connector slot 5, A1, connect to disk array enclosure 4
6
VHDCI connector slot 5, A2, connect to disk array enclosure 5
7
VHDCI connector slot 5, B1, connect to disk array enclosure 6
8
VHDCI connector slot 5, B2, connect to disk array enclosure 7
Hardware Installation
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
5.
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important
safety feature.
Plug the power cord into a grounded (earthed) electrical outlet that is easily accessible
at all times.
Unplug the power cord from the power supply to disconnect power to the equipment.
Do not route the power cord where it can be walked on or pinched by items placed
against it. Pay particular attention to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the
cord extends from the node.
Connect the node power supplies' AC power connectors to two separate AC power sources
using the power cables provided (Figure 31).
Figure 31 Connecting the node power supplies to an AC power source
.
6.
Use the strain relief clip from the node hardware kit to secure the power cord (Figure 32).
Figure 32 Securing the power cord with the strain relief clip
.
7.
Connect the disk array power supply AC power connectors on the left-side to one AC power
source using the power cables provided. Then, connect the disk array power supply AC power
connectors on the right-side to a second AC power source using the power cables provided
(Figure 33).
Figure 33 Connecting the disk array power supplies to an AC power source
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
59
Installation is complete. You may now power up the disk array(s) and then the node as described in
Operation.
Installing VLS6800 Cables
1.
Connect Fibre Channel cables from your SAN media server to the node Fibre Channel host ports,
starting with Fibre Channel host port 0 and working towards Fibre Channel host port 3 (Figure
34).
Leave the Fibre Channel loopback plug in any unused Fibre Channel host ports. This will prevent
you from receiving Fibre Channel notification alerts, which are generated by the VLS when no
signal is detected at a Fibre Channel host port.
Figure 34 Connecting SAN and LAN cabling to the node
.
2.
Item
Description
1
10/100/1000 NIC 1 connector
2
FC host port 0
3
FC host port 1
4
FC host port 2
5
FC host port 3
Connect a standard Ethernet (CAT-5) cable from your local IP network (LAN) to the 10/100/1000
NIC 1 (RJ-45) connector (Figure 34).
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug telephone
or telecommunications connectors into RJ-45 (NIC) connectors.
60
Hardware Installation
3.
Connect the VHDCI connector on each disk array to the appropriate VHDCI connector on the
node using the SCSI cables provided (Figure 35).
Figure 35 Connecting the VHDCI connector on each disk array to the appropriate VHDCI connector
on the node
.
Item
Description
1
VHDCI connector slot 8, A1, connect to Disk array 0
2
VHDCI connector slot 8, A2, connect to Disk array 1
3
VHDCI connector slot 8, B1, connect to Disk array 2
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
61
Item
Description
4
VHDCI connector slot 8, B2, connect to Disk array 3
5
VHDCI connector slot 7, A1, connect to Disk array 4
6
VHDCI connector slot 7, A2, connect to Disk array 5
7
VHDCI connector slot 7, B1, connect to Disk array 6
8
VHDCI connector slot 7, B2, connect to Disk array 7
9
VHDCI connector slot 6, A1, connect to Disk array 8
10
VHDCI connector slot 6, A2, connect to Disk array 9
11
VHDCI connector slot 6, B1, connect to Disk array 10
12
VHDCI connector slot 6, B2, connect to Disk array 11
13
VHDCI connector slot 5, A1, connect to Disk array 12
14
VHDCI connector slot 5, A2, connect to Disk array 13
15
VHDCI connector slot 5, B1, connect to Disk array 14
16
VHDCI connector slot 5, B2, connect to Disk array 15
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
• Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important
safety feature.
• Plug the power cord into a grounded (earthed) electrical outlet that is easily accessible
at all times.
• Unplug the power cord from the power supply to disconnect power to the equipment.
• Do not route the power cord where it can be walked on or pinched by items placed
against it. Pay particular attention to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the
cord extends from the node.
62
Hardware Installation
4.
Connect the node power supply AC power connectors to two separate AC power sources using
the power cables provided (Figure 36).
Figure 36 Connecting power supply AC power connectors to AC power sources
.
5.
Secure the power cords with the retaining clips (Figure 37).
Figure 37 Securing the power cords
.
6.
Connect the disk array power supply AC power connectors on the left-side to one AC power
source using the power cables provided. Then, connect the disk array power supply AC power
connectors on the right-side to a second AC power source using the power cables provided
(Figure 38).
Figure 38 Connecting the disk array power supplies to an AC power source
.
Installation is complete. You may now power up the disk arrays and then the node as described in
Operation.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
63
64
Hardware Installation
3 Storage Configuration
This section describes how to configure the storage after the nodes have been configured.
Managing VLS6000–series Capacity
There are several ways to manage the capacity of your system:
• Select and configure the RAID level. See Configuring the RAID Level.
• Add an array (a new or existing array and a capacity license). See Adding Capacity by Adding
an Array.
• Upgrade disks in the array from lower capacity to higher capacity disks (for example, from 250
GB disks to 500 GB or 750 GB disks). See Adding Capacity by Upgrading Disks in the Array.
• Remove arrays. See Removing Arrays.
• Perform storage pool management tasks. See Managing Storage Pools.
• Enable device-side data compression when creating new tape drives. See “Creating Tape
Drives” on page 162.
If you have upgraded as much as possible but still need more space, you can upgrade the system to
a larger node model within your series (for example, upgrade a VLS6100 to a VLS6500 or VLS6800,
or upgrade a VLS6500 to a VLS6800). To do this, purchase a new VLS base model of the correct
type, then purchase the installation service for the new VLS plus an extra half-day for the node upgrade.
Configuring the RAID Level
All VLS6000–series systems default to a RAID 5 storage array configuration; however, VLS6000–series
with firmware version 2.0 or later can be configured as a RAID 6. The RAID 5 configuration prevents
data loss and prevents the backup window from being missed if one hard drive fails in any of the
RAID volumes; the RAID 6 configuration prevents data loss and prevents the backup window from
being missed if up to two hard drives fail in a single RAID volume.
VLS disk storage consists of one or more MSA20 disk arrays.
• A RAID5 configuration on an array with 250GB or 500GB drives has each disk array configured
into two 5+1 (5 data disks, 1 parity disk) RAID 5 volumes presented as two LUNs (one LUN per
RAID volume). See Figure 39.
• A RAID5 configuration on an array with 750 GB drives has each disk array configured into three
3+1 (3 data disks, 1 parity disk) RAID5 volumes presented as three LUNs (one LUNs per RAID
volume). See Figure 40.
• A RAID6 configuration on an array with 250GB or 500GB drives has each disk array configured
into two 4+2 (4 data disks, 2 parity disk) RAID 6 volumes presented as two LUNs (one LUN per
RAID volume). See Figure 39.
• A RAID6 configuration on an array with 750 GB drives has each disk array configured into two
4+2 (4 data disks, 2 parity disk) RAID6 volumes presented as four LUNs (two LUNs per RAID
volume). See Figure 39.
All the disk arrays are logically grouped together by default to form one storage pool.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
65
Item
Description
1
RAID volume 1 (RAID5 250GB, RAID5 500GB, RAID6 250GB, RAID6 500GB)
RAID volumes 1 and 3 (RAID6 750 GB)
2
RAID volume 2 (RAID5 250GB, RAID5 500GB, RAID6 250GB, RAID6 500GB)
RAID volumes 2 and 4 (RAID6 750 GB)
Figure 39 Disk array volume configuration: 4 data + 2 parity disks and 5 data +1 parity disks
.
Item
Description
1
RAID volume 1 (RAID5 750GB)
2
RAID volume 2 (RAID5 750GB)
3
RAID volume 3 (RAID5 750GB)
Figure 40 Disk array volume configuration: 3 data + 1 parity disks
.
CAUTION:
Replace a failed disk array hard drive as soon as possible. If a second disk in a RAID5 volume or a
third disk in a RAID6 volume fails before the previously— failed disks are replaced, the entire RAID
volume will fail and the data on that RAID volume will be destroyed.
Since, virtual media data is evenly striped across all the RAID volumes for high performance, it is very
likely that a single RAID volume failure will affect every piece of virtual media, making all the data
stored on the disk arrays unrecoverable.
Establish the desired RAID level of your system before performing any other configuration tasks. To
change RAID levels, see Rebuilding the Storage Pool. Once selected, configuring the VLS6000–series
disk array in either a RAID5 or RAID6 configuration is fully automated and self-managed by the VLS
- no administrator action is required. The VLS software automatically builds the disk array RAID volumes
and repairs any RAID volume failures when failed disks are replaced.
66
Storage Configuration
CAUTION:
Changing the RAID configuration on your system will rebuild all of the storage pools and will delete
all data on the VLS. For this reason, it is important to establish the RAID configuration immediately.
Adding Capacity by Adding an Array
Add capacity by adding an array and a capacity license to the VLS. You can either purchase a
capacity bundle (which includes a new disk array and a capacity license), or you can add an existing
MSA20 disk array, the latest MSA20 firmware, and a purchased capacity license to the VLS.
NOTE:
To use an existing array, the array must have 12 blank drives of the same, supported type (for example,
all 12 are 750 GB disks).
To add a disk array:
1.
Install the capacity license. See Installing Additional Licenses.
CAUTION:
If a capacity bundle or disk array is added to the VLS before the capacity license is installed
for the disk array, a capacity license violation will occur. This will disable the VLS storage
capacity, so that the VLS is unable to perform for read/write operations. VLS storage capacity
is re-enabled once the capacity license is installed on the VLS (without needing to reboot).
2.
Power off the node. See “Powering Off the System” on page 130.
3.
Install the MSA20 disk array into the rack. See “Installing the Disk Arrays into a Rack” on page 35.
4.
Connect the VHDCI connector on the disk array to a VHDCI connector on the node. See Figure
28 on page 57 or Figure 35 on page 61, depending on VLS model.
5.
Connect the AC input socket of each disk array power supply to an AC power source.
6.
Power on the disk array. See “Powering on VLS6000 Disk Arrays” on page 125.
7.
Power on the node. See “Powering on the VLS6000–series System” on page 125.
Virtual media will be automatically redistributed across the new storage when the tape is
overwritten.
Adding Capacity by Upgrading Disks in the Array
If the library has one or more array shelves with low capacity SATA disks (for example, 250 GB
disks), system capacity can be increased by upgrading these shelves to higher capacity disks (500
GB or 750 GB disks).
CAUTION:
This upgrade increases device capacity but erases all current virtual cartridges in the process.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
67
To upgrade to higher capacity disks:
1. Backup the current VLS virtual cartridges to tape. Use the tape copy feature from the backup
application.
2. Ensure the MSA firmware is at 2.02 or later and the VLS software version is at 2.0.0 or later,
which are the required minimum versions to support the higher capacity disks. If necessary,
download and install the correct software and firmware before continuing.
3. Purchase the required number of individual SATA drives from HP. All 12 drives in an array must
be of the same type. Do not mix drive types within an array.
4. To upgrade to 750 GB disks, purchase and install one additional capacity license per 750 GB
disk. (750 GB disks require two licenses each, as opposed to 250 and 500 GB disks which require only one license each.)
5. Power off the node. See “Powering Off the System” on page 130.
6. Remove all disks from each array that is to be upgraded and replace them with higher capacity
disks.
7. Power on the node. See “Powering on the VLS6000–series System” on page 125.
8. Run a “Rebuild Storage Pools” operation from Command View VLS. See Rebuilding the Storage
Pool. This deletes the current RAID configuration and recreates it.
9. Recreate previous virtual cartridges using Command View VLS. See “Creating Cartridges” on page 164.
10. Restore previous virtual cartridge data from the backup tapes to the virtual cartridges. Use the
tape copy feature from the backup application.
Removing Arrays
Removing an array from the system destroys all current virtual tapes in the system. Once a disk array
is added to the VLS, the only way it can be removed from the VLS storage pool is by powering off
the node, removing the array, powering on the node, then running Rebuild Storage Pool (see Rebuilding
the Storage Pool). This will delete the array from the configuration and reformat the remaining arrays
into working capacity.
In addition, if you add a used array to another system you must perform the steps listed in this section
then run Rebuild Storage Pool in order to add the capacity to your system. This destroys all current
virtual tapes in the system while it reformats all the arrays to reflect the new working capacity.
Managing Storage Pools
The VLS6000–series virtual tape library automatically creates one pool across all arrays on the library.
On the system page, select Storage Pools to view the pool information. When necessary, you can
also rebuild the pool from this screen.
Viewing the Storage Pool
To view the storage pool information:
1.
Open a Command View VLS session and log in as the administrator. See “Opening a Command
View VLS Session from a Web Browser” on page 135.
2.
Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree.
68
Storage Configuration
3.
Select the storage pool to view in the navigation tree.
The storage pool details window opens (Figure 41).
Figure 41 Storage Pool details window
.
Rebuilding the Storage Pool
To delete all information on the arrays and reformat them, perform a Rebuild Storage Pool from
Command View VLS.
CAUTION:
Rebuild Storage Pool destroys all current virtual tape cartridges in the system.
To rebuild the storage pool:
1.
Open a Command View VLS session and log in as the administrator. See “Opening a Command
View VLS Session from a Web Browser” on page 135.
2.
Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Rebuild All Storage Pools from the task bar.
4.
Select RAID 5 or RAID 6 and pay attention to the warning in red text.
5.
Click Rebuild.
Installing Additional Licenses
Your VLS system may require any of the following licenses:
• Capacity — when you have added capacity to the system's base capacity.
A VLS capacity license must be installed on the VLS when storage exceeds the base license.
If you are in a license violation state, all VLS read/write operations are disabled until either sufficient
licenses are installed to support the storage, or the excess storage is removed. When you have
cleared a license violation by installing an upgrade capacity license, the VLS read/write operations
are automatically enabled without requiring a reboot.
The base license on the node enables the storage that is part of the base SKU. The capacity bundle
includes the capacity license and the registration materials necessary for installing capacity licenses.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
69
NOTE:
Do not discard the registration materials included in the capacity bundle.
• Deduplication — when you have upgraded to firmware version 3.1.x or higher to use the deduplication feature.
A VLS deduplication license must be installed on the VLS before you can use the deduplication
feature. The number of deduplication licenses must match or exceed the number of capacity licenses
installed. After you install the deduplication licenses, the VLS system automatically enables the
deduplication feature for all supported backup types.
• Replication — when you have upgraded to firmware version 3.2.x or higher to use the deduplication-enabled replication feature.
A VLS replication license must be installed on the VLS before you can use deduplication-enabled
replication. Without the license, you may replicate backups across the SAN or LAN/WAN.
However, you need the replication license to replicate backups that have been deduplicated.
Deduplication-enabled replication requires one license per node on the target site.
Follow these steps to install capacity, deduplication, and replication licenses:
1.
Use Command View VLS to obtain the VLS system serial number from the Identity tab.
2.
Locate the paper or email entitlement certificate for the licenses you purchased. (You selected the
delivery method during the ordering process.)
HP recommends purchasing electronic certificates over physical certificates for faster delivery
and the convenience of not having to manage (either file away or throw away) confidential paper
certificates.
3.
Log on to http://www.webware.hp.com.
4.
Select Generate Licenses.
5.
Sign in. If you are a new user, follow the on-screen instructions.
6.
Enter the order number from the entitlement certificate.
7.
Enter the VLS serial number. You will receive a license key immediately onscreen and via email.
8.
Copy the license key.
9.
In Command View VLS, select the System tab.
10. Select Chassis on the navigation tree.
11. Select Licensing from the task bar.
The Manage Upgrade Licenses screen displays all of the existing licenses.
12. Select Add License.
13. In the empty field that displays, paste the license key.
14. Select OK.
The screen returns to the Manage Upgrade Licenses list and includes the newly installed licenses.
70
Storage Configuration
NOTE:
When installing deduplication licenses, the VLS system will automatically reboot. This may take a few
minutes to begin; when it does, you will see a message on the Notifications tab.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
71
72
Storage Configuration
4 Automigration/Replication
Instead of the preferred method of copying virtual media to physical media via the backup application,
another option is to perform transparent tape migration via the VLS device using automigration.
Automigration describes the feature in which the Virtual Library System acts as a tape copy engine
that transfers data from virtual cartridges on disk to a physical tape library connected to the VLS
device. The VLS automigration feature supports two different schemes:
• Echo copy automatically synchronizes the physical cartridges to matching virtual cartridges (with
the same barcodes) based on user-defined policies, and is totally transparent to the backup application.
• Using smart copy, the automigration process is under the control of the backup application,
managed via the VLS SMI-S interface. This requires the backup application to support the HP smart
copy interface.
You can also copy virtual media using replication. Replication provides automigration from the source
VLS across the LAN/WAN to a remote virtual destination library. See “Replication
Concepts” on page 75.
This section describes automigration topics from overall automigration concepts to specific operations
you can perform on your system.
NOTE:
Throughout the automigration windows, a SAN library refers to a destination library that is connected
to the source library through the SAN and uses the automigration feature. A LAN/WAN library refers
to a remote destination library that is connected to the source through the LAN/WAN and uses the
replication feature.
NOTE:
When a list of slots is displayed, the message, “[#] items found, displaying 1 to 20.” appears. If there
are more than 20 items found, scroll through them using the arrows pointing right and left at the far
right-hand side at the top of the list. Also, in some cases, only available slots or only slots containing
tapes appear in the list.
NOTE:
For each procedure described in this chapter, at least one means of access to the relevant screen or
menu is specified. However, links are often provided in the main window that can be used as a
shortcut to other windows or menus.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
73
Understanding Automigration Concepts
Before using automigration, review the information in this section. This will allow you to create copy
pools and automigration policies appropriate to meet your storage needs.
Echo Copy Concepts
Echo copy acts as a transparent disk cache to the physical library, so that the backup application
writes to virtual cartridges in the virtual library. Automigration then automatically schedules the copies
from virtual cartridges to physical cartridges with matching barcodes, based on the automigration
policies the user establishes.
Echo copy is managed through the automigration software, not the backup application. For that
reason:
• The destination library is not visible to the backup application, so it does not need licensing.
• Copy traffic is no longer routed through the SAN.
• All destination tapes created by echo copy are in the native tape format, so they can be restored
directly from any tape drive or library that is visible to the backup application.
When determining whether to use echo copy pools, remember:
• The backup application will not be aware of any copy failures.
• Any mistakes in destination library media management will also affect the virtual cartridges. For
example, if new tapes are not loaded into the destination library, the physical copy will not exist.
• The destination library can only be used for copy operations.
• Echo copy is a full tape copy, rather than an incremental change copy, so it can be an inefficient
use of media if you are using non-appending copy pools in your backup jobs.
An echo copy pool is used to define which destination library slots are to be echoed into a specified
virtual library. Automigration then monitors the echo copy pool slots to detect cartridge loads/ejects
in the destination library, and automatically synchronizes the virtual cartridges to the destination
cartridges, creating the matching virtual cartridges as needed.
This means that when new destination tapes are loaded, automigration will automatically scan them
(read the backup application headers) and then automatically create matching virtual cartridges in
the virtual library specified for that echo copy pool.
NOTE:
The automatic scanning of new cartridges can take a long time if all the tape drives in the destination
library are busy with higher priority operations such as copies. Therefore, it is best to load new tapes
when copies are not running.
Data written to echoed virtual cartridges will be automatically copied onto matching destination tapes
based on the echo copy policy. An echo copy policy defines for each source virtual library the copy
window (start and end times), the copy on eject option, and the time in days for expiration after eject.
If destination tapes are ejected, the matching virtual tapes are automatically moved to the firesafe
and are deleted at the policy-defined expiration time. This ensures the device does not fill up its disk
space with older cartridges. See “Creating an Echo Copy Pool” on page 82 to create a policy. If
virtual tapes are ejected by a backup application, the matching destination tapes are also automatically
ejected into the destination library mailslot when the copy operation is complete. When an echo copy
is ejected (mailslot eject box is checked), the echo copy is performed, then the eject is carried out.
This results in the echo copy being placed in the device's firesafe and maintained according to the
74
Automigration/Replication
established policy. If a destination tape was ejected while a copy was pending, then notifications in
the VLS GUI will inform the user that they have interrupted the copy process.
Smart Copy Concepts
Smart copy allows the backup application to trigger copies from virtual cartridges to destination
cartridges, and the VLS then performs that copy inside the device. The backup application can only
use this feature if it supports the HP smart copy mechanism (via SMI-S v1.3 or later copy services).
Keep in mind the following when determining whether to use smart copy pools:
• The destination library is not visible to the backup application.
• Copy traffic is no longer routed through the SAN.
• All destination tapes created by smart copy are in the native tape format, so they can be restored
directly from any tape drive or library that is visible to the backup application.
• Because the copy jobs are initiated from the backup application, the backup application will be
aware of any copy failures.
• The destination library can only be used for copy operations.
A smart copy pool is used to define which destination library slots are available as SMI-S copy targets
for a specified source virtual library. Smart copy pools automatically detect all tapes in the destination
library slots that are assigned to that pool. Destination tapes are unrelated to virtual cartridges – that
is, they have different barcodes and headers. Smart copy jobs are initiated by the backup application
using SMI-S V1.3 software, and the VLS then performs the specified copy (for example from a virtual
cartridge to a destination cartridge, or from a destination cartridge back to a virtual cartridge, etc.).
The backup application tracks the virtual cartridges and the destination cartridges separately since
they have different barcodes and potentially different contents.
NOTE:
When smart copy jobs are triggered, they can override (reschedule) lower priority jobs, such as echo
copy jobs, up to the maximum number of tape drives allocated to their smart copy pool. If you configure
both smart copy pools and echo copy pools on the same VLS, it is advised that some destination
library tape drives remain unallocated to smart copy pools so that echo copy operations can still
continue while smart copy is active.
Replication Concepts
Replication provides automigration via LAN/WAN between two VLS devices. Because replication is
a feature of automigration and uses the same Echo Copy policies that allow flexible cartridge/slot
based configuration, any number of different replication configurations can be supported. You establish
a replication policy and echo copy pools using Command View VLS in the same way you set up
automigration with a destination library on the SAN.
NOTE:
The replication feature cannot use smart copy, only echo copy.
During replication, the source VLS copies data to the echo copy pools on a replication library that is
on the source. During the user-defined availability window, this replication library migrates data to
the destination library, known as the LAN/WAN replication target.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
75
The following are two of many possible replication configurations:
• Data center to data center
Designate one VLS as the source and a second VLS as the destination. Configure the destination
VLS to present a LAN/WAN replication target that is visible to the source VLS. The source VLS
performs normal backups during the regular backup window, and during the availability window
the source virtual cartridges automatically migrate to matching virtual cartridges on the destination
VLS. The same configuration is also used in the other direction so there is a backup library and a
LAN/WAN replication target library on both devices.
• Branch office to a main data center
Divide a single destination target into multiple slot ranges to allow a many-to-one configuration
without needing a separate replication library for each branch office. In this way, the VLS replication can scale to hundreds of branch offices all replicating to a single large device.
Replication can be configured to operate in one of two modes:
• Deduplication-enabled replication — the virtual cartridge on the source VLS is deduplicated against
the virtual cartridge on the target VLS. In this manner, only data that has changed is transmitted
over the network to the target VLS. This mode requires that deduplication is licensed and enabled
on both the source and the target VLS.
• Whole cartridge replication — the entire virtual cartridge is copied from the source VLS to the
target VLS.
NOTE:
All of the information on automigration also applies to replication except where specifically dealing
with physical tapes (e.g., ejecting media) and where noted. Otherwise, where the information refers
to physical cartridges, for replication assume virtual cartridges instead.
NOTE:
Replication is deduplication-enabled if you have purchased the appropriate replication and
deduplication licenses, and your backup ISVs and data types are supported for deduplication. Check
the Accelerated deduplication ISV support matrix at http://www.hp.com/go/ebs/ to see if your
system supports deduplication.
Tape Initialization
When you first configure deduplication-enabled replication on your VLS and set up an echo copy
pool to a LAN/WAN destination, the first round of data migration is not deduplicated because there
is not yet a set of backups on the target VLS to deduplicate against. Because the first full set of backups
can be very large, the VLS system includes a tape initialization process. You can transport the first
full set of backups to the target VLS using physical tapes rather than the network. This tape initialization
process is optional and must be enabled by the administrator when creating the echo copy pool.
The tape initialization process works, very generally, like this:
1.
Set up the LAN/WAN replication target on the remote site
2.
Set up an echo copy pool on the source site
3.
Run a standard deduplication backup on the source site
4.
Export the full backup to physical tapes
76
Automigration/Replication
5.
Transfer the physical tapes to the remote site
6.
Import data from the tapes onto the remote LAN/WAN replication target
Once the tape initialization process is complete, the automatic migration of deduplicated data from
the source site to the target site over the LAN/WAN begins. See “Exporting Data to Physical tapes
for Tape Initialization” on page 105 and “Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape
Initialization” on page 106 for the specific procedures.
Connecting a Destination Library
Automigration requires one or more dedicated destination libraries to be connected to the VLS device.
Supported Destination Library Configurations
Automigration is supported on:
• HP MSL series tape libraries
• HP EML series tape libraries or library partitions
• HP ESL E-series tape libraries or library partitions
• HP VLS virtual libraries
Using automigration, you can share a single destination library across multiple virtual libraries
(maximum of 20 drives on the physical libraries), or configure multiple destination libraries to be used
in a single virtual library.
CAUTION:
Automigration only supports destination libraries that have homogeneous drive types; for example,
all drives are LTO-2. A mixture of drive types in the destination library, such as LTO-3 and LTO-2, is
not supported.
NOTE:
Automigration allows you to use a VLS as a destination library. Because of this feature, it can also
be used as a device-to-device local replication scheme.
Connecting a Destination Library to the VLS6000–series
To connect the destination library to a VLS6000 device:
1.
Choose the number of fibre channel ports on the VLS6000 to be used to connect to the destination
library.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
77
2.
Use Command View VLS to convert some of your available host ports into storage ports that can
be then used to connect to the destination library.
a.
Select Fibre Channel from the navigation tree in the expanded list under Node 0.
b.
Use the Config port mode task to specify how many host ports will be retained. See Figure
42.
All remaining ports in descending order from the highest-numbered port will be converted to
storage ports and will be usable for connection to destination libraries. For example, if you
configure the number of host ports to two on a VLS6500 with four fibre channel ports, ports 0
and 1 will be retained as host ports. Ports 2 and 3 will be converted to storage ports.
NOTE:
After you configure host ports to storage ports, the device will reboot as a part of the
conversion process.
Figure 42 Config port mode
.
3.
Connect the destination library to the VLS6000 either by connecting directly to the storage ports
or by connecting the storage ports into a SAN zone that contains the destination library.
NOTE:
If you are connecting via a SAN zone, ensure that only the destination library is present in that
zone and no other devices are visible.
4.
The system will reboot and detect the newly connected destination library.
Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library
To manage a library is to enable automigration by connecting the source library to a destination
library that is already on the VLS. Until you manage the destination library, it cannot communicate
with the source. The process for managing destination libraries is different for SAN libraries than for
78
Automigration/Replication
LAN/WAN libraries. See “Managing a SAN Library” on page or “Managing a LAN/WAN Replication
Library” on page .
An unmanaged library is a library that is not recognized by and using automigration or replication.
The process for unmanaging destination libraries is the same for both SAN and LAN/WAN libraries.
See “Unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN Library” on page 80.
Managing a SAN Library
To manage a SAN library:
1.
Open the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
From the task bar, select Manage SAN Automigration Library.
The screen displays all eligible libraries. Libraries that appear on the list but are greyed out either
have no drives or have multiple drive types and therefore cannot be managed. Also, if there are
no unmanaged drives, the system will return the message, “There are no unmanaged libraries.”
3.
If the library you wish to manage is not already selected, select it now.
NOTE:
You can only select one library to manage at a time. To manage additional libraries, repeat
the procedure for each library to add.
4.
Select Submit.
The Destination Library Details screen displays, with the message, “The library, [library name],
was managed successfully.”
You can now create pools for the library and manage your data on the library using automigration.
You can also unmanage the library at any time. See “Unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN
Library” on page 80 for instructions.
Managing a LAN/WAN Replication Library
To manage a LAN/WAN replication target:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
The Summary for All Managed Destination Libraries screen displays.
2.
Select Manage LAN/WAN Replication Library from the task bar.
3.
Enter the name or IP address of the host containing the LAN/WAN replication target you just
created.
4.
Select Submit.
5.
On the next screen, select the LAN/WAN replication target to manage.
6.
Enter the password you created for that target.
7.
Select Submit.
The LAN/WAN replication target is now associated with the source.
You must re-manage a LAN/WAN replication target if you change the password for security reasons.
To re-manage a LAN/WAN replication target:
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
79
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand Destination Libraries in the navigation tree.
3.
Select the library of interest to open the Destination Library Details screen.
4.
From the task bar, select Re-manage LAN/WAN Replication Target.
5.
Enter the host name of the LAN/WAN replication target only if the LAN/WAN replication target's
host name has changed.
6.
Enter the LAN/WAN replication target password.
7.
Select Submit.
The LAN/WAN replication target is now re-managed with the source using the new password.
You can now create pools for the library and manage your data on the library using replication.
You can also unmanage the library at any time. See “Unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN
Library” on page 80 for instructions.
Unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN Library
Use one of the following two ways to unmanage a library:
Unmanage a library from the Destination Library Details window.
1.
From the navigation tree, select the specific library to unmanage.
NOTE:
You can only select one library to unmanage at a time. To unmanage additional libraries,
repeat the procedure for each library to unmanage.
2.
Select Unmanage from the task bar.
3.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The Destination Libraries window displays and provides the message, “The library, [library name],
was unmanaged successfully.”
Unmanage the library from the Destination Libraries window.
1.
Select Destination Libraries from the navigation tree.
2.
From the task bar, select Unmanage Library.
The Unmanage Destination Library screen displays, showing all managed libraries. If there are
no managed libraries, the system will return the message: “There are no managed libraries”.
3.
If the library you wish to unmanage is not already selected, select it now.
NOTE:
You can only select one library to unmanage at a time. To unmanage additional libraries,
repeat the procedure for each library to unmanage.
80
Automigration/Replication
4.
Select Submit.
The Destination Library Details screen displays, with the message, “The library, [library name],
was unmanaged successfully.”
Echo Copy Pool Operations
Echo copy acts as a transparent disk cache to the physical library, so that the backup application
writes to virtual cartridges in the virtual library. Automigration then automatically schedules the copies
from virtual cartridges to their matching physical cartridges (with the same barcodes) based on the
automigration policies.
For creating echo copies, automigration supports the following backup software on the physical
libraries:
•
•
•
•
•
CA ARCserve Backup
Commvault Galaxy
HP DataProtector
HP DataProtector Express
Legato Networker
• Tivoli Storage Manager
• Veritas Net Backup
• Veritas Backup Exec
CAUTION:
Automigration does not support tar formatting. A tar file will not load if the first file on the tape is
larger than 1 MB unless you perform a Load for Restore. HP strongly recommends against using
automigration with tar-based backup software.
After connecting your destination library to the VLS and adding it as a Managed Library, follow these
steps to operate echo copy:
1.
Identify the Virtual Library you will associate with this managed library.
2.
Create an echo copy pool between the virtual library and this managed library.
Any cartridges loaded (or already present) in the managed library will be automatically detected,
and matching virtual cartridges will be automatically created in the associated virtual library.
NOTE:
The automatic scanning of new cartridges can take a long time if all the tape drives in the
destination library are busy with higher priority operations such as copies. For this reason,
it is best to load new tapes when copies are not running.
3.
Check for the auto-created virtual cartridges in the virtual library. On the Automigration/Replication
tab, expand Source Cartridges in the navigation tree and then select the library of interest. The
screen displays the cartridges created by automigration.
4.
Any data written to the automigration virtual cartridges will be automatically mirrored onto the
matching destination tapes based on the automigration policy settings. Monitor the status of the
mirror by using a Command View VLS Console and viewing the destination tapes in Slots in the
expanded list under Destination Library.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
81
5.
In order to restore from a destination cartridge, either load it into a physical drive that is visible
to the backup application, or perform a Load for Restore. Load for Restore copies the destination
tape back into the virtual cartridge so that the backup application can then restore from the virtual
cartridge.
Creating an Echo Copy Pool
Echo copy pools are created from physical library slots after a destination tape library is added to
the VLS automigration configuration. Each echo copy pool defines:
•
•
•
•
The
The
The
The
single destination library
single source virtual library
slot range
echo copy pool policy
Each virtual library has a SAN policy, and those used as a replication library will also have a
LAN/WAN policy. These policies are set up during the creation procedure.
To create an echo copy pool:
1.
On the Automigration/Replication tab, expand Destination Libraries on the navigation tree so
that you can see all the related items.
2.
Expand the destination library for which you want to create a pool.
3.
Select Copy Pools on the navigation tree.
4.
From the task bar, select Create Echo Copy Pool.
The CREATE ECHO COPY POOL screen displays.
5.
Enter a start slot number and an end slot number for the copy pool from within the available slot
range shown.
6.
Select the local library where your echoed virtual cartridges will be placed from the Local Library
list.
7.
Select the storage pool where your echoed virtual cartridges will be stored from the Storage Pool
list.
8.
For LAN/WAN echo copy pools, select whether your replication is for deduplicated or
non-deduplicated backups.
9.
For LAN/WAN echo copy pools, select “Initialize via Tape Transport” only if you intend to use
this echo copy pool for the one-time process of tape initialization. (See “Tape
Initialization” on page 76.)
10. Select Next Step to set the policies.
82
Automigration/Replication
11. Type the desired policy settings in the corresponding fields. The policy settings differ for SAN
libraries and LAN/WAN libraries, and are as follows:
SAN libraries:
• Retention days – the number of days information is kept in the firesafe before it is deleted.
The default is two days.
• Sizing factor – the percentage of space, compared to the actual size of a disk, allocated on
the virtual tape for the copy job. For example, if the sizing factor is set to 90% and the
physical tape is 100 GB, the allocated space for the virtual tape will be 90 GB.
NOTE:
The sizing factor is crucial to creating the right size virtual tapes. When determining the sizing
factor of the virtual tapes, keep in mind the following:
• The sizing factor should be based on the size of the physical tape or the tape type if
possible. Common tape types and their sizes are: LTO-1 – 100 GB, LTO-2 — 200 GB,
LTO-3 — 400 GB, LTO-4 — 800 GB, DLT-IV — 80 GB, DLT-VS1 — 160 GB, SDLT-I —
320 GB, SDLT-II — 600 GB.
• HP recommends against setting the sizing factor too high (for example 110%). Although
the virtual copy can be made, if the drive compression is too low the data might not fit
back onto the physical tape.
• The sizing factor applies to all operations except Load for Restore, in which case the sizing
factor is ignored and the virtual copy is exactly the size of the physical cartridge.
• In general, the virtual cartridge is approximately 90% of the actual cartridge size. Base
the size of the copy on the eventual maximum size of the actual cartridge that is to be
copied.
• Source cartridge size limit — the size of all newly created source cartridges, regardless of
the physical cartridge size, on VLS systems with deduplication enabled. The default size is
200 GB; the maximum size is 300 GB.
Certain operations, such as loading physical cartridges into a copy pool with pre-existing
source cartridges, will require you to accept resizing the existing cartridges if they exceed
the size limit set here. In this case, a warning message indicates the number of cartridges to
be resized if you proceed. If you opt to continue and resize the source cartridges, no data
will be lost; you can still access data beyond the end of the newly set capacity limit.
The Sizing Factor also controls the size of the source cartridge. The system will size the source
cartridge using the Source cartridge size limit or the sizing factor, whichever value is the
smallest.
• Echo Copy on Source Cartridge Eject – When the backup application ejects an out of sync
virtual cartridge, the matching destination cartridge will not be ejected until the copy is complete. When the copy on eject option is not checked, then the time to complete the copy and
eject the destination cartridge will depend on your start time and window size. When this
option is checked, then the copy will be started as soon as possible (depending on available
drives) regardless of start time and window size. Then the destination cartridge will be ejected.
• Send notification if cartridge not migrated in — the copy pool threshold. The system will send
a notification if this many hours have passed and the cartridges have not migrated.
• Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges — When a cartridge goes into the ‘Out of Sync’ state,
you can schedule the mirror operation to begin only at the start of the policy window, or to
wait for the specified number of hours to pass after it enters the ‘Out of Sync’ state (provided
the time is within the policy window). The default is to schedule mirror jobs immediately upon
entering the ‘Out of Sync’ state provided the current time is within the policy window. Set this
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
83
value to a number greater than zero to prevent aborted or multiple mirror operations on a
cartridge where the backup application mounts the cartridge, writes to it, unmounts the cartridge, and then repeats this cycle multiple times during a backup window.
• At End of the Policy Window – what happens to active jobs when the policy window is over.
The options are Allow Active Jobs to Complete, Cancel Active Jobs, and Cancel Active Jobs
if Less Than 0% complete. If you select the last option, enter the percentage completion in the
field.
LAN/WAN libraries:
• Priority — the priority this echo copy pool takes over other copy pools during the backup
window.
• Deduplication Timeout (only if you selected deduplicated replication on the previous screen)
— if the cartridge fails to deduplicate within the timeout limit you set, the entire cartridge is
copied over in non-deduplicated mode.
• Send notification if cartridge not replicated in — the copy pool threshold. The system will send
a notification if this many hours have passed and the cartridges have not replicated.
• Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges — see above for LAN libraries.
• At End of the Policy Window – see above for LAN libraries.
12. Select Next.
13. Beneath the policy settings you just entered, enter the details of the window duration:
• Start Day – the day of the week on which the echo copy job begins. HP recommends that
copies are scheduled on a different day and/or time window from other backup activities.
• Start Time – the time at which the echo copy job begins. HP recommends that copies are
scheduled within a different time window from other backup activities.
• Window Duration – the number of hours available during which the echo copy job can take
place. If the migration does not take place during this window, the job is maintained in the
queue until the next start time.
For SAN destinations, HP recommends that you schedule mirror copies on a different day/time
window than backup activities. For LAN/WAN destinations, HP recommends that you allow
mirror copies to run 24 hours a day unless there is a need to restrict the use of LAN/WAN
bandwidth during certain periods of the day.
14. Select Add.
The window refreshes, and the availability window you just added is moved to the Current
Availability Windows section of the screen.
Repeat steps 12 through 14 for as many availability windows as you need.
15. If you need to delete an availability window you just created, select Delete corresponding to that
window.
16. Select Submit.
If the pool was successfully created, the Copy Pools screen displays, along with the message,
“The echo copy pool [echo copy pool name] was successfully created.”
If the pool was not created, the CREATE NEW ECHO COPY POOLS screen refreshes and provides
an error message at the bottom of the screen. Failure to create the pool most often occurs because
the slot numbers chosen are outside the available slot range. “The start slot is not in a free range
of slots” displays if only the start slot or both the start and end slots are out of range. “The end
slot is not in a free range of slots” displays if only the end slot is out of range.
17. If the new pool is not created due to a slot range error, repeat this procedure and select slots
within an available range.
84
Automigration/Replication
Creating Virtual Tapes
Virtual tapes are created automatically when:
• A pool is created that includes physical tapes.
• A Load Media for Restore, Load Blank Media, or Load Media for Overwrite is performed.
• A tape is moved into an echo copy pool by some means other than automigration.
NOTE:
The tape is only created if a header exists and is legible by the system.
Restoring from a SAN Physical Cartridge
If the destination tape is still loaded in the destination library, then its matching virtual cartridge will
still be present in the virtual library. In this case, you can simply restore from the virtual cartridge using
the backup application.
If the destination tape has been ejected from the destination library, you must use one of the following
options:
1.
2.
If the automigration virtual cartridge still exists in the firesafe (for example, if the policy-defined
retention period has not expired), use Command View VLS to manually move the cartridge back
into the virtual library. You can then restore from the virtual cartridge using the backup application,
and then move the cartridge back to the firesafe.
If the automigration virtual cartridge has been deleted from the firesafe, retrieve the physical
cartridge by one of the following methods:
• Load the physical cartridge into any compatible physical drive or library that is visible to the
backup application and restore from that tape using the backup application.
• Load the physical cartridge into the destination library and perform a Load Media for Restore,
which copies the entire destination tape back into a virtual cartridge. You can then restore
from the virtual cartridge using the backup application.
To perform Load Media for Restore:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest.
3.
Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on that library.
4.
From the task bar, select Load Media for Restore to open the Load Media for Restore screen.
5.
From the drop-down box, select the copy pool you want to load the media into. You can choose
among the echo copy pools.
6.
For all mailslots, the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots.
To keep the automatic assignment, skip to Step 10. To assign the destination slots manually,
continue to the next step.
If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays “None,” the copy pool you selected is
full. Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic
assignment.
7.
Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
85
8.
Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a list of the available destination slots. Select a slot
number from the list.
After you select a slot from the available destination slots, that slot no longer appears in the list.
9.
Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each mailslot.
10. Click Next Step. A confirmation screen displays.
11. Click Load.
The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move. The possible status
messages are Moving, Waiting, Successful, and Failed.
If the status of the move is still Waiting, you can click Cancel to stop the move.
NOTE:
Using Load Media for Restore will create a virtual tape if one does not already exist.
Restoring from a LAN/WAN Virtual Cartridge
From Command View VLS:
1.
Click the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Under Destination Libraries in the navigation tree, expand the library you want to restore.
3.
From the navigation tree, select Slots.
4.
On the task bar, select Restore Media.
5.
Select the slot numbers you wish to restore.
NOTE:
Firmware version 2.x only allows you to restore one slot at a time.
6.
Click Submit.
The Restore Media screen refreshes with a message that indicates the restores were successful.
Loading Blank Media into an Echo Copy Pool
To move a blank tape (or a tape that should be considered blank) from a mailslot on a destination
library into an echo copy pool, use Load Blank Media. From Command View VLS:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest.
3.
Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on that library.
4.
From the task bar, select Load Blank Media to open the Load Blank Media screen.
5.
From the drop-down box, select the copy pool you want to load the media into. You can also
choose unmanaged slots that are not in a copy pool.
86
Automigration/Replication
6.
For all mailslots, the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots.
To keep the automatic assignment, skip to Step 10. To assign the destination slots manually,
continue to the next step.
If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays “None,” the copy pool you selected is
full. Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic
assignment.
7.
Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments.
8.
Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a list of the available destination slots. Select a slot
number from the list.
After you select a slot from the available destination slots, that slot no longer appears in the list.
9.
Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each mailslot.
10. Click Next Step. A confirmation screen displays.
11. Click Load. The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move. The possible
status messages are Moving, Waiting, Successful, and Failed.
If the status of the move is still Moving or Waiting, you can click Cancel to stop the move.
Automigration will then automatically create a matching blank virtual cartridge in the source
virtual library defined for this echo copy pool if one does not already exist.
CAUTION:
Any tape moved into an echo copy pool in this way will be considered blank even if it contains data.
Loading Media into an Echo Copy Pool for Overwrite
To load an expired tape (a tape that was previously backed-up to and is being reused) from a mailslot
on a destination library into an echo copy pool, use Load Media for Overwrite. From Command View
VLS:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest.
3.
Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on that library.
4.
From the task bar, select Load Media for Overwrite to open the Load Media for Overwrite screen.
5.
From the drop-down box, select the copy pool you want to load the media into.
6.
For all mailslots, the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots.
To keep the automatic assignment, skip to Step 10. To assign the destination slots manually,
continue to the next step.
If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays “None,” the copy pool you selected is
full. Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic
assignment.
7.
Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments.
8.
Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a pop-up box of the available destination slots.
Select a slot number from the box.
After you select a slot from the available destination slots, that slot no longer appears in the
pop-up box.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
87
9.
Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each mailslot.
10. Click Next Step. A confirmation screen displays.
11. Click Load.
The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move. The possible status
messages are Moving, Waiting, Successful, and Failed.
If the status of the move is still Waiting, you can click Cancel to stop the move.
Automigration will then automatically scan the header from the loaded tape when a drive becomes
available. The amount of time this takes varies depending on how busy the destination library
is. After scanning the tape header, it will automatically create a matching virtual cartridge (if one
does not already exist) in the source virtual library defined for this echo copy pool that is blank
except for the header written at the beginning of the tape.
NOTE:
Because no data has been stored, you cannot restore from this virtual tape.
Restarting a Broken Mirror
The “mirror broken” state can occur when there is not enough room on the virtual tape to create the
copy, there are no available slots to create the copy, the library cannot read the header of the physical
tape, the library cannot determine that a tape without a header is blank, or the library cannot
successfully write the header to the virtual tape.
When a physical cartridge in a destination library is in this state, you must restart the broken mirror
for the automigration to continue. The Restart Broken Mirror task triggers a job to run which clears
out the problem.
1.
From the task bar, select Restart Broken Mirror. The Restart Broken Mirror screen opens and
displays all cartridges with the Mirror Broken status.
2.
Select the cartridges you want to restart.
3.
Select Submit. The Result screen indicates that the operation was successful. The cartridge is now
in the UpToDate status.
Viewing Cartridges in Automigration Source Libraries
When a tape is still present in the destination library, you can view the matching automigration virtual
cartridge in the associated source virtual library. To view cartridges in the source libraries:
1.
On the Automigration/Replication tab, select Source Cartridges from the navigation tree.
2.
The right hand pane then shows all the automigration virtual cartridges (alphabetically by bar
code) in the source libraries and information including the cartridge state, last written date,
destination library, and destination slot.
Viewing Automigration Cartridges in the Firesafe
When a cartridge is ejected from the destination library, its matching virtual cartridge is automatically
ejected out of the virtual library and moved into the device's firesafe. The firesafe acts as a virtual
offline location for the automigration virtual cartridges. Once they are in the firesafe, the automigration
88
Automigration/Replication
virtual cartridges are retained according to their automigration policies, which define how many days
the virtual cartridges remain in the firesafe before being automatically deleted.
NOTE:
From the Automigration/Replication tab of Command View VLS, the firesafe in the window shows
items placed in the firesafe by automigration only; items placed in the firesafe from different functions
of the VLS are not shown here.
To view cartridges in the firesafe, from the Automigration/Replication tab, select Firesafe from the
navigation tree. For mirror copies, the firesafe date is the date of the most recent copy.
When the physical tape is moved back into the physical library, the corresponding virtual tape is
immediately moved from the firesafe back to the appropriate location (based on the location of the
physical tape). The physical tape is not read upon load and is not synchronized to the virtual tape.
Therefore, if you have modified the physical tape while it was outside of the library, then it is now
out-of-sync with the virtual tape in the firesafe. If you want to keep these modifications to the physical
tape, you will need to ensure that the data is copied to the virtual tape. Either manually delete the
virtual tape from the firesafe or perform a Load Media for Restore. This forces the system to read the
physical tape upon load and causes automigration to create a new virtual copy. See “Restoring from
a SAN Physical Cartridge” on page 85.
Smart Copy Pool Operations
Smart copy allows the backup application to trigger copies from virtual cartridges to destination
cartridges, and the VLS then performs that copy inside the device. The backup application can only
use this feature if it supports the HP smart copy mechanism (via SMI-S v1.3 or later copy services).
Editing SMI-S Settings
SMI-S is the communications mechanism between the backup application and smart copy. If your
backup application supports smart copy, you will need to link your backup application to the device
SMI-S interface. This may require you to modify the device SMI-S security. See “SMI-S
Support” on page 181 for SMI-S information.
Creating a Smart Copy Pool
Smart copy pools are created from physical library slots after a destination tape library is added to
the VLS automigration configuration. Each smart copy pool defines:
•
•
•
•
•
The
The
The
The
The
single destination library
single source virtual library
slot range
pool mode – echo copy or smart copy
number of drives allocated to the pool (for smart copy only)
To create a smart copy pool:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab and expand the task bar of the navigation tree so that
you can see all the items listed under Destination Libraries.
2.
Select Copy Pools on a destination library for which you want to create a pool.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
89
3.
From the task bar, select Create Smart Copy Pool.
The CREATE NEW SMART COPY POOL screen displays.
4.
Select a start slot and an end slot for the copy pool from within the available slot range.
5.
Select the number of drives to create within the pool. The number of available drives is displayed
just above the empty field.
6.
Select the source library from the Local Library list.
7.
Select Submit.
If the pool was successfully created, the Copy Pools screen displays, along with the message,
“The smart copy pool [smart copy pool name] was successfully created.”
If the pool was not created, the CREATE NEW SMART COPY POOLS screen refreshes and provides
an error message at the bottom of the screen. Failure to create the pool most often occurs because
the slot numbers chosen are outside the available slot range. “The start slot is not in a free range
of slots” displays if only the start slot or both the start and end slots are out of range. “The end
slot is not in a free range of slots” displays if only the end slot is out of range.
8.
If the new pool is not created due to a slot range error, repeat this procedure and select slots
within an available range.
Changing the Number of Drives in a Smart Copy Pool
When there are not enough drives in a smart copy pool, add more. To change the number of drives
in a smart copy pool:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab and expand the task bar of the navigation tree.
2.
Under Destination Libraries, select Copy Pools.
3.
From the SMART COPY POOLS table, select the copy pool of interest.
4.
Select Change Drives from the task bar to open the CHANGE DRIVES FOR SMART COPY POOL
window.
5.
Type the number of drives to assign to the smart copy pool in the appropriate field.
6.
Select Submit.
The Copy Pools window displays, along with the message, “The number of drives for the smart
copy pool, [copy pool name], was successfully changed.”
Loading Blank Media into a Smart Copy Pool
To move a blank tape (or a tape that should be considered blank) from a MailSlot on a destination
library into a smart copy pool, use Load Blank Media.
1.
From the navigation tree under the appropriate destination library, select MailSlot to display the
list of mailslots on that destination library.
2.
From the task bar, select Load Blank Media.
3.
From the LOAD BLANK MEDIA screen, select the source slot.
4.
Select Next.
5.
Select the destination slot.
6.
Select Next to display the specifics of the media to be loaded as a blank tape.
90
Automigration/Replication
7.
Select Submit.
The mailslot screen refreshes, along with the message, “The media, [media name], was successfully
loaded.” Also, the media that has been loaded is no longer in the mailslot.
Loading Media into a Smart Copy Pool for Overwrite
To load a scratch or expired tape (a tape that was previously backed up to and is being reused) from
a mailslot on a destination library into a smart copy pool, use Load media for overwrite:
1.
From the navigation tree under the appropriate destination library, select MailSlot to display the
list of mailslots on that library.
2.
From the task bar, select Load Media for Overwrite.
3.
From the LOAD MEDIA FOR OVERWRITE screen, select the source slot.
4.
Select Next.
5.
Select the destination slot.
6.
Select Next to display the specifics of the media to be loaded for overwrite.
7.
Select Submit.
The mailslot screen refreshes, along with the message, “The media, [media name], was successfully
loaded.” Also, the media that has been loaded is no longer in the mailslot.
Editing Copy Pools
The following sections describe the copy pool edit operations available to the user.
Moving a Copy Pool
When there is not enough space left on a virtual library, a copy pool can be moved to a different
virtual library. To move a copy pool from one virtual library to another:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab and expand the task bar of the navigation tree.
2.
Under Destination Libraries, select Copy Pools.
3.
From the Name column in the copy pools lists, select the copy pool to be moved.
4.
From the Copy Pool Details window task bar, select Change Local Library.
5.
From the CHANGE LOCAL LIBRARY window, verify the current local library on which the pool
resides.
6.
Select the new local library, then select Submit.
The Echo Copy Pool Details window displays, along with the message, “The local library was
successfully changed.”
NOTE:
When an echo copy pool moves to a different local library, the associated automigration tapes
automatically move with it.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
91
Changing the Slot Mapping for a SAN Library
Slot mapping refers to the assignment of physical slots in a library to correspond to a specific virtual
copy pool. Mapping occurs as a copy pool is created; however, mapping can be changed at any
time. Reasons to change the slot mapping include the need for a group of slots to expand to match
the corresponding virtual copy pool, the need to shrink an existing pool to make more room for a
growing pool, and the need to rearrange the mapping so that the pools correspond to a consecutive
set of slots.
To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool:
1.
Select Slots in the appropriate library from the navigation tree.
2.
In the Copy Pool column, select any instance of the appropriate pool.
The SMART COPY POOL DETAILS or ECHO COPY POOL DETAILS screen displays.
3.
Select Delete in the taskbar.
4.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message, “The slot map was successfully deleted
from [copy pool name]” displays.
NOTE:
If a tape is in a newly unmapped section of a library, the tape will be moved to the firesafe.
If the tape has not expired and been deleted from the firesafe, upon remapping of the
section, the tape will move back and be removed from the firesafe.
To add slot mapping to any copy pool which does not have slots mapped:
1.
Under Destination Libraries, select Copy Pools from the navigator pane.
2.
Select the appropriate copy pool to display the copy pool details screen.
3.
From the task bar, select Edit Slot Maps.
4.
On the Edit Slot Map screen, in the Add Additional Slots section, enter a start slot and end slot
for the copy pool from the available slot ranges listed.
5.
Select Add.
The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message, “The slot map was successfully added
to [copy pool name]” displays.
To change slot mapping on a copy pool that already has slots mapped:
1.
On the System tab, check the capacity of the copy pool to ensure there is room for copies.
2.
From the copy pool details screen on the Automigration/Replication tab, select Edit Slot Maps
on the taskbar.
The Edit Slot Map window displays.
3.
In the Current Slots section, select Edit for the slots you want to edit. The EDIT SLOT MAP window
opens.
4.
Change the Start and End slots.
92
Automigration/Replication
5.
Select Submit.
If the change is successful, the copy pool details window displays, including the message, “The
slot map was successfully changed”.
If the start and/or end slot is outside the available range, the EDIT SLOT MAP window refreshes
and displays “The start and end slot define an invalid range.”
6.
If the slot map is not changed due to a slot range error, repeat this procedure and select slots
within an available range.
Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN/WAN Library
Slot mapping in the case of replication refers to the assignment of virtual slots in a library to correspond
to a specific LAN/WAN replication target. Mapping occurs as a LAN/WAN replication target is
created; however, mapping can be changed at any time. Reasons to change the slot mapping include
the need for a group of slots to expand the number of slots on the LAN/WAN replication target, the
need to shrink an existing LAN/WAN replication target, and the desire to rearrange the mapping
so that the LAN/WAN replication targets correspond to a consecutive set of slots.
To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand LAN/WAN Replication Libraries in the navigation tree, and then expand the appropriate
library.
3.
Select Copy Pools in the navigation tree.
4.
On the Summary for Copy Pools screen, select the echo copy pool if interest to open the Echo
Copy Pool Details screen for that copy pool.
5.
From the task bar, select Edit Slot Maps.
6.
On the Edit Slot Maps screen, select Delete corresponding to the slot map to remove.
7.
Select OK in the dialog box.
The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message, “The slot map was successfully deleted
from [copy pool name]” displays.
To add slot mapping to any copy pool which does not have slots mapped:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 5 above.
2.
In the Add Additional Slots section of the screen, enter the start slot and end slot for the new copy
pool from the available slot ranges listed.
3.
Select Add.
The slot range you just added moves to the Current Slots section of the screen.
Repeat this step for as many slot maps as you need.
4.
Select Submit.
The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message, “The slot map was successfully added
to [copy pool name]” displays.
To change the slot mapping on a copy pool that already has slots mapped:
1.
On the System tab, check the capacity of the copy pool to ensure there is room for copies.
2.
Follow steps 1 through 5 in the “To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool” section above.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
93
3.
On the Edit Slot Maps screen, select Edit corresponding to the slot map to change.
4.
Enter the new start and/or end slots into the appropriate fields.
5.
Select Submit.
If the change is successful, the copy pool details window displays, including the message, “The
slot map was successfully changed.”
Editing the SAN or LAN/WAN Policy
1.
Select Copy Pools in the appropriate library from the navigation tree.
2.
Select the appropriate copy pool to open the Echo Copy Details screen.
3.
In the task bar, select Edit Policy.
4.
Make the appropriate changes. For explanations of the options, see “Creating an Echo Copy
Pool” on page 82.
5.
Select Submit.
The Echo Copy Details screen displays the new policy information.
Editing the SAN or LAN/WAN Availability Windows
1.
Select Copy Pools in the appropriate library from the navigation tree.
2.
Select the appropriate copy pool to open the Echo Copy Details screen.
3.
In the task bar, select Edit Policy.
4.
In the task bar, select Edit Policy Windows.
5.
Make the appropriate changes. For explanations of the procedure, see “Creating an Echo Copy
Pool” on page 82.
6.
Select Submit.
The Echo Copy Details screen displays the new policy information.
To add or delete policy windows, see .
Deleting a Copy Pool
You should delete a copy pool when you no longer need it. To delete a copy pool:
1.
Select Copy Pools under the appropriate library from the navigation tree.
2.
Select the copy pool on the Summary for Copy Pools screen to open the Echo Copy Details screen.
3.
From the task bar, select Delete.
4.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The Copy Pools screen is refreshed and the deleted pool is no longer listed.
NOTE:
Deleting a copy pool moves the associated virtual tapes into the firesafe. At the end of the retention
period, the system deletes the source cartridges from the firesafe. If you need to retrieve the cartridges
for any reason, you must do so before the retention period ends.
94
Automigration/Replication
SAN Destination Library Operations
This section describe all of the SAN destination library operations available to the user.
Monitoring Destination Library Status
This section describes how to locate the Command View VLS automigration status messages of a
destination library. This applies to both SAN automigration libraries and LAN/WAN replication
libraries.
VLS hardware, environmental, and virtual device (library, tape drive, cartridge) status is constantly
monitored by the VLS software and displayed on the VLS web user interface, Command View VLS.
A notification alert is generated by the VLS software when a hardware or environmental failure is
detected or predicted. VLS notification alerts are displayed on the Notifications screen of Command
View VLS, and can also be sent as mail to the addresses you specify and/or as SNMP traps to the
management consoles you specify. Status is also provided, where appropriate, on some screens under
the Automigration/Replication tab.
To monitor the automigration status of a destination library:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, select the destination library to view. This opens the Destination Library
Details screen.
This screen displays the state of the destination library. For SAN automigration libraries the
options are Good, Degraded, Critical, Failed, or Missing; for LAN/WAN replication libraries
the options are Connected, Configuration Out of Sync, and Unreachable. The screen also provides
the name and model of the library, number of simultaneous transfers, number of slots, management
URL, and availability.
3.
Expand the destination library in the navigation tree to access more specific information.
Cartridge Status and Slot Details
To view the status of the destination library's slots, expand the library in the navigation tree and select
Slots.
The Summary for Slots screen displays the drive name, barcode, cartridge status, local library, copy
pool, and last mirrored date for each slot number in use. Select a barcode from the list to see more
details on the job history and status for that barcode.
Quickly locate slots of interest using the Advanced Search. See “Advanced Search for
Slots” on page 98.
You can also select Slots State Summary from the navigation tree to see which of all the possible
statuses have slots in that status; if a status is not listed, there are no slots currently in that status. The
number of slots in each status is displayed. Select a status to see a list of the specific slots in that status.
The Cartridge Status column of the Summary for Slots screen is particularly useful with echo copy
because the backup application is not aware of any copy failures. The status of the physical cartridges
in the destination library will be one of the following:
Status message
Pool type
Description
Unmanaged
None
This cartridge is not part of any pool.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
95
Status message
Pool type
Description
Adding Cartridge
Echo Copy
Copying the header from the target cartridge to this newly created
source cartridge. If the barcode of the target cartridge exists
anywhere on the VLS, it is moved into the source library for the
copy pool.
Up To Date
Echo Copy
The target and source cartridges have the same contents.
Waiting for Backup
Data*
Echo Copy
Waiting for the backup application to update the source cartridge
by appending or overwriting the cartridge over the SAN. A
cartridge will get into this state when the barcode for the source
cartridge already existed on the source VLS when the (LBR) Echo
Copy pool was created and the source cartridge contained data.
It is not possible to replicate that preexisting content in a deduplicated manner.
In Use
Echo Copy
The cartridge has been loaded into a drive by the backup application.
Backup Postprocessing*
Echo Copy
Creating deduplication instructions.
Out of Sync
Echo Copy
The source virtual cartridge has been updated by the backup
application since the target cartridge was updated. Instruction
creation is complete.
Mirror Scheduled
Echo Copy
Waiting to acquire resources to run the job to synchronize the
target cartridge with the source cartridge.
Mirroring
Echo Copy
Mirroring from the target cartridge to the source cartridge.
Mirror Broken
Echo Copy
A problem was encountered mirroring the cartridge.
Restoring
Echo Copy
Mirroring from the source cartridge to the target cartridge.
Eject Pending
Echo Copy
Ejecting the target cartridge and about to put the source cartridge
into the firesafe.
Mirror/Eject Pending
Echo Copy
About to eject the target cartridge and then put the source cartridge into the firesafe.
Mirroring before Eject
Echo Copy
Synchronizing the cartridge in the Destination Library with the
source virtual cartridge. When the mirror job is complete, the
target cartridge will be ejected and the source cartridge will be
moved to the firesafe.
Export Preprocessing*
Echo Copy
Gathering deduplication instructions needed for replication using
tape transport.
Exporting*
Echo Copy
Copying content from the source cartridge onto a physical tape.
Partially Exported*
Echo Copy
Copying content from the source cartridge will continue on another
physical tape.
Export In Use*
Echo Copy
Waiting for the remaining cartridges in the pool to finish exporting.
In Transit/Importing*
Echo Copy
Importing status on the destination library, In Sync status on the
source VLS.
96
Automigration/Replication
Status message
Pool type
Description
Importing/In Use*
Echo Copy
Importing status on the destination library, loaded into a drive by
the backup application the source VLS.
Importing/Backup Postprocessing*
Echo Copy
Importing status on the destination library, creating deduplication
instructions on the source VLS.
Importing/Out of Sync*
Echo Copy
Importing status on the destination library, Out Of Sync status on
the source VLS.
Mirror Preprocessing*
Echo Copy
Gathering the deduplication instructions needed for replication.
Mirror Preprocess
Pending*
Echo Copy
A mirror preprocess job is awaiting resources in order to run.
Mirror Postprocessing*
Echo Copy
Expanding deduplication instructions to update the target cartridge.
Cleanup*
Echo Copy
Cleaning up replication data on the source.
Eject Broken
Echo Copy
A problem occurred when attempting to eject a physical cartridge.
Header Broken
Echo Copy
A problem occurred during source cartridge creation process.
Restore Broken
Echo Copy
A problem occurred while restoring a cartridge.
Restore Pending
Echo Copy
A restore job is awaiting resources in order to run.
Paused
Echo Copy
A mirror job was paused.
Managed
Smart Copy
Inactive.
Acquired
Smart Copy
Reserved by the backup application for I/O commands.
Positioning
Smart Copy
The backup application is adjusting the read/write position.
Copying
Smart Copy
The backup application is copying data to/from the cartridge.
Readmeta
Smart Copy
The backup application is reading metadata from the cartridge.
Writemeta
Smart Copy
The backup application is writing metadata to the cartridge.
Rewind
Smart Copy
The backup application is rewinding the cartridge.
Empty Tape
Tape Export
The physical tape has not yet been used yet.
Copying
Tape Export
Copying a source virtual cartridge onto this physical tape.
Used Tape
Tape Export
Tape contains export data.
Full Tape
Tape Export
Tape contains export data and is ready to be ejected. Signal to
tape operator to unload this tape from the physical library.
Unloaded Full Tape
Tape Export
Tape contains export data and has been ejected. This tape should
be included in the collection to be sent to the target site.
Waiting for Load
Tape Export
Tape that contains data that will be imported when the tape operator moves it into an Import pool slot. Signal to tape operator
to load this tape into the physical library.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
97
Status message
Pool type
Description
Tape Currently Not
Needed
Tape Export
Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog, but not needed
yet. Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical
library.
Bad Tape
Tape Export
Unable to write tape. It does not contain any export data and is
ready to be ejected. This tape should NOT be sent to the target
site.
Unloaded Tape
Tape Import
Tape that contains data that will be imported later.
Waiting for Load
Tape Import
Tape that contains data that will be imported when the tape operator moves it into an Import pool slot. Signal to tape operator
to load this tape into the physical library.
Tape Currently Not
Needed
Tape Import
Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog, but not needed
yet. Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical
library.
Ready For Import
Tape Import
Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog.
Importing
Tape Import
Actively copying data from the physical tape to the target virtual
cartridge.
Import Complete
Tape Import
All data has been copied from the physical tape to the target
virtual cartridges. Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from
the physical library.
Unloaded Completed
Tape
Tape Import
All data has been copied and the tape has been ejected.
Bad Tape
Tape Import
Unable to read the physical tape. Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library.
Unloaded Bad Tape
Tape Import
Unable to read the physical tape and the tape has been ejected.
Skipped
Tape Import
The tape operator skipped this tape (possibly because it was
missing in the collection received from the source site).
Unloaded Skipped Tape
Tape Import
The tape operator skipped this tape and the tape has been ejected.
Unknown Tape
Tape Import
There is a physical tape in an Import pool slot that is not part of
the pool; it is not in the catalog. Signal to tape operator to remove
the tape from the physical library.
* Indicates status messages that are only valid for replication (deduplication-enabled).
Advanced Search for Slots
Quickly locate slots of interest using the Advanced Search link on the task bar. Enter a specific barcode
or filter by status, local library, and/or copy pools. Choose options from the lists and select Submit.
The slots meeting your criteria are displayed.
98
Automigration/Replication
Mailslot Details
Select Mailslot from the expanded destination library list to view the destination library mailslots. The
screen displays the barcode and local library for each slot. The task bar includes further actions you
can take.
This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries.
Copy Pool Details
Select Copy Pools from the expanded destination library list to view both Echo Copy and Smart Copy
pools. The screen displays the priority, local library, storage pools, slot maps, and policy windows
for each copy pool. Select a copy pool from the list to see more details and to access further actions.
Import/Export Pool Details
Select Import/Export Pools from the expanded destination library list to view the destination library
import and export pools. The screen displays the priority, local library, storage pools, slot maps, and
policy windows for each pool. Select an import or export pool from the list to see more details and
to access further actions.
This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries.
Tape Drive Details
Select Drives from the expanded destination library to view the destination library tape drives. The
screen displays the drive status, name, drive type, serial number, availability, state, and barcode.
Select a drive from this list or from the navigation tree to see more details and to access further tasks.
This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries.
Forcing a Replication Job
The Copy Now task allows you to schedule a replication (or automigration) job that forces the cartridge
to replicate immediately regardless of whether or not the cartridge is within the policy window. You
can only perform this task when the cartridge is holding in the Out of Synch state.
In Command View VLS:
1.
On the Automigration/Replication tab, expand the destination library in the navigation tree and
select Slots to open the Summary for Slots screen.
2.
Select Copy Now from the task bar.
3.
On the Copy Now screen, select the slots you want to replicate.
4.
Select Submit.
The system immediately registers the selected cartridges into the queue to replicate when resources
are available regardless of the policy windows.
Placing a Library Offline or Online
Place the library offline in order to deploy firmware, create a support ticket, or run a library assessment
test. You can place a LAN/WAN destination library offline as well. To do so:
1.
From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries, select the library to place offline.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
99
2.
From the task bar, select Offline.
A dialog box opens to confirm the selection and warn that placing the library offline will cancel
all active jobs.
3.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays the message, “The destination library
was successfully placed offline.” In addition, the Offline option in the task bar is replaced with
Online.
NOTE:
When placing the library offline from the Automigration/Replication tab, the library is not truly
offline. Instead, it is offline for automigration or replication jobs only.
Place the library online to resume scheduled automigration or replication:
1.
From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries, select the library to place online.
2.
From the task bar, select Online.
A dialog box opens to confirm the selection and warn that placing the library online will allow
jobs to resume.
3.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays the message, “The destination library
was successfully placed online.” In addition, the Online option in the task bar is replaced with
Offline.
Moving Media from One Slot to Another
From Command View VLS:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest.
3.
Select Slots to display the list of slots on that library.
4.
From the task bar, select Move Media. The screen displays a list of slots and the copy pools to
which they currently belong.
5.
Hover over the Select Slot link for the first slot you want to edit. The screen displays a list of the
available destination slots. Select a slot number from the list.
After you select a slot from the available destination slots, that slot no longer appears in the list.
6.
Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each slot you want
to edit.
7.
Click Next Step. The screen displays a confirmation.
8.
Click Move.
The Move Media History screen displays the current status of the move. The possible status
messages are Moving, Waiting, Successful, and Failed.
If the status of the move is still Waiting, you can click Cancel to stop the move.
100
Automigration/Replication
Ejecting Media from a Slot into an Empty Mailslot
You can eject media from a slot into an empty mailslot within the same library using Eject Media.
From Command View VLS:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest.
3.
Select Slots to display the list of slots on that library.
4.
From the task bar, select Eject Media. The screen displays a list of slots that are full.
5.
From the list of full slots, select the source slots of the media you want to eject.
The Available Mailslots displays the number of mailslots currently available. As you select and
deselect slot numbers from the list, the number changes.
6.
Click Next Step. The screen displays a confirmation.
7.
Select the Copy before Eject if Out of Sync box if you want to force a mirror of any cartridge
before it is ejected.
This determines what the system does when the library policy includes a copy on eject and the
media being ejected is either not synchronized or has a status of “Mirror Broken.” If deselected,
the slot will eject immediately without running a copy. If selected, a copy job is put in the queue
and the system will wait to eject the media until after the copy is complete. Scheduling the copy
requires that you wait for the copy to complete before moving another tape into the slot. Although
a status message may display indicating that the copy has begun, it may still be in the queue.
8.
Click Eject.
The Move Media History screen displays the current status of the eject. The possible status messages
are Moving, Waiting, Successful, and Failed.
If the status of the move is still Waiting, you can click Cancel to stop the eject.
Ejecting Media from a Drive into an Empty Mailslot
To eject media from a drive into an empty mailslot within the same library:
1.
Expand the navigation tree. On the appropriate library, expand Drives and then select the drive
from which to eject the media.
The TAPE DRIVE DETAILS screen is displayed in the main window.
2.
From the task bar, select Eject Media.
3.
From the list of empty mailslots that displays, select the destination slot for the ejected media.
4.
Select Submit.
5.
After the media is ejected, the TAPE DRIVE DETAILS screen displays along with the message, “The
media was successfully ejected from the drive into slot [destination mailslot number].”
Restarting Automigration/Replication Services
If you replace a tape drive on your physical tape library, you must restart automigration/replication
services afterwards. This resets the services to acknowledge the new tape drive.
1.
In Command View VLS, select the System tab.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
101
2.
In the navigation tree, select Chassis.
3.
Under Maintenance Tasks, select System Maintenance.
4.
In the task bar, select Restart Automigration/Replication Services. The screen displays a warning.
5.
Select Restart. (You can select Return to cancel the restart.) The screen displays a summary of
the restarted services.
6.
Select Return.
Scanning a SAN Destination Library
For an initial setup, or to force an immediate synchronization of data, scan the appropriate destination
library. This immediately forces the scan of a specific physical library:
NOTE:
The status message is returned as soon as the scan is successfully scheduled; however, the scan may
not yet be complete. There is no way to determine whether the scan has been performed.
1.
From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries, select the library to scan.
2.
From the task bar, select Scan.
The Destination Library Details screen refreshes, and the message, “Scan of destination library
successfully scheduled” displays.
Editing the Management URL
In order to view the management software for a SAN destination library from the Automigration
interface, provide the destination library URL:
1.
From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries, select the library with the URL to add.
2.
From the task bar, select Edit Management URL.
3.
Type the URL into the Management URL field, then select Submit.
If the management URL is accepted, the Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays
the message, “The management URL was successfully changed.” If not, the Edit Management
URL screen refreshes and displays the error message, “Please enter a valid management URL.”
4.
If the URL is not changed, repeat this procedure using a valid URL.
After the Management URL has been successfully added, it creates a link to the management software.
Click on the URL in the Destination Library Details list to launch the management software in a new
window.
Uploading SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware
To load firmware for a physical library or disk drive to a destination library:
1.
From the navigation tree, select the appropriate destination library or disk drive.
2.
From the task bar, select Upload Firmware.
102
Automigration/Replication
3.
Select the firmware by either of these methods:
4.
• Type the file name in the “Select file to upload:” field.
• Select Browse to locate the appropriate file.
Select Submit.
The SUMMARY FOR ALL DESTINATION LIBRARIES screen refreshes, along with the message, “File
[file name] successfully uploaded.”
Deploying SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware
After uploading the firmware for a physical library or disk drive on a destination library (see “Uploading
SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware” on page 102), install the firmware:
1.
Place the appropriate library offline (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
2.
From the navigation tree, select the appropriate destination library or disk drive.
3.
From the task bar, select Deploy Firmware.
4.
From the DEPLOY LIBRARY FIRMWARE screen firmware list, select the firmware to install.
A dialog box displays to confirm the selection.
5.
From the dialog box, select OK.
The Destination Library Details screen displays, along with the message, “File [filename]
successfully deployed.”
6.
Place the library online (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
Generating a SAN Destination Library Support Ticket
To generate a support ticket for a library:
1.
Place the appropriate library offline (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
2.
From the task bar in the Destination Library Details window, select Support Ticket.
A dialog box displays to confirm the selection.
3.
From the dialog box, select OK.
The screen refreshes and displays the message, “Please wait, action in progress. Do not refresh
this page.” When the support ticket has been generated, the Support Ticket Results screen displays.
Select Download Support Ticket Results File to view the command sent to the library.
4.
Place the library online (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
Generating a SAN Destination Library Drive Support Ticket
To generate a support ticket for a drive:
1.
Place the appropriate library offline (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
2.
Select the appropriate drive from the navigation tree under Destination Libraries and the library
containing the drive.
3.
From the task bar (in the TAPE DRIVE DETAILS window), select Support Ticket.
A dialog box displays to confirm the selection.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
103
4.
From the dialog box, select OK.
The screen refreshes and displays the message, “Please wait, action in progress. Do not refresh
this page.” When the support ticket has been generated, the Support Ticket Results screen displays.
From this screen, you can select Display results of executing the LTT command to view the command
sent to the library or Download support ticket to download the actual support ticket file.
5.
Select Finish.
6.
Place the library online (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
Running a SAN Destination Library Assessment Test
To run a library assessment test:
1.
Place the appropriate library offline (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
2.
From the task bar (in the Destination Library Details window), select Library Assessment Test.
A dialog box displays to confirm the selection.
3.
From the dialog box, select OK.
The Library Assessment Test Results window displays.
4.
To view the results of the assessment, select Download Library Assessment Test Results.
5.
Select Finish to return to the Destination Library Details window.
6.
Place the library online (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
Running a SAN Destination Library Drive Assessment Test
To run a drive assessment test:
1.
Place the appropriate library offline (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
2.
In the navigation tree, select the drive to be tested.
3.
From the task bar, select Drive Assessment Test.
A dialog box displays, warning that the test will erase all data on a cartridge, if there is a
cartridge on that drive.
4.
Select OK.
The DRIVE ASSESSMENT TEST screen displays and asks for a mailslot containing a
known-good-cartridge to use for the test.
5.
Enter the appropriate mailslot.
6.
Select Submit.
7.
The Drive Test Results screen displays, with a message indicating a successful test.
8.
Select Download drive assessment results to view the command sent to the drive.
9.
Select Finish.
10. Place the library online (see “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99).
104
Automigration/Replication
LAN/WAN Destination Library Operations
The following sections describe the destination library operations for LAN/WAN libraries available
to the user.
Several operations also apply to SAN destination libraries and are explained in SAN Destination
Library Operations:
• “Monitoring Destination Library Status” on page 95
• “Placing a Library Offline or Online” on page 99
• “Forcing a Replication Job” on page 99
Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization
NOTE:
Before beginning the export process, verify that the physical tape library exporting the data uses the
same number of barcode characters as the physical tape library that will import the data. If the
barcodes do not match exactly, the import process will not work. See your tape library user manuals
for information on checking and configuring the number of barcode characters used.
1.
Create a LAN/WAN replication target on the remote site. See “Creating a LAN/WAN Replication
Target” on page 107.
2.
Create a virtual library on the source site. See “Creating a Virtual Library” on page 160.
3.
On the source site, create an echo copy pool on the newly created LAN/WAN replication target.
See “Creating an Echo Copy Pool” on page 82. Be sure to check the “Initialize via Tape Transport”
box.
4.
From the Copy Pools screen, select the newly created copy pool to open the Echo Copy Pool
Details screen. Note that the state of the copy pool is “Awaiting Initialization.”
5.
Allow your regularly scheduled full backups to complete. Cartridges that need to be transported
via physical tape become “Out of sync.”
6.
From the task bar, select Initiate Tape Transport. The Create Tape Export Pool screen opens.
7.
From the SAN Automigration Library list, select the physical library from which you want to copy
the tapes.
8.
Enter a Start and End Slot from the available slot range.
9.
Select Submit. The status of the copy pool changes to “Exporting.”
10. From the navigation tree, select Import/Export Pools, and then select the newly created export
pool to see the Tape Export Pool Details screen.
The data from the selected library slots is copying to the physical tapes. When the data has
finished exporting to the tapes, the status of the copy pool changes to “Importing.” The screen
prompts you to load empty tapes and unload full tapes as needed.
11. Once the export is finished, select Import Handling Instructions from the task bar. This produces
information needed for the data import process. Print this information and ship it to the remote
location with the physical tapes.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
105
Stopping a Tape Export
1.
On the navigation tree, expand Destination Libraries and select Import/Export Pools to open the
list of all import and export pools.
2.
Select the export pool you wish to stop to open the Tape Export Pool Details screen.
3.
From the task bar, select Stop Tape Export.
The export process stops immediately and all echo copy pool cartridges move to the “Out of
sync” state.
4.
From the Echo Copy Pool Details screen, you can:
• Select Initiate Tape Transport in the task bar to restart the export.
• Select Cancel Tape Transport in the task bar to cancel the process and place the echo copy
pool into the “Ready” state.
Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape Initialization
1.
Complete the export process. See “Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape
Initialization” on page 105.
2.
On the target site, open the Automigration/Replication tab and select Import Tapes from the
navigation tree.
3.
Select the export pool you want to import.
4.
From the Local Library list, select the physical library from which to copy the tapes.
5.
Enter the start and end slots from the available slot range.
6.
Select Submit.
7.
Select Import/Export Pools from the navigation tree, then select the newly created import pool
to see the Tape Import Pool Details screen.
The screen prompts you to load full tapes and unload finished tapes as needed. If a physical
tape is damaged or otherwise unavailable, you can select Skip for that tape and transmit the
data over the LAN/WAN after the import process completes.
8.
After the import process completes:
• The tape import pool is automatically destroyed on the target site
• The tape export pool is automatically destroyed on the source site
• The echo copy pool on the source will change to the “Ready” state and deduplication-enabled
replication over the LAN/WAN will begin at the next screen
Forcing Non-Deduplicated Replication
For systems using replication with deduplication, the Non Deduplicated Copy task allows you to
schedule a replication job that forces the whole cartridge (non-deduplicated data) to replicate
immediately regardless of whether or not the cartridge is within the policy window. You can only
perform this task when the cartridge is holding in the Backup Postprocessing state.
In Command View VLS:
1.
On the Automigration/Replication tab, expand the destination library in the navigation tree and
select Slots to open the Summary for Slots screen.
2.
Select Non Deduplicated Copy from the task bar.
106
Automigration/Replication
3.
On the Non Deduplicated Copy screen, select the slots you want to replicate.
4.
Select Submit.
The system immediately registers the selected cartridges into the queue to replicate the whole
cartridge when resources are available regardless of the policy windows.
NOTE:
The whole cartridge copy of the data will not deduplicate. This data will consume additional space
on the target VLS until the cartridge is overwritten with new data by the backup application.
Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling Replication Jobs
Each replication job is actually split into smaller jobs: Mirror Preprocessing (preparing to move data),
Mirror (moving the data), and Mirror Postprocessing (clean-up process). This saves resources because
each job type uses only the resources it needs instead of reserving resources for the entire job. (Whole
cartridge replication is not divided into smaller jobs.) The source VLS displays the Mirror Preprocessing
and Mirror jobs, while the target VLS displays the Mirror and Mirror Postprocessing jobs.
From Command View VLS, select the Automigration/Replication tab, then select Job Reporting in the
navigation tree. This opens the Current Status screen where you can control the jobs.
On the source VLS, you can pause Mirror and Restore jobs and resume them at a later time, for
example when there are more resources available. At any point during the job, click the Pause Job
icon ( ) in the Action column. The job pauses, and the Pause Job icon is replaced by the Resume Job
icon ( ). When you are ready, click the Resume Job icon and the job will continue where it left off.
You can cancel all job types at any point by clicking the Cancel Job icon ( ) in the Action column.
NOTE:
When a replication library goes offline, all active mirror jobs pause. When the replication library
comes back online, all paused jobs resume.
LAN/WAN Replication Target Operations
The following sections describe the operations for LAN/WAN replication target.
Creating a LAN/WAN Replication Target
The first step in configuring replication is the creation of the LAN/WAN replication target. Do this
via Command View VLS on the destination VLS. Any virtual library (or slot range within a virtual
library) can be configured to act as a LAN/WAN replication target.
1.
In Command View VLS, select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand LAN/WAN Replication Targets in the navigation tree.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
107
3.
If the library on which you want to add a LAN/WAN replication target appears in the list, select
that library. The Summary for all LAN/WAN Replication Targets screen displays all LAN/WAN
replication targets created for that library.
If the library does not appear in the navigation tree, it means that the library does not yet have
any LAN/WAN replication targets on it. Select LAN/WAN Replication Targets in the navigation
tree instead. The Summary for All LAN/WAN Replication Targets screen displays all LAN/WAN
replication targets created for all libraries.
4.
Select Create LAN/WAN Replication Target from the task bar to open the Create LAN/WAN
Replication Target screen.
5.
Enter a name for the LAN/WAN replication target.
6.
If you did not select your library from the navigation tree, select the library on which you want
to add the target from the Local Library menu.
The Available Slot Ranges section indicates the slots that are available on the library you just
selected.
NOTE:
If you selected your library from the navigation tree, this pull-down field does not appear
because you have already selected the appropriate library.
7.
Enter a start slot and an end slot for the copy pool from within the available ranges.
8.
Enter the number of maximum simultaneous transfers permitted.
This allows you to limit the replication activity on that target. This field defaults to the maximum
number of transfers allowed by the VLS.
9.
Select a Compress option from the pull-down field.
The options are Global Setting, Yes (compression is on), and No (compression is off). See “Setting
the Global LAN/WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings” on page 109 to set the global
default.
10. Enter a registration password, and then retype it in the next field.
11. Select Add Availability Windows to open a new screen.
This takes you to a new screen.
12. In the Add Availability Window section of the screen, select the day and enter the time the
replication process should begin.
13. Enter the allowable duration of the replication jobs in hours and minutes.
Replication jobs can only begin during the availability window. When the availability window
ends, any replication jobs currently in progress will continue until they complete. No replication
jobs can begin until the next availability window opens.
14. Select Add.
The window refreshes, and the availability window you just added is moved to the Current
Availability Windows section of the screen.
Repeat steps 12 through 14 for as many availability windows as you need.
15. Select Submit.
The screen returns to the selected library's list of LAN/WAN replication targets.
108
Automigration/Replication
16. Assign the LAN/WAN replication target to the source library. See “Managing a LAN/WAN
Replication Library” on page 79.
NOTE:
When you configure a virtual library as a LAN/WAN replication target with Echo Copy, you may
also need to hide it (e.g., using LUN masking or port mapping/zoning) from the front-end SAN in
the case where the same backup application instance sees both the source and destination VLS devices.
(The backup application must not see the same tape barcode in two places at the same time.) See
“LUN Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 for details.
Viewing the Replication Target Slot Details
On the navigation tree, select Slots from the expanded replication target list to view the replication
target slots. The screen displays the barcode and last successful echo copy for each slot.
The last successful echo copy is intended to notify you of problems with the echo copy, but is not
necessarily related to the Cartridge Status or Last Mirrored fields on the Summary for Slots or Summary
for Cartridges screens. The state can be “unknown” when only the header transferred to the tape,
when nothing transferred to the tape, during the transfer of data, or when a data transfer has failed.
Setting the Global LAN/WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Select Global LAN/WAN Replication Target Settings from the navigation tree.
3.
In the Maximum MB/s per Active LAN/WAN Replication Transfer field, leave it set to Unlimited
or select the empty field and enter the total number of transfers that you will allow at one time.
4.
From the Default Compression Setting for LAN/WAN Replication Targets menu, select whether
the compression for LAN/WAN replication targets is on (Yes) or off (No) by default.
5.
Enter a new port number for unencrypted data transfer only if you need to change it from the
default.
Your firewall may require that the data transfer use a different port number.
6.
Select Submit.
Editing a LAN/WAN Replication Target
To edit the LAN/WAN replication target settings:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand LAN/WAN Replication Targets on the navigation tree, and then select the target of
interest. The LAN/WAN Replication Target Details screen displays.
3.
Select Edit from the task bar.
4.
On the Edit LAN/WAN Replication Target Settings screen, edit the target settings as needed.
5.
Select Submit.
To edit the slot mapping, see “Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN/WAN Library” on page 93.
To edit the availability window:
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
109
1.
Follow steps 1 through 3 above.
2.
Select Edit Availability Windows from the task bar to open that screen.
The Edit Availability Windows screen displays.
3.
To delete a availability window, select Delete in the row of that policy window in the Current
Availability Windows section of the screen.
4.
To add a availability window, enter the information in the Add Availability Window section of
the screen, and then select Add.
Repeat this step for as many availability windows as you need.
NOTE:
When adding multiple availability windows, you must select Add for each new availability
window or the system will not record it.
5.
Select Submit.
Deleting a LAN/WAN Replication Target
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand LAN/WAN Replication Targets on the navigation tree.
3.
Select the LAN/WAN replication target you wish to delete.
4.
On the LAN/WAN Replication Target Details screen, select Delete on the task bar.
5.
Select OK from the dialog box.
The LAN/WAN Replication Targets screen displays with the deleted target removed from the list.
Changing the LAN/WAN Replication Target Password
You may need to change the LAN/WAN replication target's password in the event of a security
breach. The following steps will stop all communication between the source and the target, and then
re-establish secure communication.
1.
Change the password on the LAN/WAN replication target.
See “Editing a LAN/WAN Replication Target” on page 109 to reach the Edit LAN/WAN Replication
Target Settings screen. Enter a new password for the target.
2.
Change the LAN/WAN replication target's password on the source to the new password.
See “Managing a LAN/WAN Replication Library” on page 79 to reach the Re-manage LAN/WAN
Library screen. Enter the same password you just created for the target.
Clearing the Source VLS from the LAN/WAN Replication Target
You may want to clear the connection between a source library and its LAN/WAN replication target
in order to use the target with a different source library. The target library maintains all of its default
settings in the change.
On the destination library:
1.
110
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
Automigration/Replication
2.
Expand LAN/WAN Replication Targets on the navigation tree.
3.
Select the LAN/WAN replication target you wish to clear from its source.
4.
On the LAN/WAN Replication Target Details screen, select Clear Managed Source VLS on the
task bar.
5.
The screen refreshes, and a message indicates that the connection has been cleared.
6.
Connect the target with a different source library. See “Managing a LAN/WAN Replication
Library” on page 79.
NOTE:
Clearing the connection leaves both the source and destination libraries intact. This is different from
unmanaging a library, where the source library is deleted.
Automigration/Replication Reporting
The VLS stores job status and history for all automigration and replication jobs, allowing reports to
be generated and displayed online or exported in a comma-separated values (CSV) file format. You
can customize and view job status and history reports for the VLS automigration feature in Command
View VLS.
Cartridge Status
The Summary of All Cartridges Managed by Automigration/Replication screen provides a quick view
of the status of all cartridges that are managed by automigration/replication. Each managed cartridge
is counted among only one of the listed categories with the exception of the first category which can
contain cartridges listed elsewhere.
Echo Copy Pool Summary:
• Not migrated in Copy Pools threshold limit — contains cartridges that have not successfully mirrored
within the time threshold set for the echo copy pool (assigned in the policy when the echo copy
pool is created). A successful mirror is a cartridge that transitions from the “Backup Postprocessing”
state to the “Up to Date” state with several intermediate states. A notification is sent once a day
that identifies the number of cartridges that have not successfully mirrored within the threshold
time.
Cartridges in this category can also be listed in the following categories: Mirror Failed, Pending,
Mirror Active, In Use/Deduplicating, and Waiting for Policy Window. This category displays a
green (no cartridges in this category) or red (one or more cartridges in this category) icon.
• Mirror failed — corrective action needed — contains cartridges for which the copy to the mirror
has failed. This category displays a green (no cartridges in this category) or red (one or more
cartridges in this category ) icon.
• In Use/Deduplicating — contains cartridges that are currently being used by the system.
• Pending — contains cartridges that are ready for copy but have not started, for example, because
the system does not have enough resources available or because they are waiting for the dependent
cartridges to replicate.
• Paused — contains cartridges that have been paused.
• Waiting for policy window — contains cartridges that are waiting for the policy window to open
for replication to begin.
• Mirror Active — contains cartridges that are currently copying to the destination library.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
111
• Mirror Complete — contains cartridges that have completed copying to the destination library.
• Waiting for first backup — contains cartridges that do not yet have a stored backup.
• Initializing — contains cartridges that are currently initializing.
Target Copy Pool Summary:
• Mirror Active — contains cartridges that are currently copying to the mirror.
• Mirror Complete — contains cartridges that have completed copying to the mirror.
Use the Group By menu to filter the cartridge list, or click a particular category to view the summary
list of cartridges that it contains.
Cartridge Summary
Selecting a particular category from the Cartridge Status screen opens the Summary of <category>
Cartridges screen. The summary screen displays the cartridge barcodes and other information such
as the local library and destination library for each cartridge.
There are a number of tasks available in the task bar of the cartridge summary screens, and the tasks
displayed depend on the Cartridge Status category in which the cartridges belong.
• Copy Now — see “Forcing a Replication Job” on page 99.
• Non Deduplicated Copy — see “Copying the Whole Cartridge Outside of the Policy Window” on page 106.
• Refresh — refreshes the current screen.
• Restart Broken Mirror — see “Restarting a Broken Mirror” on page 88.
• Restore Media — see “Restoring from a LAN/WAN Virtual Cartridge” on page 86.
• Pause Job — pause one or more Mirror jobs. See “Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling Replication
Jobs” on page 107.
• Cancel Job — cancel one or more Mirror jobs. See “Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling Replication
Jobs” on page 107.
• Resume Job — resume one or more paused Mirror jobs. See “Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling
Replication Jobs” on page 107.
From the summary screen you can also click a specific barcode or an echo copy pool to see the
details of that selection.
Cartridge Details
View the details of a particular cartridge by clicking the barcode from the cartridge summary screen.
The details include the last time the cartridge was in the In Sync state, the current physical and logical
size, and the job history.
Some Cartridge Status categories provide a section of Additional Details on the cartridge details
screens. The additional details depend on the category. For example, cartridges in the Pending
category display a list of dependent cartridges while cartridges in the Out of Sync category display
whether or not the cartridge is ready to replicate.
You can export the details displayed on the screen to a text file by selecting Export Cartridge Details
in the task bar.
You can view the activity log of the cartridge, which lists the important events, operations, and state
transitions, by selecting View Log in the task bar. The list displays the most recent activity first. To
download the entire log file, select Export Log File from the task bar.
112
Automigration/Replication
Configuring the Cartridge Status
To configure the cartridge status screen:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand Configuration in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Cartridge Summary from the expanded list.
4.
Enter the time you want the system to check for cartridges not migrated within the copy pools
threshold limit. Use the HH:MM format, then select AM or PM from the list. Each day, at the
specified time, if one or more cartridges have not migrated within the threshold limit, the system
sends a notification that indicates the number of cartridges that have not migrated in time.
5.
Check the Send Notification box if you want a notification when cartridges are not migrated in
the copy pools threshold limit. (Unselect it to cancel notifications.)
6.
Click Submit.
Viewing the Current Status of Jobs
To view the current status of jobs:
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, select Job reporting.
The screen opens to the Current Status report which displays information on all pending and active
automigration jobs. The report includes:
• Barcode
• Action – pause, resume, or cancel job (see “Pausing, Resuming, and Canceling Replication
Jobs” on page 107)
• Job type – Mirror Preprocessing or Mirror
• Start time
• % complete
• Time of the last update
• Source and target locations
• The node the job is running on
• Status – active or pending
• Expected completion time
• The drive the job is running on
Change the number of rows displaying on the screen using the Page Size menu. You can also use
the Filter by View menu to display a specific, predefined set of information; see “Configuring
Automigration Job Reports” on page 113 to create the views. After making a choice from one or both
of these menus, click Refresh.
Configuring Automigration Job Reports
The Configuration screen allows you to assign default settings for reports.
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand Configuration in the navigation tree.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
113
3.
Select Job Reporting from the expanded list.
You can customize the following defaults:
•
•
•
•
•
Refresh time for the display (1 to 15 minutes)
Duration of the job status graphs to display (1 to 90 days)
Reporting data retention period (1 to 90 days)
Duration of the CSV format export file (1 to 90 days)
Name for the CSV format export file
You can also create a pre-defined custom view based on the locations you choose:
1.
Select a location category.
2.
Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box. You can select multiple
devices by using Ctrl+click.
3.
Using the >> button, or by double-clicking, move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations
box. These are the locations that will display in the report. You can use << button to remove
locations from the Selected Locations box.
4.
Select another location category and repeat steps 2 and 3.
5.
Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field.
6.
Select Create View. This view is now available as a selection in the Views list on the Job History
screen.
To update an existing view, select it from the Update existing view list, adjust the selected locations,
rename the view (if desired) in the name field, and select Update View. Select Delete View if you want
to remove that view from your pre-defined options.
At any time, you can change any of these default settings.
Viewing the Job History
The Job History screen displays the history of the completed library jobs. It defaults to SAN jobs only,
and displays the number of days set as the default on the Configuration screen.
The job history table displays for each job:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Barcode
Start and end times
Size in MB
Data transfer time
Total processing time
Transfer rate
Source and target locations
The node the job is running on
Completion status
Compression (yes or no)
The performance graph maps the MB per second against the time it took the jobs to complete.
To change the jobs included in the job history report, select a View previously created on the
Configuration screen. If you haven't set up any views:
114
Automigration/Replication
1.
Select a location category. The options are SAN, LAN/WAN, All locations, and predefined
Views.
2.
Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box. You can select multiple
devices by using Ctrl+click.
3.
Using the >> button, or by double-clicking, move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations
box. These are the locations that will display in the report. You can use << button to remove
locations from the Selected Locations box.
4.
Enter the number of days the report should include.
NOTE:
Changing the number of days here does not affect the default number set on the
Configuration screen.
5.
Select a new location type; the default is Both. You can change the report to include only the
jobs where the selected devices acted as:
• Target — the selected device receives the data.
6.
• Source — the selected device sends the data.
Select Update. The job history table and performance graph update to include jobs based on
the new criteria.
Exporting the Job History to a CSV File
The CSV export file is a text file, delivered as a .zip. Each line is the record for one device, and the
data fields are separated by commas or columns depending on the program used to view the file.
You can export the data currently displayed in the history by selecting Export Displayed Data from
the task bar, or select Export All Data which allows you to choose the number of days included in the
exported file. In both cases, the File Download window opens for you to determine where to save the
file.
Viewing the Job Summary
On the Job Summary screen you can see the number of successful, failed, and rescheduled jobs both
coming in and going out from the current device. By default, it displays one day of data with the
device acting as the Source.
To change the display, change the number of days for which you want to see the summary, and/or
select to view the device data as it acts as the Target, and select Update. The table refreshes to reflect
the new information.
You can export the data currently displayed by selecting Export Displayed Data in the task bar.
Configuring the GUI Displays
The GUI Configuration screen allows you to assign default settings for certain GUI displays.
1.
Select the Automigration/Replication tab.
2.
Expand Configuration in the navigation tree.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
115
3.
Select Job Reporting from the expanded list.
In the Default Number of Rows in Slot/Cartridge Table box, enter the number of table rows you
want to display on the slot and cartridge summary screens. Changing the number of rows to
display from the actual display screens does not change the default value added here.
4.
In the Default Number of Rows in Job box, enter the number of table rows you want to display
on the job screens. Changing the number of rows to display from the actual display screens does
not change the default value added here.
5.
In the Default Refresh Time for GUI Pages box, enter the frequency in minutes that you want the
GUI screens to refresh.
6.
Click Submit.
116
Automigration/Replication
5 Deduplication
Deduplication is the functionality in which only a single copy of a data block is stored on a device.
Duplicate information is removed, allowing you to store more data in a given amount of space and
restore data using lower bandwidth links. The HP StorageWorks virtual library system uses Accelerated
deduplication.
NOTE:
The deduplication feature is only available on systems running VLS software version 3.0 or higher.
This section describes deduplication including getting deduplication running on your system, configuring
deduplication, and viewing reports.
NOTE:
See the HP StorageWorks VLS and D2D Solutions Guide for more detailed information.
How It Works
HP Accelerated deduplication compares the most recent version of a backup to the previous version
using object-level differencing code. It places pointers in the earlier version that identify duplicated
content in the new version. Deduplication then eliminates the redundant data in the earlier version
while retaining the complete, new version. You can improve deduplication performance simply by
adding additional nodes.
NOTE:
Deduplication takes place after the data has been processed to the backup tapes. Therefore, any data
backed up to compression-enabled virtual tape drives (both software and hardware compression) is
compressed before it is deduplicated.
The following is an overview of the deduplication process. See the HP StorageWorks VLS and D2D
Solutions Guide for more detailed information.
1.
2.
When a backup runs, a data grooming exercise is performed on the fly. Using meta-data attached
by the backup application, data grooming maps the content or “objects” of the backup, and
assembles a content database. This process has minimal performance impact.
After the scheduled backups have completed, the content database is used to “delta-difference”
(compare) objects in current and previous backups from the same hosts. There are different levels
of comparison. For example, files may be compared using a strong hashing function, while other
objects may be compared at a byte level.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
117
3.
4.
5.
When duplicate data is found in an older backup, it is replaced by a pointer to the most recent
copy of the same data. Because the most recent backup is a full version, you achieve the fastest
possible restores.
Users can enable an optional, secondary integrity check of data – a byte-for-byte comparison
between the deduplicated version with pointers and its original version. With this option, the
original backup is only replaced upon successful completion of the comparison.
Space reclamation occurs when duplicate data from previous backups is removed from the disk.
This can take some time, but results in previously consumed capacity being returned to a free
pool on the device.
Getting Deduplication Running on the VLS
This section explains how to get deduplication running on your VLS system including some
considerations for setting up the system, installing the firmware, and installing the deduplication
licenses.
Considerations
To make the most of the deduplication benefits, review these considerations before setting it up on
your VLS system:
• Virtual cartridge sizing — The system cannot deduplicate versions of a backup that are on the
same cartridge; the versions are not deduplicated until a new version is written to a different virtual
cartridge. Therefore, you want the cartridges to be sized big enough to contain an entire backup
job and to prevent too many backup jobs from piling up on the same cartridge, but small enough
that you are not wasting overall cartridge space.
• Additional nodes — For systems with long backup windows, you may want to include additional
nodes to speed up the post-processing deduplication.
• Additional capacity — Because you must store two full backups before the delta-differencing begins,
you may want to include additional disk capacity at least the size of the sum of the backups.
Installing the Firmware
The deduplication feature requires an upgrade to the VLS firmware version 3.0 or higher. Download
the VLS Firmware and Quick Restore CD Image appropriate for your VLS system from the HP website,
and burn it to a DVD (or CD). Then follow the instructions for using the Quick Restore DVD.
1.
Save your configuration settings. See “Saving Configuration Settings” on page 174.
2.
Download the VLS Firmware and Quick Restore CD Image appropriate for your VLS system from
the HP website.
3.
Burn the image to CD to create your own Quick Restore DVD.
4.
Follow the “Recovering from Operating System Failure” on page 299 procedure for re-installing
the operating system, including the instructions specific to restoring primary nodes.
NOTE:
You must install the Quick Restore DVD on each node of the VLS.
118
Deduplication
Installing the Deduplication Licenses
The deduplication feature is a licensed option. The number of deduplication licenses must match or
exceed the number of capacity licenses (based on LTU) on the VLS device. See “Installing Additional
Licenses” on page 69 for installation instructions.
After installing the required deduplication licenses, the VLS automatically reboots. When the system
is back up, it first checks the standard capacity licenses and then the deduplication licenses. Once
the deduplication licenses are verified, the deduplication feature is automatically enabled for all
supported backup types.
No further setup is required. When the next backup begins, the deduplication process begins mapping
the content of that backup. After the second backup, the system delta-differences (compares) the two
backups and the deduplication proceeds.
You may choose to disable some backup types; see “Configuring Deduplication Options” on page
119 for details.
Configuring Deduplication Options
You can include or exclude specific backups or types of backup (e.g., server type) from the
deduplication process and choose the deduplication algorithm used.
NOTE:
These options are not available until you have installed the appropriate number of deduplication
licenses.
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis on the navigation tree.
3.
Expand Deduplication on the navigation tree.
4.
Select Configuration from the navigation tree.
The Configuration screen displays. See Figure 43.
Figure 43 Configuring deduplication options
.
5.
Select the data types to change.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
119
6.
Select the new policy state or deduplication algorithm from the appropriate list.
By default, deduplication is enabled for all data types that support it.
By default, file servers will back up using a file-level differencing algorithm. Because in some
cases this algorithm may be less space efficient (e.g., if the file server is full of very small files),
there is a backup-level algorithm. Note that database data defaults to the backup-level differencing
algorithm.
7.
Select GO next to the pull-down field you changed.
The screen refreshes and updates the information.
8.
Select Enable/Disable Enhanced Data Integrity Check in the task bar to toggle this option.
The integrity check runs a second pass verification over the data after deduplication to ensure
that the deduplicated tape matches the original version it will replace. This is disabled by default
because of its significant impact on performance.
NOTE:
You can set the state and backup algorithm at the individual backup job level. On the Configuration
screen, select a specific data type to display all the backup jobs of that type, then follow steps 6 and
7 above.
Editing the Data Protector Configuration
Data Protector adds one suffix to the backup job names of full backups and a different suffix to the
backup job names of incremental backups. Because the job names are not identical, full backups will
not deduplicate against incremental backups. However, you can set up deduplication to strip off the
suffixes so the two types of jobs will deduplicate.
From Command View VLS:
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, select Chassis. The chassis details screen opens
3.
Under the Maintenance Tasks list, select System Maintenance.
4.
From the task bar, select Edit Data Protector Configuration.
5.
Enter the suffix of the full backup job names in the text box.
6.
Select Submit. The suffix appears in a list beneath the text box.
7.
Enter the suffix of the incremental backup job names in the text box.
8.
Select Submit. The suffix is added to the list on the screen.
9.
Repeat this procedure for all of the suffixes you want deduplication to ignore.
10. When you have added all of the necessary suffixes, select Return.
Viewing Deduplication Statistics and Reports
In Command View VLS, you can view statistics on the deduplication process by summary, backup
report, cartridge report, or system capacity.
120
Deduplication
Deduplication Summary
The Deduplication Summary displays a graph depicting the storage savings achieved with data that
has been fully deduplicated.
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis on the navigation tree to expand it.
3.
Select Deduplication.
The deduplication summary displays.
In the graph displayed, the original data is the uncompressed physical size of all user data that
has fully deduplicated; the deduplicated data is the actual physical storage space consumed by
the original data after it has been both compressed (if enabled) and fully deduplicated.
Deduplication Backup Report
The backup report provides information on the deduplication of your backup jobs.
1.
Select Backup Report from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary
screen.
The backup report options display.
2.
Unselect any agents, backup types, or states you want to exclude from the report. By default, all
supported and enabled backup jobs are selected and display in the report.
3.
Select View Backups.
The screen displays a list of backup jobs meeting the set criteria and includes the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
4.
State — the state of the backup job (see below)
Backup Name
Policy
Type
Logical Size — the size of the backup data sent to the VLS (before deduplication and compression)
• Physical Size Estimate — the disk space currently used to store the compressed backup, which
varies over time as deduplication processes the backup and reclaims redundant disk space
• Dedupe Ratio Estimate — the estimated deduplication ratio (based on the Logical Size divided
by Physical Size Estimate)
From the results list, select a backup name to see the backup statistics for that particular job.
The backup information includes a graph depicting the original data size (shown as zero prior
to the deduplication), the deduplicated size, and the unprocessed data. In the Cartridge Details,
select a barcode to see its cartridge report.
The deduplication reports show the following states:
Waiting for Next Backup — the backup has nothing to difference against and is therefore waiting
for a new backup. Incr/diff backups difference against the new full backup, not the old full backup.
Delta-diff in Process — the backup has identified another version of itself to difference against
and is now running differencing to identify the duplicate data between the two versions. With
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
121
multi-stream backups, this process may take multiple tries (going back to "Waiting for Next Backup"
state each time) until the differencing locates the correct stream.
Pending Reclamation — the differencing is complete (duplicate data has been identified) and
space reclamation is now waiting for full cartridges before it can begin.
Partially Reclaimed — in a backup job that spanned multiple cartridges, the full cartridges have
been space reclaimed but the last tape in the spanned set (which is partially full) is waiting until that
tape is full before it can reclaim space.
Dedupe Complete — deduplication, including all space reclamation, is complete for this backup
job.
No Match Found — indicates backups that cannot be deduplicated because they were unable
to match with their previous version due to large-scale modification.
In the detailed Backup and Cartridge reports, the Dedupe Ratio Estimate represents the overall
compression ratio (including both deduplication and compression) of that backup/cartridge based
on the amount of logical backup data stored versus the amount of physical disk space used. If the
backup job status is “Waiting for next backup,” “Delta-diff in Progress,” or “Pending Reclamation,”
the ratio will only include the compression because deduplication will not have actually space reclaimed
that tape and therefore will not have saved any disk space. If the status is “Partially Reclaimed” or
“Dedupe Complete,” the backup disk space has been partially or full reduced by deduplication and
the ratio represents compression plus deduplication. The Dedupe Estimate in GB follows the same
logic. The “Saved” value represents the amount of disk space reclaimed by deduplication (Logical
minus Physical values).
Deduplication Cartridge Report
The cartridge report provides information on the deduplication of your backup jobs at the cartridge
level.
1.
Select Cartridge Report from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary
screen.
The cartridge report options display.
2.
Select View corresponding to the report you want to view. You can view all cartridges, or view
a specific barcode prefix or virtual library.
The screen displays the list of cartridges meeting the set criteria.
3.
From the results list, select a cartridge to see all of the backup jobs on that cartridge.
The report includes the following information:
• Library
• Barcode
• Logical Size — the size of the backup data sent to the VLS (before deduplication and compression)
• Physical Size — the disk space currently used to store the compressed backup, which varies
over time as deduplication processes the backup and reclaims redundant disk space
• Dedupe Ratio Estimate — the estimated deduplication ratio (based on the Logical Size divided
by Physical Size)
122
Deduplication
NOTE:
If a cartridge is full and all jobs on it have been delta-differenced except for one job that is waiting
for another backup, you can have the cartridge reclaimed by temporarily disabling the one remaining
backup job. Disabling the backup type disables all instances of that backup type on all cartridges
that have not yet been delta-differenced. When you re-enable the backup type, it allows deduplication
for future instances of that backup type.
Deduplication System Capacity
You can view specific details about the system capacity using deduplication.
Select System Capacity from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary
screen.
The screen displays the following information:
• Total physical capacity — the capacity of the entire VLS system
• Reserved for system — the amount of capacity needed to perform system functions (for example,
storing the meta-data)
• Usable capacity — the total capacity that can be used for deduplication (Total Physical Capacity
minus Reserved for System)
• Used capacity — the capacity currently in use
• Available capacity — the capacity currently available (Usable Capacity minus Used Capacity)
• Logical Data — the amount of backup data sent to the VLS (before deduplication and compression)
• Used Capacity — the capacity currently in use
• System Ratio — the ratio of the Logical Data divided by the Used Capacity
• Space Savings — the percentage of capacity saved by deduplication
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
123
124
Deduplication
6 Operation
This section describes how to power on and power off the node and disk arrays.
Powering on VLS6000 Disk Arrays
CAUTION:
Only power on one disk array at a time to avoid overloading the AC power source.
To power on a disk array:
1.
Press the power button on the rear of the disk array.
2.
Confirm that the disk array components are all functioning normally by observing the condition
of their status LEDs, which should all be green. If the amber LED on any component is illuminated,
the component needs attention for one of these reasons:
• It has suffered a critical fault.
• It is not seated properly in the disk array.
• In the case of a hard drive, it is predicted to fail in the near future (assuming that it is seated
properly in the disk array).
• In the case of a power supply, it is not plugged in.
NOTE:
The hard drive LEDs may not immediately illuminate when the disk array is powered on. The LEDs
illuminate after the hard drives are configured by the VLS software.
Powering on the VLS6000–series System
To power on a VLS6000–series system:
1.
Power on all disk arrays in the VLS. See “Powering on VLS6000 Disk Arrays” on page 125.
2.
Plug the node AC power cords into a power source if not already connected.
3.
Press the node Power On/Standby button.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
125
4.
Confirm that the VLS components are all functioning normally and the VLS is cabled correctly by
observing the condition of their status LEDs. The LED status should match those shown in the
following table.
If an LED status does not match the status shown in the following tables, a component needs
attention.
Figure 44 VLS6100 and VLS6500 node LED status during normal operation
.
Item
Description
Status
1
Internal health LED
LED is green.
2
External health LED (power supply)
LED is green.
3
NIC 1 link LED
LED is green.
4
NIC 2 link LED
LED is off.
5–6
FC port LEDs (VLS6100 only)
Green LED is illuminated. Amber LED is not illuminated.
7
Power supply LEDs
LED is green.
Figure 45 VLS6200 node LED status during normal operation
126
Operation
.
Item
Description
Status
1
iLO 2 NIC activity LED
Green or flashing green = Activity exists.
2
iLO 2 NIC link LED
Green = Link exists.
Red, green, and amber on or flashing = Power
on.
3–5
FC port LEDs
LED that is on/flashing represents the link
speed (red = 1 Gbps, green = 2 Gbps, amber
= 4 Gbps) = Online, I/O activity.
6
10/100/1000 NIC 1 activity LED
Green or flashing green = Activity exists.
7
10/100/1000 NIC 1 link LED
Green = Link exists.
8
10/100/1000 NIC 2 activity LED
Green or flashing green = Activity exists.
9
10/100/1000 NIC 2 link LED
Green = Link exists.
10
UID button/LED
Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
11
Power supply 2 LED
Green = Normal
12
Power supply 1 LED
Green = Normal
Blue = Identification is activated.
Figure 46 VLS6600 node LED status during normal operation
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
127
Item
Description
Status
1
Power supply LED
Green = Normal
2
UID button/LED
Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
3
NIC/iLO 2 activity LED
Green or flashing green = Activity exists.
4
NIC/iLO 2 link LED
Green = Link exists.
Blue = Identification is activated.
Red, green, and amber on or flashing = Power
on.
5–7
FC port LEDs
LED that is on/flashing represents the link
speed (red = 1 Gbps, green = 2 Gbps, amber
= 4 Gbps) = Online, I/O activity.
Figure 47 VLS6800 node LED status during normal operation
.
128
Operation
5.
Item
Description
Status
1
Internal health LED
LED is green.
2
External health LED (power supply)
LED is green.
3
Power supply power LEDs (green)
LEDs are illuminated.
4
Power supply fault LEDs (amber)
LEDs are not illuminated.
5
Hard drive fault status LEDs
LEDs are not illuminated.
6
NIC 1 link LED
LED is illuminated.
7
NIC 2 link LED
LED is off.
Rebooting the system is complete when you receive the “Initializing node#”, then “Initializing for
node# completed.” messages in the systems notifications.
Rebooting the System
To reboot the system from VLS CLI:
1.
Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle.
2.
Open a secure shell session and log in as the administrator. See “Opening a Secure Shell
Session” on page 138.
3.
Initiate a reboot of the VLS by entering:
restartSystem
To reboot the system from Command View VLS:
1.
Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle.
2.
Click the System tab.
3.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
4.
Under Maintenance Tasks, select System Maintenance.
5.
Select Restart All Nodes from the task bar.
Restart Head Wizard displays.
6.
Select Yes to reboot all nodes.
CAUTION:
Rebooting the VLS device places the VLS cartridges back into the same library slots and tape drives
they were in at the time of reboot. To move the cartridges from tape drives back into the appropriate
slots, use Force Unload from the task bar visible when you select the tape drive from the navigation
tree.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
129
Powering Off the System
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury, electric shock, or damage to the equipment, remove
the power cord to remove power from the node before removing the access panel. The front panel
Power On/Standby button does not completely shut off system power. Portions of the power supply
and some internal circuitry remain active until AC power is removed.
To power off the system from the VLS CLI:
1.
Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle.
2.
Initiate a shutdown of the VLS by entering:
shutdownSystem
The primary node will report when it has powered down. Amber system power LEDs indicate
that nodes are in standby mode.
3.
Press the Power On/Standby button on any nodes not in standby mode. Amber system power
LEDs indicate that nodes are in standby mode.
4.
If removing the access panel from a node:
a.
Wait until the VLS has completed its shutdown operation, then press the UID LED button on
the front of the node. Blue LEDs illuminate on the front and rear panels of the node.
b.
Go to the back of the rack and locate the node by identifying the illuminated rear UID LED
button.
c.
Unplug the node AC power cords from the power source. The node is now without power.
To power off the system from Command View VLS:
1.
Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle.
2.
Under the System tab, select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Under Maintenance Tasks, select System Maintenance.
4.
Select Shutdown All Nodes from the task bar.
Shutdown Head Wizard displays.
5.
Click Yes to shut down all nodes.
6.
If removing the access panel from a node, wait until the VLS has completed its shutdown operation,
then press the UID LED button on the front of the node.
Blue LEDs illuminate on the front and rear panels of the node. Amber system power LEDs indicate
that nodes are in standby mode.
7.
Press the Power On/Standby button on any nodes that are not in standby mode.
8.
If removing the access panel from a node:
130
a.
Go to the back of the rack and locate the node by identifying the illuminated rear UID LED
button.
b.
Unplug the node AC power cords from the power source. The node is now without power.
Operation
Powering Off VLS6000 Disk Arrays
CAUTION:
Always power off the node before disconnecting a VHDCI cable or powering off a disk array to
prevent the appliance from erroneously detecting a disk array RAID volume failure.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to power off a disk array when replacing a disk array fan module, power supply,
or hard drive.
To power off a disk array:
1.
Power off the node. See “Powering Off the System” on page 130.
2.
Press the power button on the rear of the disk array.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
131
132
Operation
7 User Interfaces
This section describes the three user interfaces (UIs) that can be used to configure, manage, and
monitor the VLS over the web, remotely over the LAN, or through a serial connection. It also provides
instructions on how to open and close a connection to the VLS for each type of user interface.
User Interface Requirements
VLS user interfaces lists the VLS user interfaces and their requirements. Of the three user interfaces,
Command View VLS should be used in most circumstances. It is the most intuitive and easiest to learn
and use.
Multiple user interface sessions may be open at once.
Table 5 VLS user interface requirements
User interface
Command View VLS
Secure shell (ssh)
Requirements
PC or workstation network
attached to the VLS running Microsoft Internet
Explorer 6.0 or higher, or
Netscape Navigator 4.7
or higher
Secure shell client (such
as PuTTY) network attached to the VLS
Configuration
10/100/1000 BaseT
Ethernet port configured
with an appropriate IP
address, host name,
domain name, subnet
mask, and gateway
For more information
See “Command View
VLS” on page 133.
Can login as
Administrator or User
10/100/1000 BaseT
Ethernet port configured
with an appropriate IP
address, subnet mask,
and gateway
See “Secure Shell and
Serial User Interfaces” on page 138.
Can login as
Administrator only
Serial
Null-modem cable attached to the VLS and
terminal emulation program (such as Windows
Hyperterminal™) configured to 115200 baud
Only one serial
connection at a time is
permissible
Can login as
Administrator or
Emergency user
See “Secure Shell and
Serial User Interfaces” on page 138.
Command View VLS
Command View VLS is a web browser-based GUI that you can use to configure, manage, and monitor
your VLS through a LAN. Command View VLS provides the following:
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
133
• Configuration and management of VLS virtual devices (libraries and tape drives) and cartridges,
including LUN masking and LUN mapping
• Changing of the default Fibre Channel host port settings
• Viewing and deleting VLS notification alerts
• Configuring VLS mail and SNMP notification alert settings
• Editing VLS account passwords
• Enabling and disabling storage capacity oversubscription
• Managing storage pools
• Establishing automigration policies and copy pools, and performing destination library operations
• Viewing VLS hardware and virtual device status
• Installing VLS firmware updates
• Saving and restoring VLS network settings and virtual library configurations
• Restarting VLS device emulations and Command View VLS
• Viewing and saving VLS trace log files
Command View VLS is installed on the VLS and communicates through the LAN. Users can open a
Command View VLS session from a web browser on the LAN, HP StorageWorks Command View TL,
or HP Systems Insight Manager.
Window Regions
Command View VLS windows consist of five regions. Not all regions are displayed on all windows.
Item
Description
1
status banner
2
task bar
3
status pane
4
notifications pane
5
navigation tree
134
User Interfaces
NOTE:
You can enlarge or reduce any region on the window. To change the size of a region, position your
cursor on the border of a pane, and press the left mouse button while simultaneously dragging the
border.
Opening a Command View VLS Session from a Web Browser
NOTE:
Before you can open a Command View VLS session, you must set the VLS network settings. See
“Setting the Network Settings” on page 141.
To open a Command View VLS session from a web browser:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2.
In the web browser URL box, enter:
https://<fully qualified name of the VLS>
NOTE:
Entering “http://<fully qualified name>” instead of the above URL automatically
redirects you to the secure “https://<fully qualified name>” connection. All
communications are over a secure connection.
3.
If a Security Alert window opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
certificate, install the SSL certificate as described in “Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web
Browser” on page 136.
The first time you open a Command View VLS session (and the first time you open a Command
View VLS session after changing the fully qualified name of the VLS), a Security Alert window
opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate.
4.
Enter administrator or user in the Username box. The user name is case sensitive.
NOTE:
Logging in as administrator gives you full privileges to all VLS functions available through
Command View VLS. Logging in as a user gives you only viewing and cartridge management
privileges.
5.
Enter the appropriate password in the Password box for the username entered.
The default administrator password is admin. The default user password is guest. The password
is case sensitive.
6.
Click Login.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
135
Opening a Command View VLS Session from Command View TL
NOTE:
Before you can open a Command View VLS session from Command View TL, you must first install
Command View TL on a PC or workstation and then add the VLS to Command View TL. See the HP
OpenView Command View for TL User Guide for instructions.
Command View TL gives you the ability to manage and license multiple virtual and physical tape
libraries from a single management application.
To open a Command View VLS session from Command View TL:
1.
Start Command View TL.
2.
From the Library Selection tab of the Launcher window, double-click the VLS from the list of
libraries.
3.
If a Security Alert window opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
certificate, install the SSL certificate as described in “Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web
Browser” on page 136.
The first time you open a Command View VLS session (and the first time you open a Command
View VLS session after changing the fully qualified name of the VLS), a Security Alert window
opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate.
4.
Enter administrator or user in the Username box. The username is case sensitive.
NOTE:
Logging in as administrator gives you full privileges to all VLS functions available through
Command View VLS. Logging in as a user gives you only viewing and cartridge management
privileges.
5.
Enter the appropriate password in the Password box for the username entered.
The default administrator password is admin. The default user password is guest. The password
is case sensitive.
6.
Click Login.
Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web Browser
The first time you open a Command View VLS session (and the first time you open a Command View
VLS session after changing the fully qualified name of the VLS), a message that reads “There is a
problem with this website's security certificate.” appears on the screen. Although you can continue
to the login screen, you will get this message every time you access the login screen until you install
the SSL certificate into your web browser.
The following procedure describes how to install the certificate for Internet Explorer 7. Other browsers
may have a different process.
136
User Interfaces
1.
Select Continue to this website (not recommended). A pink Certificate Error appears to the right
of the URL. (Your browser window may look slightly different from the images below.)
2.
Select the Certificate Error. An Untrusted Certificate window opens.
3.
Select View certificates. A Certificate window opens.
4.
Select Install Certificate... to launch the Certificate Wizard.
5.
Select Next.
6.
Make sure that Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate (the default)
is chosen and select Next.
7.
Select Finish.
8.
A Security Window opens. Select Yes.
9.
Select OK or Finish on each window that displays until the Command View VLS login window
displays.
10.
Restarting Command View VLS
To restart Command View VLS:
1.
Under the System tab, select Chassis in the navigation tree.
2.
Under Maintenance Tasks, select System Maintenance.
3.
Click Restart Command View VLS in the task bar.
The Restart Command View VLS window opens.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
137
4.
Click Restart to confirm.
Closing a Command View VLS Session
To close a Command View VLS session, click Logout in the status banner or simply close the web
browser.
Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces
The secure shell user interface provides remote configuration and management of your VLS over a
LAN using the VLS command-line interface (CLI) command set. The serial user interface provides local
configuration and management of your VLS through the serial connector on the rear of the VLS node
using the same VLS CLI command set.
A secure shell or serial session provides the following:
• Setting the VLS network settings
• Configuration and management of VLS virtual devices (libraries and tape drives) and cartridges
• Changing of the default Fibre Channel host port settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing and deleting VLS notification alerts
Configuring VLS mail and SNMP notification alert settings
Editing VLS account passwords
Enabling and disabling storage capacity oversubscription
Viewing VLS hardware status
Saving and restoring VLS network settings and virtual library configurations
Restarting VLS device emulations and Command View VLS
Rebooting and powering off the VLS
The serial user interface also provides emergency login access that allows you to change the
administrator password if it is forgotten.
Opening a Secure Shell Session
NOTE:
Before you can open a secure shell session, you must set the VLS network settings. See “Setting the
Network Settings” on page 141.
To open a secure shell session:
1.
Open a secure shell session to the VLS using a secure shell program (such as PuTTY) or by entering:
ssh <fully qualified VLS name> and then press Enter.
2.
At the Login as: prompt, enter administrator and then press Enter.
3.
At the Password: prompt, enter the administrator password and then press Enter.
The default administrator password is admin.
138
User Interfaces
Closing a Secure Shell Session
To close a secure shell session enter logout, done, quit, bye, or exit, and then press Enter.
Opening a Serial Session
To open a serial session:
1.
Connect a PC or workstation to the serial port on the rear of the VLS using the null-modem (serial)
cable provided.
2.
Establish a CLI session using a terminal emulation program, such as Windows Hyperterminal.
3.
Enter administrator or emergency for username. Both logins gives you full privileges to all
VLS functions available through the CLI command set.
4.
Enter the administrator or emergency password.
The default administrator password is admin. The emergency password is repair.
Closing a Serial Session
To close a serial session, click Logout at the top of the Console Manager window. This logs you out
of the Console Manager and displays the Logon window.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
139
140
User Interfaces
8 Configuration
This section describes how to configure and manage the VLS network settings, user preferences, Fibre
Channel host ports (optional), virtual libraries, tape drives, and cartridges.
Setting the Network Settings
Before you can open a Command View VLS or secure shell session, set the network settings. The
network settings can be set using either the VLS discovery utility (see Setting the Network Settings
using the VLS Discovery Utility) or the CLI command set using the serial user interface (see “Setting
the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set” on page 143).
Setting the Network Settings using the VLS Discovery Utility
The VLS discovery utility looks for all the devices on the same subnet as the Windows computer on
which it is running. It then lists the devices and indicates whether they are configured (have an IP
address) or unconfigured.
You can use the VLS discovery utility to set the network settings on an unconfigured VLS, and to view
the network settings of configured devices. The utility can also be used to remove LUNs from the user
interface after one or more LUNs are no longer configured or have been removed from the VLS.
NOTE:
The VLS discovery utility can only be used to change the network settings on a VLS with no IP address.
Once a VLS has an IP address, either through the DHCP or the VLS discovery utility, its network settings
cannot be changed using the VLS discovery utility. Use the CLI command set or Command View VLS
to change the network settings on a VLS that has an IP address. See “Setting the Network Settings
using the CLI Command Set” on page 143.
To set the network settings using the VLS discovery utility:
1.
Insert the VLS Documentation CD into the CD drive on a Windows system that is on the same
subnet as the VLS.
The CD auto-launches.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
141
2.
Click VLS discovery utility.
The VLS discovery utility opens and lists all the devices it sees on the subnet (Figure 48).
The Configured box for a device is checked if the device has an IP address.
The device type, host name, IP address (if available), and serial number are displayed for each
device listed.
Figure 48 VLS discovery utility — main window
.
3.
To visually identify a device listed, select the device from the list and click Beacon. This will
illuminate an LED on the device for the specified length of time.
In the case of the VLS, the UID LED button on the VLS node illuminates.
142
Configuration
4.
Select the VLS from the list of devices and click Configure.
The Device Configuration window opens (Figure 49).
Figure 49 VLS discovery utility – Device Configuration window
.
5.
Leave the default host name or enter a new host name in the Host Name box.
The default VLS host name is VLS<VLS serial number>.
The host name cannot contain spaces.
6.
Enter an IP address in the IP Address box.
7.
Enter the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box.
NOTE:
To display the correct subnet mask, gateway, DNS server, and domain name settings for
the VLS, open a DOS window on the computer running the VLS discovery utility and type
ipconfig /all
8.
Enter the gateway in the Gateway box.
9.
Enter the DNS server IP address in the DNS IP Address box.
10. Enter the domain name in the Domain Name box.
11. Click Configure to save the network settings to the VLS.
12. Click Exit to close the VLS discovery utility.
Setting the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set
To set the network settings using the CLI command set, set either the:
• DHCP usage and host name, or
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
143
• Fully qualified host name (or host name and DNS domain name separately), DNS server address,
IP address, gateway, and netmask
To set the network settings using the CLI command set:
1.
Open a serial session and log in to the administrator account. See “Opening a Serial
Session” on page 139.
2.
To see the current configuration settings, at the prompt enter:
showConfig
3.
Set each desired configuration value by entering:
setConfigValue <-tag> [value]
where <-tag> can be any of the following:
Tag
Description
-host
Host name (such as vlsexamp) (unqualified)
-domain
DNS domain name (such as xyz.com)
-fullhost
Fully qualified name (such as vlsexamp.xyz.com)
-dnsaddr
DNS server address (replaces all addresses with one line)
-dnsaddr1
First DNS server address (cannot use with dnsaddr)
-dnsaddr2
Second DNS server address (cannot use with dnsaddr)
-dhcp
Has no value, indicates you want to configure the public Ethernet connection
using DHCP (reset is -dhcp=false)
-ipaddr
IP address of public Ethernet connection
-gate
Gateway to network (xx.xx.xx.x)
-mask
Netmask. Default is 255.255.255.0
–ntpPrimary
First NTP Server Address
—ntpSecondary
Second NTP Server Address
NOTE:
More than one network value can be set at a time or you can set them individually.
To reset a value, enter “ “ (quoted space) as the value.
NOTE:
If you need to clear the DNS completely, set the DHCP to false and enter 0.0.0.0 for
both the first and second DNS server addresses.
4.
When all the network parameters are set to your desired values, save the settings by entering:
commitConfig
144
Configuration
5.
Verify the network settings have been changed by entering:
showConfig
Setting the Network Settings using Command View VLS
To set the network settings using Command View VLS, set either the:
• DHCP usage and host name, or
• Fully qualified host name (or host name and DNS domain name separately), DNS server address,
IP address, gateway, and netmask
To set the network settings using Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Set Network Configuration under Maintenance Tasks.
4.
Current network configuration, NTP settings, and time zone settings are displayed. Modify these
as needed (Figure 50).
Figure 50 Set Network Configuration Wizard window
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
145
5.
Click Finish to apply the settings.
NOTE:
The system automatically reboots after any change.
NOTE:
If you need to clear the DNS completely, clear the Use DHCP checkbox and enter 0.0.0.0
for both the primary and secondary DNS server addresses.
Setting the User Preferences
Setting the user preferences allows you to:
• Set the frequency at which the system state is checked and the browser is refreshed
• Add the VLS administrator's name, company, mail, and phone number, and the VLS location to
the Identity tab window
• Set the maximum number of notification alerts to store
To set the user preferences, from Command View VLS:
1.
From the System tab, select Chassis in the navigation tree.
2.
Click User Preferences under Maintenance Tasks. The User Preferences window opens.
3.
Enter a value (in seconds) in the State Polling Frequency box.
The default state polling frequency is 15 seconds.
4.
Enter the appropriate numeric value in the Number of Notifications dialog box.
5.
Enter the company name in the Company dialog box.
6.
Enter the city and state where the VLS is located in the Location dialog box. This is displayed on
the Identity tab.
7.
Enter the VLS administrator's name in the Contact dialog box. This is displayed on the Identity
tab.
8.
Enter the VLS administrator's phone number, including area code, in the Contact Phone dialog
box. This is displayed on the Identity tab.
9.
Enter the VLS administrator's E-mail address in the E-mail dialog box. This is displayed on the
Identity tab.
The E-mail address entered is assigned to the Email Administrator link on the Login window. Users
can click this link to send an E-mail to the administrator when they need help or are unable to
log in to Command View VLS.
10. Enter the warranty serial number in the Warranty Serial Number dialog box. This is displayed
on the Identity tab and is saved and restored as part of the VLS device configuration.
11. Click Apply Settings.
146
Configuration
Editing the Default Fibre Channel Host Port Settings
Only edit the Fibre Channel host port settings if you do not want to use the default settings, if some
system problem is occurring, or if the “AUTO” setting is not working properly.
NOTE:
The values displayed under Actual are the actual values found by the VLS for the Fibre Channel host
port.
NOTE:
If you enter a value that is not supported by the Fibre Channel port (for example, you enter Fabric in
the Topology column but the port uses the Loop topology), your entry remains in the Preferred box,
but the Actual column will display the correct value when Command View VLS performs its occasional
status checks.
To change the default Fibre Channel host port settings, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Expand the Node to modify in the navigation tree.
4.
Select Fibre Channel in the navigation tree.
The Fibre Channel Host Ports window opens (Figure 51).
Figure 51 Fibre Channel Host Ports window
.
5.
Enter a value for the Loop ID in the Loop ID Preferred box for each Fibre Channel host port to
use for prioritizing communication requests with the VLS.
If the Fibre Channel host port's topology is Fabric, the Loop ID value is ignored.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
147
6.
Select the Fibre Channel host port's topology in the Topology Preferred box for each Fibre Channel
host port.
Auto—Allows the VLS to determine the Fibre Channel port's topology
Loop—Sets the topology type to an arbitrated loop
Fabric—Sets the topology type to fabric
7.
Select a link speed in the Link Speed Preferred box for each Fibre Channel host port.
Auto—Allows the VLS to determine the Fibre Channel port's link speed
1—1 Gb per second
2—2 Gb per second
4—4 Gb per second
8.
When you are finished configuring the Fibre Channel ports, click Apply Settings.
9.
Restart the VLS device emulations to make the changes take effect. See “Restarting VLS Device
Emulations” on page 172.
Managing Oversubscription
Because the VLS dynamically allocates storage space as data is written to virtual media, the VLS
allows you to allocate more cartridge capacity than is physically installed. This feature, called
oversubscription, permits configuring your system for anticipated storage growth; configure cartridges
beyond your current capacity and then seamlessly add physical storage later.
By default, oversubscription is disabled.
NOTE:
Using oversubscription, you run the risk of running out of physical storage capacity and requires
careful planning of your storage needs and a review of your current storage policy.
Enabling and Disabling Oversubscription
To enable oversubscription:
In Command View VLS:
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
The chassis details window opens.
3.
In the Oversubscription section, select Enabled.
4.
The Notify when storage capacity is [x] % Full box defaults to 90. You may change the value or
leave it at 90.
This percentage value is the threshold of storage space consumed that when reached triggers a
storage capacity notification alert. If this threshold is set to zero (0), an alert will be sent only
when existing capacity has been reached.
5.
Click Apply Settings.
To disable oversubscription, deselect the Enabled box.
148
Configuration
NOTE:
Oversubscription cannot be disabled while cartridge capacity is oversubscribed.
Shutdown at 98% Capacity
The system displays warnings on the Notifications screen when the backend storage capacity consumed
reaches the user-defined threshold (determined when you enabled oversubscription). Additional
notifications are sent when the capacity consumed reaches 95% and again at 98%.
At the level of 98%, the system will reject all attempts to write data from the backup application. Free
up storage space or add more storage before reaching this point to ensure that no data is lost. All
read operations remain unaffected.
Once you reduce the capacity consumed to a level below the user-defined threshold, writes from the
backup application resume automatically. However, if you reduce the capacity consumed to less than
98% but still above the threshold, you can manually resume writes by selecting Enable Writes (now
visible) from the task bar of the Chassis status screen.
When the storage capacity consumed exceeds the user-defined threshold, the system:
•
•
•
•
Displays warnings on the Notifications screen
Sends emails (if configured) to specified users
Sends alerts to the management consoles (if SNMP traps are configured)
Displays the Reclaim Space link on the Chassis status screen
At this point, you can perform the following tasks:
• Erase cartridges — erase or relabel expired cartridges to free up storage space. See your backup
application manual for details.
NOTE:
Use the Cartridge Utilization report to identify cartridges that are consuming more space and can
be erased to create more storage space. See “Receiving Automated Reports” on page 190.
Erasing data from cartridges containing data that is not deduplicated will free up more storage
space than erasing from cartridges with deduplicated data.
• Reclaim space — see “Reclaiming Storage Space” on page 149.
• Add more storage
NOTE:
You cannot hot-add storage while the VLS is deduplicating data.
Reclaiming Storage Space
The Reclaim Space task appears on the Chassis status screen when the storage capacity consumed
reaches the user-defined threshold (or the default of 90%). This allows you to schedule reclamation
of the additional storage you make available by erasing cartridges. First erase cartridges from your
backup application, then follow the procedure below.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
149
From Command View VLS:
1.
On the System tab, select Chassis from the navigation screen to open the Chassis status screen.
2.
Select Reclaim Space in the task bar.
The VLS system initiates space reclamation and the Notifications screen displays a notification
of the scheduled reclamation.
Managing Virtual Device LUNs
The following information varies in some places from VLS firmware version 2.x and version 3.x and
is noted where this occurs.
The VLS has a LUN masking, a LUN mapping, and a port mapping feature that allows you to restrict
host access to the LUNs (virtual libraries and tape drives) configured on the VLS and assign each
virtual device to a specific Fibre Channel host port. These features allow you to allocate the virtual
devices to individual hosts and distribute the virtual tape drives across the Fibre Channel host ports
to achieve maximum bandwidth.
VLS firmware version 3.x: You can set a global default so that either the VLS allows all hosts connected
to the VLS through the SAN to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS, or the VLS prevents
all hosts from viewing any virtual devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host. Each time you
add a new host to the VLS, it takes the global default you have set. The VLS firmware also manages
the LUN numbering so that the virtual device LUN assignments always meet operating system
requirements and restrictions. See “Default LUN Numbering” on page 150 and “Operating System
LUN Requirements and Restrictions” on page 151. See “LUN Masking (v3.x)” on page 151 and “LUN
Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 for details of these features.
VLS firmware version 2.x: By default, the VLS allows all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN
to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS. Also, the VLS firmware manages the LUN mapping
so that the virtual device LUN assignments always meet operating system requirements and restrictions.
See “Default LUN Numbering” on page 150 and “Operating System LUN Requirements and
Restrictions” on page 151. Optionally, you can restrict host access to individual virtual devices using
the LUN masking feature then, for each LUN masked host, to use the LUN mapping feature to manually
assign LUN numbers to any virtual devices you want the host to be able to access. See “LUN Masking
(v3.x)” on page 151 and “LUN Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 for reasons you may want to use these
features.
Port mapping is required and allows you to assign each virtual device to one of the Fibre Channel
host ports or a pair of Fibre Channel host ports (if your backup solution supports this).
Default LUN Numbering
The VLS automatically assigns a logical unit number (LUN) to each virtual library and tape drive
created on the VLS in the order in which they are created by you, starting with LUN0 and increasing
incrementally by one as each new virtual library or tape drive is created on an Fibre Channel host
port (LUN1, LUN2, and so on). The first virtual device port mapped to any of the Fibre Channel host
ports is assigned the LUN number LUN0. The second virtual device port mapped to an Fibre Channel
host port is assigned the LUN number LUN1, and so on.
The default LUN numbers are changed by the VLS firmware when the VLS device emulations are
restarted if:
• A virtual device has been deleted since the last restart, creating a gap in the LUN numbering, or
• A virtual tape drive has been added to a library since the last restart and the default LUN number
it was assigned is not consecutive with the other virtual tape drives in the same library.
150
Configuration
Restarting VLS device emulations changes the default LUN numbers as necessary to remove the gap
or to make the virtual tape drive LUN numbers consecutive in each library. This is done so that the
virtual device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements.
NOTE:
When a LUN has been unconfigured or otherwise deleted, it may still show up in the VLS user interface.
Use the VLS discovery utility to refresh the list of LUNs that are present.
Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions
Most operating systems require that each VLS Fibre Channel host port connected to the SAN has a
virtual device with the LUN number LUN0 and no gaps in the LUN numbering (LUN0, LUN1, LUN2,
and so on). If the operating system does not see a LUN0 on a VLS Fibre Channel host port when it is
scanning for new hardware on the SAN, it will stop looking for LUNs on that port and erroneously
report that there are no LUNs (virtual devices) on that port. If the operating system sees a LUN0, LUN1,
and LUN2 but not a LUN3 on the port, it will stop looking for LUNs on that port when the gap in the
LUN numbering is encountered. Even though there may be more LUNs, such as LUN4, the operating
system will erroneously report that there are only three LUNs on the port.
In addition, operating systems are configured to only look for a maximum number of LUNs per device
and no more. Once the maximum number of LUNs is detected, the operating system stops looking.
In the case of the VLS, the operating system considers each Fibre Channel host port to be one device
with its own set of LUNs. So, if the maximum number of LUNs an operating system is configured to
see is eight, the operating system will only see LUN0 through LUN7 and will not see LUN8, LUN9,
and up on each Fibre Channel host port.
To get around the maximum LUNs per device restriction, you can either:
• Increase the maximum LUNs per device setting for the operating system. See “Troubleshooting” on page 309 for more information.
• Enable LUN mapping on the VLS to restrict the number of virtual devices the host's operating system
sees on the VLS Fibre Channel host ports. See “LUN Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 or “LUN Mapping
(v2.x)” on page 158 for instructions.
LUN Masking
The method of LUN masking differs between VLS firmware versions 3.x and 2.x.
LUN Masking (v3.x)
LUN masking restricts a host's access to the virtual devices (virtual libraries and/or tape drives) on
the VLS. You should use it when there are more virtual device LUNs mapped to an Fibre Channel host
port than the operating system LUN restrictions support. You can limit the LUNs the host's operating
system can see on the port, so that only the virtual devices the host needs to see are visible.
For example, if a host's operating system is configured to only see up to eight LUNs per Fibre Channel
host port, the host will not be able to see the virtual devices numbered LUN8, LUN9, and up. Suppose
that you need the host to see LUN0 through LUN5, LUN8, and LUN9. You can enable LUN mapping,
thereby hiding all of the LUNs from the host. Then you can map LUN0 through LUN5, LUN8, and
LUN9 to the host. The VLS will automatically renumber the mapped LUNs so that LUNs 8 and 9
become LUNs 6 and 7 and they are now within the eight the host can see. See “LUN Mapping
(v3.x)” on page 153.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
151
In the VLS, LUN masking occurs automatically for all hosts when you enable LUN mapping using the
global enable/disable LUN mapping setting. See “Setting the Default LUN Mapping” on page 153.
LUN Masking (v2.x)
By default all hosts on the SAN can access all the virtual libraries on the VLS. You can restrict a host's
access to the virtual libraries and/or tape drives (virtual devices) on the VLS by performing LUN
masking.
LUN masking should also be used when there are more virtual devices (LUNs) port mapped to a FC
host port than the operating system LUN restrictions support. This prevents the host's operating system
from seeing the virtual devices it needs to see on the port. For example, if a host's operating system
is configured to only see up to eight LUNs per FC host port, the host will not be able to see the virtual
devices numbered LUN8, LUN9, ..., and up. LUN masking limits the virtual devices (LUNs) the host's
operating system can see on the port, so that only the virtual devices the host needs to see are visible.
To perform LUN masking, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Click Host LUN Mapping Mode in the task bar.
The Host LUN Mapping Mode window opens and displays a list of the host world wide port
numbers (WWPNs) seen by the VLS FC host ports on the SAN (Figure 52).
Figure 52 Host LUN Mapping Mode window
.
4.
Select Mapping Enabled in the Mapping Status box for each host for which you want to perform
LUN masking.
The hosts with mapping enabled are not able to access any of the virtual devices on the VLS until
you give them access by performing “LUN Mapping (v2.x)” on page 158.
5.
To assign a host name alias to a host WWPN listed, enter the host name in the Hostname box.
6.
To add a host WWPN to the list that is not plugged into the SAN yet, enter the host WWPN
number and then click Add.
7.
When you are finished making changes, click Apply Settings.
LUN Mapping
The method of LUN mapping differs between VLS firmware versions 3.x and 2.x.
152
Configuration
LUN Mapping (v3.x)
LUN mapping is used to present only a subset of the VLS virtual devices to a host. If LUN mapping is
enabled, the VLS prevents all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN from viewing any virtual
devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host. By disabling LUN mapping, the VLS allows all
hosts connected to the VLS to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS. By default, LUN mapping
is disabled. The setting you choose will apply to every new host that you add to the VLS. See “Setting
the Default LUN Mapping” on page 153.
Setting the Default LUN Mapping
You can set a global default to disable or enable LUN mapping. The setting you choose will apply
to every new host that you add to the VLS.
• All Devices (LUN mapping disabled) – The default. The VLS allows all hosts connected to the VLS
through the SAN to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS.
• User-Defined (LUN mapping enabled) – the VLS prevents all hosts connected to the VLS through
the SAN from viewing any virtual devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host.
To set the default status of LUN mapping, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select LUN Mapping in the navigation tree.
4.
If this is not your first time changing the setting, select Change Host Access Mode in the task bar.
5.
Initially, All Devices is selected, and LUN mapping is disabled.
6.
To enable LUN mapping, select User-Defined.
7.
Select Apply.
The global default is now set. For every host you add, LUN mapping is automatically enabled
or disabled as you chose.
NOTE:
Both modes allow you to disable a host so that it cannot see any virtual devices regardless of any
other settings.
Mapping LUNs by Device
To map LUNs by device:
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
153
4.
Select Device View.
The Device View window displays all of the devices that have been mapped to a host (Figure
53).
Figure 53 LUN Mapping Device View window
.
5.
Select a library from the Choose a Library list to view its mapped devices.
The window refreshes to show the appropriate list.
6.
Use the View By list to narrow the list of devices based on the node.
7.
Select the devices you want to map to a particular host.
8.
Select the host in the Choose hosts list at the bottom of the window. These hosts currently do not
have any of the devices shown mapped to them.
You can select multiple hosts using Ctrl+click.
9.
Select Map next to Choose hosts.
The window refreshes and the host appears in the device list for the appropriate devices. The
selected devices are now visible to the new hosts.
To unmap LUNs by device:
1.
Navigate to the Device View window. See the mapping procedure above.
2.
Select the appropriate library from the Choose a Library list.
3.
Select the devices to unmap.
4.
Select Unmap next to the Choose hosts list.
The window refreshes and the newly unmapped devices disappear from the device list. They are
no longer visible to the hosts.
154
Configuration
NOTE:
After you map or unmap the virtual devices, the VLS automatically reassigns a logical unit number
(LUN) to each virtual library and tape drive created on the VLS to ensure that the virtual device LUN
numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements.
Mapping LUNs by Host
To map LUNs by host:
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree.
4.
Select Host View.
The Host View window displays all of the devices that can be seen by a selected host (Figure
54).
Figure 54 LUN Mapping Host View window
.
5.
Select a host from the Choose Host list to view the devices mapped to it.
The window refreshes to show the appropriate device list.
6.
Use the View By to narrow the list of devices based on the node.
7.
Select the devices to map in the field at the bottom of the window. These devices are currently
not mapped to the viewed host.
You can select multiple devices using Ctrl+click.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
155
8.
Select GO next to Map devices.
The window refreshes and the newly mapped devices appear in the list. These devices are now
visible to the host.
To unmap LUNs by host:
1.
Navigate to the Host View window. See the mapping procedure above.
2.
Select the appropriate host from the Choose Host list.
3.
Select the devices to unmap.
4.
Select GO next to Unmap selected devices.
The window refreshes and the newly unmapped devices disappear from the list. These devices
are no longer visible to the host.
NOTE:
After you map or unmap the virtual devices, the VLS automatically reassigns a logical unit number
(LUN) to each virtual library and tape drive created on the VLS to ensure that the virtual device LUN
numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements.
Setting Up the Hosts
You can configure the hosts in Command View VLS. You will make all of the changes to the hosts
from the Host Setup window.
To open the Host Setup window:
1.
Select the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree.
156
Configuration
4.
Select Host Setup.
The Host Setup window displays a list of the host world wide port numbers (WWPNs) seen by
the VLS Fibre Channel host ports on the SAN (Figure 55).
Figure 55 LUN Mapping Host Setup window
.
To add a host WWPN:
1.
Open the Host Setup window.
2.
In the top row, select the state of the new host in the State list.
3.
Enter the WWPN in the World Wide Port Number box.
The WWPN must be exactly 16 numerals long and cannot contain any letters or special characters.
4.
Enter a hostname in the Hostname box.
5.
Select Add.
The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the host was added successfully. The
new host WWPN is listed with the others.
To rename or newly assign a host name alias to a host WWPN:
1.
Open the Host Setup window.
2.
Select the hosts to rename.
3.
Enter the new hostname in the Hostname box for each selected host.
4.
Select Rename Hosts.
The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the hosts were renamed successfully.
The new names are visible in the box.
To disable or enable host WWPNs:
1.
Open the Host Setup window.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
157
2.
Select the hosts to change.
3.
Select Disable Hosts or Enable Hosts as appropriate.
The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the hosts were disabled or enabled
successfully. Note that the state now reflects the change.
To remove host WWPNs:
1.
Open the Host Setup window.
2.
Select the hosts to remove.
3.
Select Remove Hosts.
The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the hosts were removed successfully.
The hosts no longer appear on the list.
LUN Mapping (v2.x)
By default all hosts on the SAN see the LUN numbers that have been assigned to the virtual devices
by the VLS firmware. You have the option of assigning a different LUN number to a virtual device by
host using the LUN mapping feature. For example, you can assign Library 2 the LUN number LUN0
for host1, and the other hosts will still see Library 2 as the LUN number assigned by the VLS firmware.
LUN mapping is by host and is used to allow host access to hosts that are LUN masked, and to present
only a subset of the VLS virtual devices to a host.
LUN mapping should only be used if the host requires LUN masking. For example, if host1 is LUN
masked so it cannot see all the virtual libraries and/or virtual tape drive on a FC host port, the LUN
numbers it can see may not include LUN0 and have no gaps in the LUN numbering as required by
the operating system. See “Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions” on page 151.
To perform LUN mapping:
1.
Perform “LUN Masking (v2.x)” on page 152 and select Mapping Enabled for the hosts for which
you want to perform LUN mapping.
2.
Click the System tab.
3.
Select a virtual library or tape drive in the navigation tree that you want to make visible (accessible)
to the host.
158
Configuration
4.
Click Map LUNs in the task bar.
The Map LUNs window opens and displays the hosts with mapping enabled selected on the Host
LUN Mapping Mode window (Figure 56).
Figure 56 Library Parameters – Map LUNs window
.
5.
To allow a listed host to access the virtual library, enter a LUN value in the LUN box (such as 0,
1, 2, and so on).
The LUN value entered is assigned to the virtual library for that specific host. The default value
255 means the host does not have access.
6.
When you are finished making changes, click Apply Settings.
7.
Repeat these steps for the rest of the virtual libraries and tape drives configured on the VLS that
you want to make visible to the host.
CAUTION:
Each virtual device must be assigned a unique LUN number on the FC host port to which it is mapped.
If two virtual devices have the same LUN number on the same FC host port, the virtual device with
the lowest virtual device ID number assigned by the VLS is recognized as that LUN number by the
host's operating system. The other virtual device is ignored by the operating system.
Dual Port Virtual Devices
When creating a library robot LUN or tape drive LUNs, you can present the virtual devices to a pair
of host ports rather than just one port. Both ports must be on the same node. The Port Mapping list
displays selections for each individual port plus possible port pairs (for example: 0, 1, 0&1). The
benefit of dual port virtual devices is that they are still accessible when one path fails.
CAUTION:
Many operating systems and backup applications do not support more than one path to a tape library
device. Only use this feature if you are certain that it is supported.
When creating dual port virtual devices, the LUN numbering on both ports follows the conventions
for default LUN numbering (see “Default LUN Numbering” on page 150); however, if you use LUN
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
159
mapping for a dual port device (see “LUN Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 or “LUN Mapping
(v2.x)” on page 158), the defined LUN number for that device for a specified host applies to both
device paths. Follow the operating system LUN requirements (see “Operating System LUN Requirements
and Restrictions” on page 151) when configuring the paths.
Creating a Virtual Library
Before creating a virtual library, you must first:
• Determine the best way to manage VLS virtual library and tape drive LUNs for your environment
(see “Managing Virtual Device LUNs” on page 150).
• Determine the best way to configure virtual libraries and tape drives on your VLS for your environment. See the HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system solutions guide.
You can configure any combination of virtual tape libraries and virtual tape drives up to the maximum
number supported on the VLS. You can configure one node with up to 16 libraries with a total of up
to 128 tape drives.
To create a new virtual library, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Create Virtual Library in the task bar.
The Create Virtual Library Wizard opens (Figure 57).
Figure 57 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (1 of 12)
.
4.
Select the Fibre Channel host port on which to present the virtual library.
Only one port or port pair may be selected.
5.
Select the type of tape library to emulate.
NOTE:
The only library emulation Veritas supports for use with Netbackup is the HP VLS emulation.
IBM supports using the HP VLS emulation for TSM version 5.5.1 or higher. The HP VLS
emulation is not intended for use with other backup applications.
160
Configuration
6.
Click Next Step.
The next wizard window opens and displays the default values in the Maximum Slots, Maximum
Ports, and Maximum Drives boxes based on the physical tape library emulation selected (Figure
58).
Figure 58 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (2 of 12)
.
7.
Enter the maximum number of cartridge slots that may be added to the library in the Maximum
Slots box.
The default values in the Maximum Slots box is based on the physical tape library you selected.
CAUTION:
Changing the defaults can have unpredictable results if your backup application expects a
certain number of slots in a specific library type.
8.
Enter the maximum number of input/export ports on which the library may be configured to be
visible in the Maximum Ports box.
9.
Enter the maximum number of tape drives the library may contain in the Maximum Drives box.
NOTE:
The maximum values entered cannot be changed later. So, consider your potential future
requirements when entering values.
Not all of the tape drives and cartridges must be created at this time. You may add tape
drives later.
10. Click Next Step.
A window opens indicating that by default all libraries connected to the VLS have access to all
hosts.
11. Click Create Library.
A summary window opens and displays details about the library emulation created.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
161
12. Choose one of the following options:
• To perform LUN mapping for the virtual library, click Map LUNs and proceed to “LUN Mapping
(v3.x)” on page 153 for further instructions.
• To continue creating the virtual library, click Create Tape Drives and proceed to “Creating
Tape Drives” on page 162.
• To exit the wizard, click Cancel.
The library is created but does not contain any tape drives or cartridges. You can add tape
drives and cartridges later.
Editing a Virtual Library's Slots and Drives
To edit the slots and drives of a virtual library, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Virtual Libraries in the navigation tree.
4.
Select Edit Virtual Libraries in the task bar.
5.
On the Edit Virtual Libraries screen, select the library you want to edit from the list.
6.
Change the number of slots and/or the number of drives in the appropriate fields.
7.
Select Next. A warning message indicates that some services will stop if you make any changes.
8.
Select Edit Library to continue. The screen displays a “please wait” message.
You may select Return to cancel if you decide not to make the change.
9.
Log out of the GUI and close the browser window. Log back in approximately fifteen minutes
later.
This manual disconnect ensures that the edit screens refresh.
10. Check the library you edited on the System tab to verify the change.
Creating Tape Drives
NOTE:
If you add a virtual tape drive to a library after another library has been created, the default LUN
number assigned to the tape drive will not be consecutive with the other virtual tape drives in the same
library. To correct this, restart the VLS device emulations. See “Restarting VLS Device
Emulations” on page 172. The VLS firmware will change the virtual device LUN numbers on the VLS
so that all the default tape drive LUNs in a library are consecutive.
NOTE:
A virtual library may only contain one type of tape drive.
To add tape drives to a virtual library:
162
Configuration
1.
If you are already in the Create Library Wizard window, click Create Tape Drives.
The Tape Drive Parameters window opens.
2.
If not:
a.
Click the System tab.
b.
Select the library in the navigation tree to which you want to add tape drives.
c.
Click Create Tape Drive in the task bar.
The Tape Drive Parameters window opens (Figure 59).
Figure 59 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (5 of 12)
.
3.
Select the type of physical tape drive to emulate.
4.
Enter the Fibre Channel host port on which to present the tape drives in the Port Mapping box.
Only one port or port pair may be selected.
5.
Click Next Step.
The next Tape Drive Parameters window opens (Figure 60).
Figure 60 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (6 of 12)
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
163
6.
Enter the number of tape drives you want to create in the library at this time in the Tape Drives
box, if different from the default value.
You can add more tape drives to the library later. The Tape Drives box defaults to the standard
number of drives for the library type.
NOTE:
All the tape drives created at one time are mapped to the same Fibre Channel host ports.
Make sure to load-balance the tape drives across the Fibre Channel host ports to obtain
maximum performance. Tape drives in a library do not have to be mapped to the same
port as the library.
7.
To enable software data compression for the tape drives on the VLS6100, VLS6500, or VLS6800,
select Enable Compression.
Software data compression (2:1) is performed only on data handled by tape drives with data
compression enabled. Data compression allows the VLS to store more data.
Hardware data compression is used on the VLS6600; therefore, software compression is not
used.
NOTE:
A tape drive created with data compression enabled cannot be changed to disabled later.
8.
Click Create Tape Drive.
A summary window opens and displays details about the tape drives created.
9.
Choose one of the following options:
• To perform LUN mapping for the virtual tape drive, click Map LUNs and proceed to “LUN
Mapping (v3.x)” on page 153 for further instructions.
• To create more tape drives, click Create More Tape Drives.
• To add cartridges to the virtual library, click Create Cartridges and proceed to “Creating
Cartridges” on page 164.
• To exit the wizard, click Cancel.
At this point the library and tape drives have been created, but the library does not contain
any cartridges. You can add cartridges later.
Creating Cartridges
To add cartridges to a virtual library:
1.
If you are already in the Create Library Wizard window, select Create Cartridges.
The Cartridge Parameters window opens (Figure 61).
164
Configuration
2.
If not:
a.
Click the System tab.
b.
Select the virtual library in the navigation tree to which you are adding cartridges.
c.
Click Create Cartridge in the task bar.
The Cartridge Parameters window opens (Figure 61).
Figure 61 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (8 of 12)
.
3.
4.
To add a barcode template:
a.
Enter the barcode prefix (one to six alphanumeric characters) in the Barcode Prefix box. No
special characters are permitted.
b.
Enter the number of digits for the barcode number in the Digit Length box. For example, if
you enter “3” the barcode numbers will be 001, 002, 003, etc.
c.
Enter the barcode suffix (one or two alphanumeric characters) in the Barcode Suffix box.
No special characters are permitted.
d.
Enter the starting barcode number in the Starting # box.
e.
Click Add to add the new barcode template.
f.
To add another barcode template, repeat these steps.
Click the radio button next to the barcode template you want to use to create the cartridges.
NOTE:
NetBackup has total barcode limit of eight characters. HP Data Protector has a total barcode
limit of 16 characters. Check your user guide for other backup applications.
5.
Click Next Step.
6.
Select the type of physical cartridge to emulate (Figure 62).
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
165
7.
Click Next Step.
Figure 62 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (9 of 12)
.
8.
Enter the number of cartridges and the cartridge size in the appropriate boxes (Figure 63).
The default number of cartridges is based on the maximum number of slots configured for the
virtual library. The default cartridge size is based on the actual size of the type of cartridge
emulated.
The system calculates and displays the amount of required storage. If the required storage exceeds
what is available, the overage appears in red. You can allow the oversubscription of storage
capacity (see “Enabling and Disabling Oversubscription” on page 148), or you can change either
the number of cartridges or the cartridge size (or both) to correct the overage condition.
Figure 63 Create Virtual Library Wizard window (10 of 12)
.
9.
Click Next Step.
A summary window opens and displays details about the cartridges you created.
10. Click Next.
166
Configuration
11. Click Return.
The System tab window opens. You can now select the new library, tape drives, and cartridges
in the navigation tree to view their configuration information, such as their default LUN numbers.
Destroying a Virtual Library
NOTE:
Destroying a virtual library may create a gap in the default LUN numbering on the Fibre Channel
host port to which it was mapped. If a gap is created, restart the VLS device emulations to remove
the gap. See “Restarting VLS Device Emulations” on page 172.
Most operating systems will ignore (cannot access) any virtual devices with LUN numbers that follow
a gap in the LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host port.
NOTE:
You cannot destroy a library that is currently being accessed by a backup application.
When a virtual library is destroyed, all the tape drives associated with the library are also destroyed.
The cartridges in the virtual library, however, are not destroyed. They are moved to the Firesafe where
they are stored until you either destroy them or associate them with a virtual library. See “Managing
Cartridges” on page 171.
To destroy (delete) a virtual library, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select the virtual library in the navigation tree.
The virtual library details window opens.
3.
Click Destroy Virtual Library in the task bar.
4.
Click Yes to confirm.
5.
Click Finish.
Destroying a Tape Drive
NOTE:
Destroying a tape drive may create a gap in the default LUN numbering on the Fibre Channel host
port to which it was mapped. If a gap is created, restart the VLS device emulations to remove the
gap. See “Restarting VLS Device Emulations” on page 172.
Most operating systems will ignore (cannot access) any virtual devices with LUN numbers that follow
a gap in the LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host port.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
167
NOTE:
You cannot destroy a tape drive that is currently being used by a backup application.
To destroy a tape drive, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select the tape drive in the navigation tree.
The tape drive details window opens.
3.
Click Destroy Tape Drive in the task bar.
4.
Click Yes to confirm.
5.
Click Finish.
Deleting Cartridges
You can delete one or more cartridges at a time from the VLS. The delete cartridge operation removes
the specified cartridges from the VLS, freeing the storage space previously consumed by those cartridges
for new data.
CAUTION:
If you want to keep data that is currently on a cartridge that you are going to delete, copy the data
to another cartridge using a backup application before performing this task.
NOTE:
You cannot delete a cartridge that is currently being accessed by a backup application. Cancel all
replication and deduplication jobs associated with this cartridge first.
You may delete replication cartridges on either the source or the target VLS with the following results:
• Deleting a source cartridge results in the mirror copy pool on the target VLS moving to the Mirror
Broken state.
• Deleting a target cartridge results in the cartridge disappearing from the mirror copy pool on the
source VLS.
To delete cartridges, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Cartridges in the navigation tree. The cartridges details window opens.
3.
Select the number of cartridges to display from the menu beside the category of cartridges you
wish to delete. The options are 10, 50, 100 (default), 500, or 1024 cartridges.
4.
Click View beside the category. The cartridges parameters window opens.
5.
Select the Select box next to each cartridge that you want to delete, or use Select All to delete all
the cartridges listed.
6.
Click Go to the right of Delete Selected.
168
Configuration
7.
Click Yes to confirm.
8.
Click Finish.
NOTE:
Barcode numbers assigned to cartridges that have been deleted can be reused. To reuse a barcode
number, do one of the following:
• Create a new barcode template with the appropriate values to use the barcode numbers.
• Delete the barcode template used to create the original cartridges, and then recreate the barcode
template with the appropriate values to use the barcode numbers.
Moving Cartridges
You can move one or more cartridges at a time from one library to another or from a library to the
firesafe.
You may delete replication cartridges on either the source or the target VLS with the following results:
• Moving a source cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library does not
move the target cartridge.
• Moving a target cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library, within the
same replication target and copy pool, results in the source cartridge moving to the new slot.
• Moving a source cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to the firesafe results in
the target cartridge disappearing from the echo copy pool and moving to the firesafe.
• Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to the firesafe, or to a
different slot that is not part of the echo copy pool, does not move the source cartridge.
• Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library, or to a new slot in the
same library within a new echo copy pool, results in the source cartridge disappearing from the
echo copy pool but not moving from its existing library.
To move cartridges, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Cartridges in the navigation tree. The cartridges details window opens.
3.
Select the number of cartridges to display from the menu beside the category of cartridges you
wish to move. The options are 10, 50, 100 (default), 500, or 1024 cartridges.
4.
Click View beside the category. The cartridges parameters window opens.
5.
Select the Select box next to each cartridge that you want to delete, or use Select All to delete all
the cartridges listed.
6.
Select the destination from the Move Selected To menu.
7.
Click Go to the right of the Move Selected To menu.
NOTE:
If you have moved a large number of cartridges, allow approximately 20–30 minutes for the VLS
system to fully free up the resources from the move before making changes based on the move.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
169
Adding and Removing Barcode Templates
You can add and remove (delete), but not edit, cartridge barcode templates at any time.
NOTE:
Deleting a barcode template does not affect the cartridges that were created using it.
To add or delete a barcode template, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Cartridges in the navigation tree.
3.
Click Add/Remove Barcode Templates in the task bar. The Add/Remove Barcode Templates
window opens.
4.
To delete a barcode template, click the Remove button for the barcode template.
The window refreshes when the deletion operation is finished.
5.
170
To add a barcode template:
a.
Enter the barcode prefix (one to five alpha characters) in the Barcode Prefix box.
b.
Enter the number of digits for the barcode number in the Digit Length box.
c.
Enter the barcode suffix (one to two alpha characters) in the Barcode Suffix box.
d.
Enter the starting barcode number in the Starting # box.
e.
Click Add to add the new barcode template.
f.
To add another barcode template, repeat these steps.
Configuration
9 Management
This section details the VLS management procedures such as changing the account passwords,
managing high availability, and saving configuration settings.
Changing the Account Passwords
To change the administrator and/or user account password, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis from the navigation tree.
3.
Click Edit Accounts under Maintenance Tasks. The Edit Accounts window opens.
4.
Enter the current password in the Old Password box. The password is case sensitive.
5.
Enter a new password in the New Password box.
6.
Enter the new password again in the Retype New Password box.
7.
Click Apply Settings.
Command View VLS restarts automatically.
NOTE:
You can change the user or administrator account password separately, or change both at
the same time.
NOTE:
The password can also be changed from the VLS CLI. See “CLI Management commands” on page 209.
Managing Cartridges
You can change the following parameters for existing cartridges from the Cartridge Parameters
window:
• Library with which they are associated
• Capacity
• Write access
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
171
Unloading a Cartridge from a Drive
If a tape becomes stuck in a drive and cannot be removed using the backup application, unload the
tape using Command View VLS:
1.
Select the tape drive from the navigation tree
2.
From the task bar, select Force Unload.
This will return the tape to its original slot.
NOTE:
Upon reboot of the VLS or restart emulations, all cartridges that were in drives will NOT be returned
to their original slots. They will be loaded back into the drives. Use Force Unload to return them to
their original slots if needed.
Freeing up Storage Space
Storage space can be freed up by erasing the data on or destroying virtual media that is no longer
used, such as:
• Cartridges that are no longer used by a backup application
• Cartridges that have been moved to the Firesafe that are no longer needed
Use the backup application to erase data on virtual media that is no longer used.
Destroy virtual media that is no longer needed using Command View VLS. See “Destroying
Cartridges” on page 168.
NOTE:
Reducing the size of the cartridges in a virtual library will not free up disk space. Storage space is
dynamically assigned by the VLS as it is used. It is not reserved.
Restarting VLS Device Emulations
Restart VLS device emulations:
• If the VLS locks up
• After destroying a virtual device (library or tape drive) on the VLS and doing so leaves a gap in
the virtual device LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host port
• After adding a virtual tape drive and the default LUN number assigned to it is not consecutive with
the other virtual tape drives in the same library
172
Management
CAUTION:
Restarting VLS device emulations changes the default virtual device LUN numbers if there is a gap in
the LUN numbering, or if there is a tape drive whose LUN number is not consecutive with the other
tape drives in the same library. The firmware changes the LUN numbers as necessary to remove the
gap or to make the virtual tape drive LUN numbers consecutive in each library, so that the virtual
device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements. When this occurs, on each
host:
• Rescan the SAN with the operating system for hardware changes.
• Rescan for new devices with the backup application and update the backup application device
files.
CAUTION:
Restarting VLS device emulations places the VLS cartridges back into the same library slots and tape
drives they were in at the time of reboot/restart. To move the cartridges from tape drives back into
the appropriate slots, use Force Unload from the task bar visible when you select the tape drive from
the navigation tree.
To restart the VLS device emulations, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select System Maintenance under Maintenance Tasks.
4.
Select Restart Emulations in the task bar. The Restart Emulations window opens.
5.
Click Restart Emulations to confirm.
Updating the Firmware
CAUTION:
The VLS restarts automatically when you install a firmware update.
To update the VLS firmware:
1.
Obtain the VLS firmware update zip file from HP.
2.
Verify the file integrity of the downloaded file. See the firmware release notes for details.
3.
In Command View VLS, click the System tab.
4.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
5.
Select Software Update under Maintenance Tasks. The Software Update window opens.
6.
Select Browse.
7.
Select the zipped firmware upgrade file.
8.
Select Next Step. The window displays information about the upgrade.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
173
9.
Select Next Step to continue. The EULA displays.
10. Select Accept and Install to continue.
The screen displays a message that the upgrade was successfully installed and reboots
automatically. The reboot may take several minutes.
Saving Configuration Settings
NOTE:
The VLS firmware ensures a persistent VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs, so that
in the event of any hardware failure and replacement (such as the system board or Fibre Channel
host bus adapter card), the VLS still appears exactly the same to the external SAN. It does this by
generating a VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs at first boot, which are based on
the system board's MAC address. The VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs are saved
on the VLS hard drives and with the virtual library configuration settings in the configuration file.
HP highly recommends that you save your virtual library configuration and the VLS network settings
to an external configuration file, so they can be restored in the event of a disaster.
To save your virtual library configuration and the VLS network settings to an external configuration
file, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Select Save Config under Maintenance Tasks. The Save Configuration window opens.
4.
Right-click Download Configuration Files.
5.
Select Save Target As.
A zip file is displayed in the File name box.
6.
Click Save, wait for the file to finish downloading, and then click Close. The Save Configuration
window re-opens.
7.
Click Finish.
NOTE:
Optionally, you can set the device to automatically save and E-mail the configuration file at midnight
after the configuration is modified. See “Edit the Email Settings” on page 178.
174
Management
10 Monitoring
This section describes the various tools you can use to monitor the status of the VLS hardware and
virtual devices (libraries and tape drives) and how to use them.
Status Information in the Status Pane
Status information for the VLS hardware components and virtual devices is displayed in Command
View VLS on the status pane when an individual hardware component or virtual device is selected in
the navigation tree.
The device status possibilities are:
• Good— The component, part of the component, or the virtual device is operating normally.
• Degraded—The component, or one or more parts of the component, has failed or is operating
outside of its normal range but is still operational.
• Critical —The component, or one or more parts of the component, has failed or exceeded its limits.
Although it is still operational, VLS failure is imminent.
• Failed—The component, or one or more parts of the component, has failed and the VLS is inoperable. Immediate service is needed.
• Missing —The VLS cannot detect the component or a part of the component.
In addition to the device status, a red or yellow alert bar will highlight specific parts of a component
when that particular element within the component has failed (red) or is operating outside its normal
range (yellow).
To view the status information for a VLS hardware component or virtual device, from Command View
VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Click the object in the navigation tree that represents the hardware component or virtual device
that you want to view.
The status information for the object selected, and its subobjects in the navigation tree, is displayed
in the status pane.
Status Icons
The current overall status of the VLS is displayed on Command View VLS as an icon in the status
banner. In addition, components or parts of a component whose condition is not Good are marked
with the corresponding icon in the navigation tree.
Device Status Icon
The device status icon in the Command View VLS status banner indicates the overall VLS device health.
The device status icon is displayed in the status banner regardless of the tab selected.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
175
NOTE:
On the Automigration/Replication tab, the status icon represents the health of the destination libraries,
not the overall VLS device health. See “Destination library status icons” on page 316.
If multiple system health conditions exist simultaneously (for example, two components are experiencing
problems and have a status of warning and error, respectively), the icon representing the most serious
status is displayed in the status banner.
Figure 64 Device status icon in the status banner
.
A device status icon can be one of four states:
Unknown—A component's operating condition is unknown. Contact HP Technical Support.
Normal—All components within the VLS are operating normally.
Warning—A component's operating condition has degraded.
Error—A component has failed.
Navigation Tree Icon
An
icon appears just to the left of objects in the navigation tree when an unknown, warning, or
error condition is present with a component. It also appears just to the left of the parent objects of
that component. For example, if the icon is displayed by Fibre Channel in the navigation tree, it will
also be displayed by its parent objects (for example: Node 0, Nodes, and Chassis).
Figure 65 Navigation tree icon
.
Notification Alerts
If a VLS hardware component or an environmental condition degrades or fails, the VLS generates a
notification alert. Notification alerts are displayed on Command View VLS in the notification pane
and on the Notification tab. Click the View Details link to view the details of a notification alert.
Notification alerts are also e-mailed to the addresses you specify and sent as SNMP traps to the
management consoles you specify.
176
Monitoring
Figure 66 Notification alert examples
.
A notification alert can be one of four states:
Unknown—The operating condition of the component or component part is unknown. Contact HP
Technical Support.
Info—The component or component part's operating condition has improved to good (OK).
Warning—The component or component part's operating condition has degraded.
Error—The component or component part has failed.
Command View VLS
To view the current and historical notification alerts for all the VLS hardware components:
1.
Click the Notifications tab. The Notifications window displays.
2.
Click the View Details link for a notification alert to view more information about the notification
alert.
To view the notification alerts for a specific VLS hardware component:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select the object in the navigation tree that represents the hardware component that you want
to view.
The notification alerts relevant to the object selected and its subobjects in the navigation tree are
listed in the notifications pane.
3.
Click the View Details link for a notification alert to view more information about that notification
alert.
To delete notification alerts:
1.
Click the Notifications tab. The Notifications window displays.
2.
Select the boxes next to the notification alerts that you want to delete.
3.
Click Delete Selected.
The notification alerts are deleted from the Notification window and can no longer be viewed.
E-mail Notification
To receive VLS notification alerts by e-mail, you must edit the e-mail server settings and then edit the
e-mail settings.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
177
Editing the Email Server Settings
NOTE:
You must enter the email server settings before editing the email settings.
To edit the email server settings, from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the Notifications tab. The Notifications window displays.
2.
Select Edit Mail Server Settings in the task bar. The Edit Mail Server Settings window opens.
3.
To add a mail server:
4.
a.
Enter the domain name for a mail server with an SMTP gateway that will process mail from
the VLS in the Outgoing Mail Server box.
b.
If you want to change the From address, which defaults to [email protected]<device
name>, type the preferred address in the Sender Email Address box.
c.
Click Add.
d.
To add another email server, repeat these steps.
To delete an email server from the list, click the Remove button for the email server.
Edit the Email Settings
Email notification is sent to the persons you include on the email distribution list in the email settings.
You specify the email notification alert severity and format settings for each person on the distribution
list.
To create an email distribution list for notification alerts, add an email address to the list, or remove
an email address from the list:
1.
Log in to Command View VLS as the administrator. See “Opening a Command View VLS Session
from a Web Browser” on page 135.
2.
Click the Notifications tab.
The Notifications window displays.
178
Monitoring
3.
Click Edit Email Settings in the task bar.
The Edit Email Settings window opens (Figure 67).
Figure 67 Edit Email Settings window
.
4.
To add an email address:
a.
Enter an email address in the Email Address box.
b.
Select the type of notification alerts to send in the Alerts box.
c.
• All—Sends all notifications
• Errors—Sends only errors
• Warnings—Sends only warnings
• None—Sends no notifications
Select a notification alert format in the Format box.
•
•
•
•
d.
Short—Sends short mail messages
Long—Sends detailed mail messages
Long + Attachment—Sends detailed mail messages and relevant log files
Configuration—Saves the VLS configuration and emails it at midnight after any configuration change.
Click Add.
e.
To add another email address, repeat these steps.
5.
To delete an email address, click the Remove button for the email address.
6.
To test an email address entry, click Test Email.
If the test message is not received at the email address, check the email server settings.
SNMP Notification
To receive VLS notification alerts on a management consoles, you must edit the SNMP settings to
specify the management consoles you want to receive VLS SNMP traps.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
179
Editing the SNMP Settings
NOTE:
To display VLS notification alerts on a management console, the management console must be running
HP Systems Insight Manager, and be configured to receive SNMP traps from the VLS.
To add a management consoles to the SNMP alert distribution list from Command View VLS:
1.
Click the Notifications tab.
The Notifications window displays.
2.
Click Edit SNMP Setting in the task bar.
The Edit SNMP Settings window opens (Figure 68).
Figure 68 Edit SNMP Settings window
.
3.
To add management consoles:
a.
Enter the host name of a management console that you want to receive VLS SNMP traps in
the Hostname box.
b.
Enter the string name that is passed with the set to get commands from the management
console in the Community String box.
This value is typically set to Public.
c.
Select the appropriate trap version for the management application that will receive the
SNMP traps in the Trap Version box.
Select 1 for the trap version if your management application is HP Systems Insight Manager.
d.
Click Add.
e.
To add another management console, repeat these steps.
You can add up to 8 management consoles.
4.
180
To delete a management console from the list, click the Remove button for the management
console.
Monitoring
SMI-S Support
SMI-S support allows applications attached to the VLS to detect the virtual library configuration and
to allow some users to change the state of the VLS.
To protect access to the VLS via the SMI-S agent, and to allow a higher level of security for the device,
there are two access categories:
• Read-only access allows you to view SMI-S objects but not change them. This is used by 3rd party
monitoring products, ISEE, and other components that need visibilty but not control of the VLS
configuration.
• Read and write access allows complete control of the device including the ability to reboot, move
tapes, change port map settings, etc.
CAUTION:
Because of its destructive potential, this functionality should be strictly controlled.
To disable an SMI-S user:
1.
From the Notifications tab task bar, select Get SMI-S users.
The SMI-S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users.
2.
Under the user's name, select disable.
The SMIS-Users screen refreshes and displays the message, “The [Read Write or Read Only]
User was successfully disabled.” The disable button for that user is replaced by the enable button.
To enable a user:
1.
From the Notifications tab task bar, select Get SMI-S users.
The SMI-S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users.
2.
Under the user's name, select enable.
The SMIS-Users screen refreshes and displays the message, “The [Read Write or Read Only]
User was successfully enabled.” The enable button for that user is replaced by the disable button.
To change a user's password:
1.
From the Notifications tab task bar, select Get SMI-S users.
The SMI-S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users.
2.
Under the appropriate user's name, select change password.
The change password screen displays.
3.
Enter the new password for the user in both fields.
4.
Select Submit.
The SMIS-Users screen refreshes and displays the message, “The [Read Write or Read Only]
User's password was successfully changed.”
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
181
NOTE:
Viewing and managing users with SMI-S access is the only SMI-S-associated functionality on the VLS
itself. The benefits of SMI-S are evident on applications attached to the VLS.
Trace Log Files
You can view the current diagnostic VLS trace log files for troubleshooting purposes. You can also
save one or more of the trace log files to external text files, or to a single zip file to create a support
ticket.
Viewing Trace Log Files
You can view the current diagnostic VLS trace log files. From Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Click Log Viewer under Maintenance Tasks.
The Log Viewer window opens.
4.
Click the trace log file that you want to view.
The contents of the trace log file opens.
Saving a Trace Log File
You can save a trace log file to an external file. From Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Click Log Viewer under Maintenance Tasks.
The Log Viewer window opens.
4.
Right-click the trace log file from the list and select Save Target As.
5.
Enter a name for the file and click Save.
Creating a Support Ticket
You can save all the current diagnostic VLS trace log files to a single zipped file to create a support
ticket. From Command View VLS:
1.
Click the System tab.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree.
3.
Click Support Ticket under Maintenance Tasks.
The Support Ticket window opens.
4.
182
Right-click Download Support Ticket package.
Monitoring
5.
Select Save Target As.
The name of a zip file is displayed in the File name box.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Click Close.
8.
Click Finish.
NOTE:
Some versions of Internet Explorer will not download support tickets with a file size greater than 2
GB. VLS systems that are large or have been running a long time may generate larger support tickets.
If you try to create a support ticket in Internet Explorer and it displays a blank page, use another
browser such as Firefox. Firefox will download larger support tickets but may have a delay of several
minutes before allowing you to save the file.
Performance and Storage Use Reports
You can customize and view current status, performance, and storage use reports for the entire VLS,
for individual nodes, and for selected devices in Command View VLS. You can also view information
on the overall health of the SAN.
You can generate and display the reports online, or export the report data in a comma-separated
values (CSV) file-format; see Exporting CSV Data. You can also set up automated reports that the
system emails to you on a regular basis; see “Receiving Automated Reports” on page 190.
To view and configure VLS performance, storage use, and SAN health reports:
1.
From the System tab, select Chassis at the top of the navigation tree.
2.
From the Tasks displayed at the top of the main window, select Reporting. The reporting tabs
open to Performance History by default.
Exporting CSV Data
Many of the reports allow you to export the data in a comma-separated values (CSV) file-format.
Determine the information you want exported and select the Export (or similar) button. The File
Download window opens for you to indicate where to save the file.
The CSV export file is a text file delivered as a .zip. Each line is the record for one device, and the
data fields are separated by commas or columns depending on the program used to view the file.
Configuring Performance Reports and Notifications
On the Configuration tab, you can assign default settings for reports and notifications. At any time,
you can change any of these default settings.
Current Status Tab
For the Current Status tab, you can customize the default refresh time for the display.
You can also create a pre-defined custom view based on the devices you choose. At the bottom of
the Configuration tab:
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
183
1.
Select a device category.
2.
Select the specific devices of interest from the Available Devices box.
3.
Using the >> button, move the devices of interest into the Selected Devices box. These are the
devices that will display in the report. You can use << button to remove devices from the Selected
Devices box.
4.
Select another device category and repeat steps 2 and 3.
5.
Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field.
6.
Select Create View.
This view is now available as a selection in the Pre-defined Views list on the Current Status and
Performance History tabs.
To edit an existing view, select it from the Update Existing View list, adjust the selected devices,
rename the view (if desired) in the name field, and select Update View. Select Delete View if you want
to remove that view from your Pre-defined options.
Performance History Tab
For the Performance History tab, you can customize:
• The default duration of the performance graphs to display
• The default duration of the CSV format export file
• The default name for the CSV format export file
You can also create a pre-defined custom view based on the devices you choose. See “Current Status
Tab” on page 183.
SAN Health Tab and Notifications
For the SAN Health tab, you can customize:
• The number of
is generated
• The number of
• The number of
• The number of
SRRs (Sequence Retransmission Requests) for an item above which a notification
SRRs for an item below which the item does not display in the report
Aborts for an item above which a notification is generated
Aborts for an item below which the item does not display in the report
Physical Capacity Notifications
You can determine when the system sends notifications related to the physical capacity. Set up
notifications for when the physical capacity exceeds a chosen percentage.
Logical Capacity Notifications
You can determine when the system sends notifications related to the logical capacity. Set up
notifications for when:
• The logical capacity usage exceeds a chosen percentage
• The system ratio falls below a chosen percentage
• The deduplication ratio falls below a chosen percentage
184
Monitoring
Current Status
The Current Status tab displays the overall performance and storage capacity information of the VLS
in gauges at the top of the page.
You can also select specific devices to display either the performance or the storage capacity used.
Show the performance of:
• All Nodes
• Pre-definied Views
Select one of the views from the list. You can create these views on the Configuration tab.
• Most Active (node, library, and tape drive)
Show the storage capacity (total and used) of:
•
•
•
•
All Storage Pools
All Virtual Libraries
Virtual Libraries per Storage Pool (displays a pie chart instead of a gauge)
Storage Pools per Virtual Library (displays a pie chart instead of a gauge)
Performance History
The Performance History tab displays a table of performance data for the selected nodes or devices
as designated in the Configuration tab.
To determine which devices display, select one of the following:
• Nodes
• Pre-define Views, and then select a view from the list
Determine the duration of the data reported in the graphs. Valid entries are whole numbers between
one and 15.
NOTE:
The longer the duration you select, or the more nodes or devices your system has, the longer it may
take to generate a report.
To export the CSV data, enter the number of days to include in the report and click Export. (See
“Exporting CSV Data” on page 183 for more information on exporting CSV data.) See Figure 69 for
an explanation of each field in a line of CSV data.
Figure 69 CSV data fields for VLS performance reports
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
185
Item
Data
1
Device name
2
Node number
3
Target/device ID
4
Ignore this field
5
Writes
6
Bytes written/read
7
Bytes written/read in last minute
8
Time stamp
9
Ignore this field
Logical Capacity
This tab displays different views of the current logical capacity usage for an individual library or the
entire VLS system. Logical capacity is the amount of data the backup application wrote, while the
physical capacity is the amount of data actually stored on the disk.
Select the Show Details link in the first section to display the breakdown of the logical and physical
capacity and the deduplication ratio. To export the deduplication CSV data, enter the number of days
to include in the report and select Export. (See “Exporting CSV Data” on page 183 for more information.)
To change the information displayed in the graphs:
1.
Select the date range to include in the report:
• Start date — the date you want as the starting point for stepping back into the past by some
number of days to establish a particular date range. This is effectively the end date of the
date range.
• Hour of the day — the hour of the day, in 24 hour time, to use in conjunction with the Start
date.
• Going back — the number of days to step back from the selected start date to establish a
date range.
For example, if you select June 20 at 10 going back 3 days, the graph will include data from
June 17 at 10:00 a.m. to June 20th at 10:00 a.m.
NOTE:
The greater the number of days included in the date range, the fewer the data points for
each day will display in the graphs. For example, for two days of data the graphs will show
one data point for every two hours, while for seven days of data the graphs will show one
data point for every seven hours.
186
Monitoring
2.
3.
4.
In some cases, there are more data points than the graphs can display. You must select how the
system chooses which data point to use for each time period displayed. For example, if you show
four days of data the graphs show one data point for every four-hour period. Use the Advanced
Setting list to indicate which data point out of that four-hour period is used:
• First data point — the first data point for each time period.
• Maximum data point — the data point with the highest value for each time period.
• Minimum data point — the data point with the lowest value for each time period.
Select a specific virtual library to view from the list, or use “VLS Device” to include all libraries
(Logical Capacity tab only).
Select Update Graphs. The graphs update to reflect the data options you chose.
NOTE:
The final graph displays the history of the logical capacity for the entire VLS and does not change if
you choose to view a specific library.
Physical Capacity
This tab displays different views of the physical capacity usage for an individual library or the entire
VLS system. Physical capacity is the amount of data actually stored on the disk, while the logical
capacity is the amount of data the backup application wrote. In a deduplicated environment, the
physical capacity reported represents data after compression and deduplication; without deduplication
it represents data after compression.
To export the physical capacity CSV data, enter the number of days to include in the report and select
Export. (See “Exporting CSV Data” on page 183 for more information.)
To change the information displayed in the graphs, follow Step 1, Step 2, and Step 4 in “Logical
Capacity” on page 186.
The final two graphs allow you to view the physical capacity for a specific storage pool or library.
You can also change the graph type from stacked to line. Use the lists to make your selections and
then select Update Graphs.
SAN Health
The SAN Health tab displays information on the number and types of errors encountered on the SAN.
See Figure 70 on page 188.
To export the CSV data, in the Export Data section of the screen enter the number of days to include
in the report and click Export.
When you open the SAN Health tab, the graph at the bottom of the screen displays information for
the top 16 locations from all location categories with the most errors. You can change the information
displayed in the graph:
1.
Select a location category.
2.
Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box.
3.
Using the >> button, move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations box. These are the
locations that will display in the report. You can use the << button to remove locations from the
Selected Locations box.
4.
Select another location category and repeat steps 2 and 3.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
187
5.
Select Update Graph. The graph updates to reflect the information you chose.
You can also create a pre-defined custom view based on the locations you choose:
1.
Follow steps 1 through 4 above.
2.
Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field.
3.
Select Create View.
This view is now available as a selection in the Update Existing View list.
To edit an existing view, select it from the Update Existing View list, adjust the selected locations,
rename the view (if desired) in the name field, and select Update View. Select Delete View if you want
to remove that view from your Pre-defined options.
To see the graph for a particular pre-defined view, select it from the Update Existing View list. The
graph immediately updates to the data for that view.
To further refine a report, you can change the number of days reflected in the graph and the type of
error to include in the display. Enter the information for either or both of these options and select
Update Graph. The graph applies those boundaries to the data for the previously selected locations
or pre-defined view.
Figure 70 SAN Health tab
.
188
Monitoring
Workload Assessment
The Workload Assessment tab features a workload assessment simulation to ensure that a planned
new backup will “fit” on the system with the existing backups before actually running the backup. The
simulation tests the physical capacity and logical capacity thresholds; it also tests the Fibre Channel
performance for each day of the week that runs an existing backup.
In addition, you can quickly see whether or not a particular library has notification alerts enabled
and the alert threshold values. A threshold is a percentage or ratio value that when reached triggers
the system to send a notification. For example, if you set the critical notification for the logical capacity
to 90, the system will send a critical notification when the logical capacity exceeds 90% used. You
can edit the notification alerts for specific libraries and for the entire VLS system on this screen. See
“Editing the Notification Alerts” on page 190.
Running a Workload Assessment Simulation
1.
Select the library of interest.
2.
Select Assess Workload.
3.
On the pop-up window, select OK to use a template or Cancel to enter all of the criteria values.
4.
If you opted to use a template, select the template and then select Run Simulation. If you opted
not to use a template, enter the criteria values and then select Run Simulation.
You can add, edit, and delete templates; see Using the Workload Assessment Templates.
5.
Enter the size of the full backup in GB at the top of the screen.
6.
Select Run Simulation.
Scroll to the bottom of the screen, if necessary, to view the simulation results. Each tested threshold
receives either a green (threshold is fine) or red (threshold is exceeded) icon.
Using the Workload Assessment Templates
Deleting a workload assessment template:
1.
Select the template from the template summary screen.
2.
Select Delete Template. The template is removed from the template summary list.
Adding a new workload assessment template:
1.
Select Add New Template.
2.
Enter the template name and all other values.
3.
For each day of the week, select the backup type and the start time and duration in 24–hour
time.
4.
Select Create Template. The screen displays the template summary list which now includes the
one you just created.
Editing a workload assessment template:
1.
Select the template from the template summary screen.
2.
Select Edit Template.
3.
Change the values as necessary.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
189
4.
Select Update. The screen returns to the template summary list.
Editing the Notification Alerts
To edit the notification alerts for libraries, the VLS system, and storage pools:
1.
Select the VLS, or the library or storage pool of interest.
2.
Select Edit Thresholds (libraries and VLS) or Edit Pool Configuration (storage pools). The screen
lists the available notification alerts with default or previously set threshold values.
3.
Check the top box to enable notification alerts (or uncheck it to disable alerts).
4.
Enter the hour of the day for the system to send notifications in 24–hour time. For example, a
value of 14 means 2:00 p.m.
5.
Change the remaining values where necessary. Some values are a ratio, while others are a
percentage. You can set both critical and warning notifications for:
6.
• System ratio — the logical data to used capacity
• Deduplication ratio — the logical size to physical size
• Logical capacity usage — the total amount of data written by the backup application
• Replication traffic — the total replication data transferring across the LAN/WAN
• Physical capacity usage — the total physical disk space used
• Performance of the library — the overall performance of the library
Select Submit. The screen indicates that the notification alerts have been set.
7.
Select Back to return to the Workload Assessment screen.
Replication History
This tab displays two views of the replication usage for the VLS system. The first graph shows the
actual traffic; the y-axis displays the usage in MB and the x-axis displays the day of the month (dd)
and time of day (hh) data points. The second graph shows the replication ratio (logical size of the
backup to amount of data replicated) for each day/time data point.
To export the replication traffic CSV data, enter the number of days to include in the report and select
Export. (See “Exporting CSV Data” on page 183 for more information.)
To change the information displayed in the graphs:
1.
Follow Step 1 in “Logical Capacity” on page 186.
2.
Select a specific virtual library to view from the list, or use “This Device” to include all libraries.
3.
Select Update Graphs. The graphs update to reflect the data options you chose.
Receiving Automated Reports
You can receive automated reports on a regular basis via email. To set up the automated reports:
1.
In the GUI of the target VLS, select the Notifications tab.
2.
In the task bar, select Report Setup.
3.
Enter the email address to receive the reports.
190
Monitoring
4.
Select the type of report you want to receive:
• System Capacity — includes the initially available physical capacity, the capacity consumed,
and the remaining capacity.
• Backup Summary — includes the type of backup, the status, the before deduplication and
after deduplication data size in GB, the amount of space saved by deduplication, and the
amount of data unprocessed for all backup jobs in process or the queue at the time of the
report.
• Policy-Cartridge Summary — includes the cartridges involved in the policy of the backup
application, the type of backup, the status, the before deduplication and after deduplication
data size in GB, the amount of space saved by deduplication, and the amount of data unprocessed for all backup jobs in process or the queue at the time of the report.
• Cartridge Utilization Report — lists the capacity used by each cartridge and includes the
barcode, disk space usage in bytes, deduplication status, and dependent cartridges (if any).
This report assists you in identifying cartridges that are consuming more storage space that
you can expired to free up storage space.
• Replication Job History — includes start and end times, data transfer time, source and target
locations, and the job completion status for each job in process or in the job queue at the
time the report was generated.
• Performance History — includes performance data for all the applicable devices for each
day in the reporting period. See “Performance History” on page 185 for a description of the
CSV fields.
• SAN Health History — includes information on the errors encountered on all the locations in
the SAN including the number of service retry requests (SRR) and aborts.
• Replication Data for ISV Import — sends an hourly email report listing which virtual cartridges
have been successfully replicated in the last hour. Feed this cartridge list into a script that
automatically triggers tape import jobs in the backup application (which read the new cartridge
data and import this content into the media database). The target backup application can
then restore from the imported virtual cartridges or copy them to physical tape, etc.
The report fields are defined as:
ISV~<virtual cartridge barcode>~<virtual library serial number>~<virtual library slot number>
See the HP StorageWorks VLS and D2D solutions guide for import example scripts.
5.
• Physical Capacity Usage — includes the total physical capacity and the physical capacity
used by individual libraries and storage pools.
• Logical Capacity Usage — includes the total logical capacity and the logical capacity used
by individual libraries.
• Replication Traffic — shows the total amount of replication data transferring across the
LAN/WAN.
Select the report format you prefer. Some reports only use CVS format, while some include HTML
as an option.
6.
Select the frequency of the automated report. The options are one-time (as of the moment you
add the report), hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly.
7.
The Time, Day of Week, and Day of Month lists appear based on the frequency you selected.
For example, if you select Weekly, you can then set the Time and Day of Week you want the
reports to run.
8.
Select Add. The system will run the report and email it to you at the next opportunity based on
your settings.
9.
Repeat the steps above to receive multiple reports.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
191
Stress Testing Hard Disks
Systems running some VLS firmware versions can stress test physical storage to ensure the integrity of
the hard disks using the Storage Exerciser tool. The Storage Exerciser provides two types of test jobs:
• Background — enables a user to initiate a low resource test job that continually writes and reads
a small amount of data at regular intervals.
• Read-only — reads and decompresses all data currently residing on the VLS by opening each
non-empty, non-hidden cartridge. All data is decompressed but not copied to any other location
or made available to any other device.
To run a Background or Read-only job using the Storage Exerciser:
1.
Log into Command View VLS.
2.
Select the System tab.
3.
From the navigation tree, select Chassis.
4.
From the task bar, select Storage Exerciser. A caution screen indicates that running a job will
affect your system's overall performance.
5.
Select Accept. The Storage Exerciser opens to the Configuration tab.
NOTE:
Storage Exerciser jobs will slow down other VLS operations. Do not start a job when the performance
of other VLS operations is critical.
NOTE:
All jobs are run from the master node.
Storage Exerciser jobs only test the physical storage; they do not test load balancing or stress multiple
nodes with multiple streams.
Configuring the Storage Exerciser
In the Configuration tab, you can assign default settings for reports.
To customize the Storage Exerciser:
192
Monitoring
1.
Choose an option or enter the information into the fields:
• Storage Pool — the storage pool targeted in tests (All or one specific storage pool).
• Compression Ratio — the compressibility ratio for data written during a Background job. For
instance, if 2:1 is selected, the data created will be compressible at 2:1 and decompressed
when read back. This exercises the disks more thoroughly than without compression. A compressibility ratio of at least 2:1 is recommended.
• Number of Concurrent Streams — the number of streams (up to six) running read or write
operations at the same time. The larger the number, the more the storage system is stressed.
NOTE:
A Background job can only involve one stream unless multiple storage pools are present.
2.
• Notification — the notifications displayed on the Notifications tab. Choose to generate notifications per time period (in hours and minutes) or per number of job iterations. The notifications
provide links to detailed information about the jobs performed. (This configuration option is
only available for some VLS firmware versions.)
Click Save as Default. The Storage Exerciser uses this information throughout the operation.
If you encounter problems with the Storage Exerciser, select Restart Storage Exerciser Service from
the task bar. All jobs currently in progress will stop and report a status of Complete.
Storage Exerciser CLI Commands
If you have root access to the VLS, you can configure the jobs at the command line. You can also
retrieve reports from /var/log/hp/exerciser/exericser_report.log; see “Log File
Fields” on page 195 for an explanation of the report fields.
The command options are start, stop, and status.
Examples:
/S2100/hp/exerciser/secl start -t readonly -p all -s 3
/S2100/hp/exerciser/secl start -t background -p 1 -s 4 -c 3 -D 10 -T 01:30
/S2100/hp/exerciser/secl stop -t readonly
/S2100/hp/exerciser/secl status -t readonly
Where:
-t
test type: readonly or background
-p
storage pools: all or use the number of the individual storage pool
-s
concurrent streams: 1 to 6 (the default is 1)
-c
compressibility: 1 to 4; 1=1:1, 2=2:1, 3=3:1, 4=4:1. Only applicable to a Background test.
-D
data limit in GB. Only applicable to a Background test.
-T
time limit: HH:MM. Only applicable to a Background test.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
193
Starting and Reviewing Read-only Jobs
The Read-only Job tab displays information for all previous and current Read-only jobs. The Storage
Pool and Number of Concurrent Streams fields contain the default information entered in the
Configuration tab.
To begin a Read-only job, select Start. The job appears in the status table. Select Cancel in the
appropriate row to cancel a Read-only job.
The status table displays:
•
•
•
•
•
Start Time — the date and time the job began.
End Time — the date and time the job ended.
Total Number of Cartridges — the number of cartridges the job will read.
Cartridges Read — the number of cartridges read so far.
Cartridge Read Errors — the number of read operations that failed. If the value in this column is
red, select it to view a detailed list of the failed operations.
• Data Read — the amount of data in bytes read so far.
• Status — the state of the jobs can be In Progress, Cancelling, Cancelled, Complete, or Complete
with Errors.
The Complete with Errors status signifies that one or more read operations failed; this may mean
the job uncovered a disk error. If a disk error has occurred, the “Log Monitor Summary” on page
195 on the Background Job tab displays a sum of errors and presents a link to view error detail
and drive recommendations.
• % Complete — the percentage of cartridges read so far.
To delete jobs from the status table, check the jobs in the Select column, and then select Delete Selected.
Starting and Reviewing Background Jobs
The Background Job tab displays information for all previous and current Background jobs. The
Storage Pool and Compressibility Ratio fields contain the default information entered in the
Configuration tab.
To begin a Background job:
1.
If you want the job to stop after a particular time period, enter the test duration in the appropriate
field. Otherwise, leave the Unlimited box checked to allow the test to run indefinitely.
2.
If you want to restrict the maximum amount of data the job will write, enter the amount in GB in
the appropriate field. Otherwise, leave the Unlimited box checked to allow it to write any amount
of data.
3.
Select Start. The job appears in the status table and will run, reading and writing data
continuously, until the job duration is complete (if you added one) or until you cancel the job.
Select Cancel in the appropriate row to cancel a Background job.
194
Monitoring
NOTE:
During a job, one cartridge per storage pool involved in the job is created to support the background
process. This cartridge can be found under the VLS cartridge list prefixed with “StorageExerciser_.”
You can only start one Background job at a time.
You must have at least 5 GB of free space on your VLS in order to run a Background job. If less than
5 GB is available, the Background job will fail.
The status table displays:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Time — the date and time the job began.
End Time — the date and time the job ended.
Current Iteration — the number of the current iteration of the read/write process.
Failed Iterations — the number of iterations that failed due to decompression error or other error.
Data Written — the amount of data in bytes that has been written for all iterations combined.
Data Read — the amount of data in bytes that has been read for all iterations combined.
Status — the state of the jobs can be In Progress, Cancelling, Cancelled, Complete, or Complete
with Errors.
The Complete with Errors status signifies that one or more read operations failed; this may mean
the job uncovered a disk error. If a disk error has occurred, view the Log Monitor Summary.
To delete jobs from the status table, check the jobs in the Select column, and then select Delete Selected.
Log Monitor Summary
The Log Monitor Summary displays decompression error details. You may sort the table by selecting
a column header. You may delete errors by selecting the rows and then selecting Delete Selected.
When enclosure and/or IP address calculations are pending, select Refresh to refresh the information
in the table. Refresh Array Info updates cached array information on the server. Use this if you make
architectural changes such as adding arrays to the VLS.
The log monitor table displays:
• Time — the date and time the decompression error was logged in the system log.
• SDev Number — the Set Device number logged in the decompression error.
• LBA — Logical Block Address, representing the hex value of the logical location of the error in the
RAID set.
• Offset — the distance in Hex from the beginning of the LBA, to the occurrence of the decompression
error.
• Length — the length in Hex of the decompression error.
Log File Fields
The log file is a comma-separated values (CSV) file-format. The data fields are separated by commas
or columns depending on the program used to view the file.
Test summaries are logged at the beginning and end of a test. The data fields are in order as follows:
• Test_summary — indicates that this row of data is the test summary information
• Test summary ID
• Date of the test
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
195
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Test type — Background or Read-only
Storage pools — All or the number of the storage pool tested
Test start time
Test end time
Current job count
Total job count
Total amount of data written during the test
Total amount of data read during the test
Total number of successful jobs
Total number of failed jobs
Status of the test
Decompression errors will be logged once per occurrence. The data fields are in order as follows.
See “Log Monitor Summary” on page 195 for descriptions not defined here:
• Decompression_error — indicates that this row of data is the decompression information.
• Decompression error ID
• Time the error occurred
•
•
•
•
•
sDev Number
LBA
Offset
Length
UUID
Jobs are only logged in event of a job failure. The data fields are in order as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Job — indicates that this row of data is the job information
Job ID
Date of the test
Generated job key
Test start time
Time of last update to the job
Test end time
Number of the storage pool tested
Total amount of data written during the test at this point
Direction — read or write
Result — success or fail
Message, if any, associated with the failed job
External connect error, if any
Source barcode of the job
Target barcode of the job
Clearing the Hardware Compression Faults
If the VLS node is showing a hardware compression status that you think is incorrect, or if you want
to verify the status shown, you can force a rescan of the node.
From Command View VLS:
1.
196
On the System tab, expand Chassis in the navigation tree.
Monitoring
2.
Expand Nodes.
3.
Select the node of interest in the navigation tree.
4.
On the task bar, select Clear Faults.
5.
The screen refreshes and the correct status is displayed. (If the status does not change, it was
already correct.) Any incorrect fault notifications are cleared from the Notifications tab.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
197
198
Monitoring
11 CLI Command Set
This section describes the VLS command-line interface (CLI) command set. The CLI command allows
you to remotely configure, manage, and monitor the VLS over the LAN using a secure shell session.
It also allows you to locally configure, manage, and monitor the VLS through the serial connection.
Commands
There are two types of CLI commands:
• CLI-only commands
Commands that are processed by the CLI and affect only the CLI.
• VLS commands
Commands that are passed to the VLS to configure, manage, and monitor the VLS.
Conventions
All command arguments are case-sensitive and optional. They can be specified in any order. There
are several option tags associated with a command. The following conventions are used in this section
to identify option tags and arguments:
• An option tag is preceded by a -.
• The argument is separated from the option tag by a space.
• If an argument contains a space, it must be enclosed by either two single quotes or two double
quotes.
• If there is no argument after an option tag, the option is a switch.
• An * after an argument means the argument (including its option tag) can be repeated.
• A | between a compound argument means one or the other argument.
CLI-only Commands
This section describes the CLI-only commands in the VLS CLI command set.
Connection Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI connection commands to establish or close a VLS secure shell or serial
user interface session.
Table 6 CLI connection commands
Command
Description
bye | done | exit
| logout | quit
Terminates the CLI session.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
199
Command
Description
close
Closes the connection to the VLS.
getHost
Displays the fully qualified name of the VLS and its IP address.
Connects to a host. Where <-tag> can be:
-a<s> - Host name (localhost is default) (optional)
connect
-p<s> - Password (optional)
-u<s> - userid (optional)
Output Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI output commands to control the output and display help information for
the CLI commands.
Table 7 CLI output commands
Command
Description
trace
Displays the stack trace after an exception has occurred.
verbose
Toggles verbose output on and off. When on, all messages are output to the screen.
version
Indicates current CLI version. If verbose is on, the module revisions display also.
Displays CLI command usage information. Where <-tag> can be:
-c<command> - Provides help information for the specified CLI command.
help
-all - Lists all CLI commands and their help information.
Enables VLS logging. Where the options are:
enableVlsLog
-d<n> - Debug level (1 to 9) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Disables VLS logging. Where the options are:
disableVlsLog
-d<n> - Debug level (1 to 1) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
VLS Commands
This section describes the VLS commands in the VLS CLI command set.
Network Settings Configuration Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI network settings configuration commands to configure the VLS network
settings via a serial session. See “Opening a Serial Session” on page 139.
Changing the network configuration parameters modifies four system files:
/etc/hosts
/etc/sysconfig/network
200
CLI Command Set
/etc/resolv.conf
/etc/sysconfig/network-scrips/ifcfg-eth1
Table 8 CLI network settings configuration commands
Command
Description
showConfig
Lists host name, DNS domain name, DNS address, and various other addresses.
This command shows both the current internal values, as well as the original values.
It also lists the current and new content of all files affected by the changes.
Sets the value of the corresponding configuration parameter. To reset a value,
enter “ “ (quoted space) as the value. More than one tag and value can be set at
a time. Where <-tag> can be:
-host - Host name (such as vlsexamp) (unqualified)
-domain - DNS domain name (such as xyz.com)
-fullhost - Fully qualified name (such as vlsexamp.xyz.com)
—ntpPrimary - First NTP Server Address
setConfigValue
<-tag> [value]
—ntpSecondary - Second NTP Server Address
-dnsaddr - DNS server address (replaces all addresses with one line)
-dnsaddr1 - First DNS server address (cannot use with dnsaddr)
-dnsaddr2 - Second DNS server address (cannot use with dnsaddr)
-dhcp - Has no value, indicates you want to configure the public Ethernet
connection using DHCP (reset is -dhcp=false)
-ipaddr - IP address of public Ethernet connection
-gate - Gateway to network (xx.xx.xx.x)
-mask - Netmask. Defaults to 255.255.255.0
getDateTime
Displays the day, date, time, time zone, and year (such as Mon March 14
11:30:46 EST 2005).
Sets the date and time. Where the options are:
setDateTime
-d <”s”> - Date and time in yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm format (hh is 24 hour from 0)
(required). Example: setDateTime -d “2009-06-09 09:45:00”
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
commitConfig
Saves the system values changed using setConfigValue.
NOTE:
To reset a value to its default setting, set the option tag to " " (quoted space). For example:
fullhost=" "
The exception to this is the dhcp tag. DHCP is disabled by entering:
-dhcp=false
Any network configuration changes made using setConfigValue do not take effect until
“committed”, using the commitConfig command.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
201
Configuration Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI configuration commands to:
•
•
•
•
•
Edit the Fibre Channel host port settings
Enable oversubscription and view oversubscription settings
View LUN mapping
Create, view, and destroy virtual libraries, tape drives, or cartridges
Add, view, or remove barcode templates
Table 9 CLI configuration commands
Command
Usage 1
addNode
Add a node to the VLS. See getNodeNames.
discoverArray
Discovers any new arrays added to the VLS.
Changes the default FC host port connection settings. Where the options are:
-a <n> - ID number of node to modify (0, ...) (optional)
-i <n> - FC index (0, 1, ...) (required)
-l <n> - If attached in arbitrated loop mode, specifies a hard ALPA value between
0 and 125. A value of -1 specifies a dynamically assigned ALPA. If not attached
to an arbitrated loop, this parameter is ignored (required)
updateFC
-r <n> - Port number of the FC port to modify (required)
-s <n> - Preferred speed (0-Auto, 1-One GB, 2-Two GB, 4-Four GB, or 10-Ten
GB) (required)
-t <n> - Preferred topology (0-Auto, 1-Point to Point, 2-Loop, 3-Fabric, or 4-Public
Loop) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Enables or disables oversubscription and specifies the percent storage remaining
for notification. Where the options are:
setOverSubscription
-e <n> - Enable/disable oversubscription (0-Disabled or 1-Enabled) (required)
-p <n> - Percentage of capacity remaining for alert notification (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getOverSubscription
Returns whether the oversubscription feature is enabled or disabled and the capacity remaining percentage for notification alert. Oversubscription is enabled when
enabled = 0. Oversubscription is disabled when enabled = 1.
Returns a list of available library emulation types. Displays each library emulation's
name, type, product, revision, and vendor information. Where the options are:
getLibTypes
-l - List only licensed types (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
202
CLI Command Set
Command
Usage 1
Creates a new library with the specified maximum number of cartridge slots, input/export ports, and tape drives. Where the options are:
-a <n> - Node ID of the node on which the library emulation will reside (0, ...)
(required)
-l <n> - LUN number to assign to library (-1 to 128) (optional)
-n <n> - Maximum number of tape drives (required)
-p <s> - Product (spaces allowed) (MSL6000, ...) (required)
createLibrary
-pm <n> - FC port to which this library is mapped (0, 1, ...) (required)
-pt <n> - Maximum number of input/export ports (required)
-r <s> - Revision (0430, ...) (required)
-sl <n> - Maximum number of cartridge slots (required)
-t <s> - Library type name (required)
-v <s> - Vendor (HP, ...) (required)
-y <n> - Library type to emulate (2051, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getLibs
Returns a list of the libraries defined on the VLS.
Returns a summary of the specified library. Where the options are:
getLib
-a <s> - Name of library (Library_0, ....) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getLibOpenSlots
Returns a summary of the slot status for each defined library (open:used:total).
Deletes the specified library from the VLS. This operation takes several minutes to
perform. Where the options are:
-a <n> - Node number on which the library emulation resides (0, ...) (optional)
destroyLib
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility
(optional)
-l <n> - LUN number of the library to delete (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getTapeTypes
Returns a list of all tape drive emulation types available. Displays each tape drive
emulation's name, type, product, revision, and vendor information. Where the
options are:
-l - List only licensed types (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
203
Command
Usage 1
Creates the specified number of tape drives of a particular type and associates
them with the specified library. Where the options are:
-a <n> - Node ID of node on which the tape drive emulation will reside (0, ....)
(required)
-c <n> - Data compression (0=Disabled, 1=Enabled) (required)
-l <n> - LUN number to assign to tape drive (-1 to 128) (optional)
-la <n> - Node number on which the library emulation of the library to associate
with the tape drives resides (0 to 3) (required)
createTapeDrive
-ll <n> - LUN number of library with which to associate tape drive (0, 1, ...)
(required)
-n <n> - Number of tape drives (required)
-p <s> - Product (DLT7000, SDLT320, ...) (required)
-pm <n> - FC port to which this tape drive is mapped. (required)
-r <s> - Revision (R138, ...) (required)
-t <s> - Tape drive type name (required)
-v <s> - Vendor (Quantum, HP, ...) (required)
-y <n> - Tape drive type (3, 4, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns a list of all tape drives defined in the VLS. Where the options are:
getTapeDrives
-a <s> - Library name (Library_0, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns the configuration information for the specified tape drive. Where the options
are:
getTapeDrive
-a <s> - Name of desired tape drive (TapeDrive_1, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getTapeDriveStats
Returns the R/W statistics of the specified tape drives.
getAllTapeDriveStats
Returns the R/W statistics of all existing tape drives.
Deletes the specified tape drive from the VLS. Where the options are:
-a <n> - Node number on which the tape drive resides (0 to 3) (optional)
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility
(optional)
destroyTapeDrive
-l <n> - LUN number of the tape drive to delete (1, 2, ...) (required)
-la <n> - Number of the node on which the library emulation to which the tape
drive is associated resides (required)
-ll <n> - LUN number of the library associated with the tape drive to delete
(required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
204
CLI Command Set
Command
Usage 1
Creates a new barcode template. Where the options are:
-b <s> - Barcode prefix to use for the barcode (up to 5 alpha characters) upper
case and/or numeric (required)
-i <n> - Starting numeric value for the cartridges created with this template (1
to 1024) (required)
addBarCodes
-u <n> - Barcode suffix length. Number of digits for cartridge sequencing (1 to
16) (required)
-s <n> - Barcode suffix to use for the barcode upper case and/or numeric
(required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getBarCodes
Returns a list of all the barcode templates (and their settings) that have been
defined. Displays each barcode template's name, prefix, start index, and suffix
length.
Deletes the specified barcode template. Where the options are:
-a <s> - Barcode prefix (required)
deleteBarCode
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward
compatibility (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Gets cartridges by storage pool name. Where the options are:
getCartsBySP
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns a list of available cartridge emulation types. Displays each cartridge
emulation's name, type, and capacity information. Where the options are:
getCartTypes
-l - List only licensed types (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getCartTypesByTape
Returns a list of available cartridge emulation types for the tape drive specified.
Displays each cartridge emulation's name, type, and capacity information. Where
the options are:
-a <s> - Name of tape drive type (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
205
Command
Usage 1
Creates the specified number of cartridges with the specified barcode and associated with the specified library.
Note: If you specify more cartridges than slots defined for the library, this command
only creates enough cartridges for the slots available. That is, if your library has
100 slots and you specify 125 total cartridges, this command creates 100
cartridges. Likewise, if 50 cartridges were already created for this library, this
command would create only 50 more cartridges, even though 125 are specified
by the command.
Where the options are:
createCartridge
-a <s> - Cartridge name (DLT, ...) (required)
-b <s> - Barcode prefix (required)
-c <n> - Capacity in gigabytes (required)
-l <s> - Library name (Library_0, ...) (required)
-n <n> - Number of cartridges (required)
-ov <n> - Oversubscribe (0 or 1) (required)
-s <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-y <n> - Cartridge type (2, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns a list of the cartridges that have been created. All cartridges have both a
VLS filename (cartridge name) and a barcode label. This command returns the
following cartridge metadata:
• Storage pool the cartridge resides (SD_1_0)
• Cartridge VLS filename
• Cartridge capacity (in GB)
getCartridges
• Consumed capacity (in GB)
• Cartridge type
• Timestamp value for when it was last loaded
• Whether or not it is write-enabled (0) or write-protected (1)
• Library to which it belongs
• Barcode label
Returns a list of the cartridges associated with the specified library. Where the
options are:
getCartsByLib
-a <s> - Name of library (Library_0, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns the cartridge metadata for the number of cartridges indicated having the
specified barcode. Where options are:
-b<s> - Barcode prefix (required)
getCartsByBarcode
-i<n> - Starting numeric value for the cartridges created with this template
(required)
-n <n> - Ending numeric value for the cartridges to retrieve (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
206
CLI Command Set
Command
Usage 1
Deletes the specified cartridge and its user data from the VLS. Where the options
are:
-a <s> - VLS filename of cartridge to delete (required)
-b <s> - Barcode value of cartridge to delete (required)
-c <n> - Capacity of cartridge to delete in gigabytes (required)
removeCartridge
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility
(optional)
-l <s> - Name of library with which cartridge is associated (Library_0, ...)
(required)
-s <s> - Storage LUN name (SLun_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns the total usable storage capacity of the storage pool. Where the options
are:
getStorageCapacity
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getStorageCapacities
Returns a list of the usable storage capacity of each storage pool on the VLS.
getStorageLuns
Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the VLS. List includes the storage LUN name,
IP address, storage pool number, number in storage pool, and so on for each
LUN.
Returns a list of the storage LUNs in the disk array. Where the options are:
getStorageLunsByArray
-a <s> - Disk array IP address (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the storage pool. Where the options are:
getStorageLunsBySP
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the node. Where the options are:
getStorageLunsByNode
-a <n> - Node ID (0, 1, 2, ... - default is 0)) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Creates a new storage pool. Where the options are:
createStoragePool
-n <n> - maximum number of cartridges (1 to 8000) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Deletes a storage pool. Where the options are:
deleteStoragePool
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
deleteAllStoragePools
Deletes all storage pools on the VLS and all the LUNs in all storage pools.
getStoragePoolNames
Returns a list of the storage pool names on the VLS.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
207
Command
Usage 1
getStoragePool
Returns information about the storage pool, such as primary LUN name, allocated
capacity, capacity, extent size, used capacity, and number of LUNs. Where the
options are:
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getStoragePoolSummary
Returns summary of storage pool information for all storage pools on the VLS.
addHost
Adds the specified host in the SAN list.
listHostState
Lists the current host state for all hosts in the SAN list.
setHostState
Sets the host state for specified host.
setHostStateAll
Sets the host state for all hosts in the SAN list to the state specified.
listAccessMode
Lists the current host access mode for all enabled hosts in the system.
setAccessMode
Sets the host access mode for all enabled hosts in the system.
setAlias
Sets the alias for the hostname of the specified host.
removeHost
Deletes the specified host from the SAN list.
addLunMap
Adds the specified device to the host.
listLunMap
Lists the host LUN map for specified device.
deleteLunMap
Deletes the specified device from the host.
getTapeSerialCompatibilityMode
Returns the compatibility mode for the virtual serial numbers.
Sets the compatibility mode for the virtual serial numbers. Upgrading to VLS firmware version 3.3.0 cause the colons in serial numbers to change to periods.
setTapeSerialCompatibilityMode
-m <s> - Compatibility mode
• Standard = default, keeps change of using periods instead of colons
• Legacy = changes periods to back to colons
getWwnnCompatibilityMode
Returns the firmware version compatibility mode for the WWNNs.
Sets the firmware version compatibility mode for the WWNNs. Upgrading to VLS
firmware version 3.3.0 causes the WWNNs for the VLS host ports to change to
begin with 20 instead of 50.
-m <s> - Compatibility mode
setWwnnCompatibilityMode
• 3.2.X = default, keeps change of using 20 instead of 50
• 3.1.X = changes 20 back to 50 (use if you just upgraded from version 3.1.x
or version 3.2.x with the hp_3.2.2_reboot_101.zip patch installed)
• 2.X = changes 20 back to 50 (use if you just upgraded from version 2.x and
you have UNIX servers connected to the VLS over the SAN)
1
<s> = string; <n> = number; <f> = filename
208
CLI Command Set
Management Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI Management commands to:
•
•
•
•
•
Change the account passwords
Manage cartridges
Restart the VLS device emulations
Save configuration settings
Restore configuration settings
Table 10 CLI management commands
Command
Usage 1
Resets the administrative password, or changes the administrative or user password.
Command View VLS automatically restarts after changing the passwords to make
the changes take effect. Where the options are:
changePassword
-admin - Reset the administrator password ( -u and -p are ignored) (optional)
-p - Password (no spaces) (optional)
-u - Username (administrator or user). Default is current user. (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Changes parameters on an existing cartridge. Where the options are:
-a <s> - VLS filename of the cartridge (required)
-b <s> - Barcode label of the cartridge (required)
-c <n> - Current capacity of the cartridge in gigabytes (optional). Only required
if changing the cartridge capacity.
-l <s> - Name of library in which the cartridge resides (Library_0, ...) (required)
editCartridge
-nc <n> - Desired new capacity of the cartridge in gigabytes (optional)
-nl <s> - Name of the new library if moving cartridge (Library_1, ..) (optional)
-s<s> - Storage LUN name (SLun_#) (required)
-w - Write protect? (0-read/write or 1-read only) (optional)
-y <n> - Cartridge emulation type (2, 3, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
restartEmulations
Restarts the VLS device emulations.
restartCommandViewVLS
Restarts Command View VLS.
restartSystem
Shuts down and restarts the VLS node.
shutdownSystem
Shuts down the VLS node so it can be powered off.
shutdownNode
Shuts down the VLS node so it can be powered off.
Where the options are:
saveAllConfig
-o <s> - Saves the VLS virtual library configuration and network settings to the
specified external configuration file.
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
209
Command
Usage 1
Where the options are:
restoreAllConfig
-in <s> - Restores the VLS virtual library configuration and network settings from
the specified external configuration file.
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
1
<s> = string; <n> = number; <f> = filename
Monitoring Commands
Use the CLI commands in CLI monitoring commands to:
•
•
•
•
•
View the VLS health status
View or delete notification alerts
Add, view, or delete E-mail servers to route notification alerts
Add, view, or delete E-mail addresses for notification alerts
Add, view, or delete SNMP management consoles to receive notification alerts
Table 11 CLI monitoring commands
Command
Usage 1
getHealth
Returns the VLS health status as a number (0-good, 1-degraded, 2-critical, 3-failed,
4-missing).
getChassis
Returns information about the VLS displayed on the Identity Tab window.
Returns information on the node. Where the options are:
getNode
-a <s> - Node name (Head_0, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getNodeNames
Returns the list of nodes in the VLS.
Returns fault information for the specified node. Where the options are:
getNodeFault
-a <s> - Node name (Head_0, ...) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns the current configuration of the specified array.
Note: This command returns the disk array name (disk array IP address), its health
state, and a listing of its major components. With the verbose option turned on,
a much more comprehensive report is produced.
getArray
A "rack" value of 0 indicates that the disk array is located in the primary or only
rack associated with the system.
Where the options are:
-a <s> - IP address (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Returns the IP address of the disk arrays.
Where the options are:
getArrayNames
-a <s> - Storage pool name (StoragePool_#) (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
210
CLI Command Set
Command
Usage 1
Returns the current health status for the specified array (0 = healthy 1 = degraded
2 = critical 3 = failed 4 = missing). Where the options are:
getArrayFault
-a <s> - IP address of the desired array (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getFreeArrayList
Returns a list of arrays not yet configured into a storage pool. This command reports
"No disk arrays found" if all arrays have been added to a storage pool.
getFreeStorageLuns
Returns the list of LUNs that are not part of any storage pool.
getNotificationsCount
Returns the number of notification messages specified counting back from the most
recent. Where the options are:
-n <n> - Maximum number of notifications to return (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getNotificationsDate
Returns all the notification alert messages that occurred starting with the specified
date. Where the options are:
-d - mm/dd/yy on or after this date (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Deletes the specified notification alerts from the VLS. Where the options are:
deleteNotifications
-id <s> - ID number of notification to delete (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Specifies an E-mail server with an SMTP gateway to route notification alerts from
the VLS. Where the options are:
-a <s> - E-mail server address (required)
addEmailServer
-c <s> - node IP address (required)
-s <s> - Sender email address (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getEmailServer
Returns the E-mail server configuration settings for notification alerts.
Deletes the specified E-mail server from the E-mail notification alerts settings. Where
the options are:
-a <s> - E-mail server address (required)
deleteEmailServer
-c <s> - VLS node IP address (required)
-f - Force - This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward
compatibility (optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
211
Command
Usage 1
Adds an E-mail address and desired report formatting to the E-mail notification
alert settings. Where the options are:
-a <s> - E-mail address (required)
-c <s> - VLS IP address (required)
addEmail
-s <n> - Severity (1-Error, 2-Warning, 4-Info, or 8-Unknown) (optional)
-y <n> - E-mail type (1-Long with attachment, 2-Long, 4-Short, or 8-Reports)
(optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
-f <n> - Notification frequency (0-None, 1-Daily, 2-Weekly, 3-Bi-weekly, or
4-Monthly) (optional)
getEmail
Returns the report settings for each E-mail address configured for notification alerts.
Deletes the specified E-mail address from the E-mail notification alert settings.
Where the options are:
-a <s> - E-mail address (required)
-c <s> - VLS node IP address (required)
deleteEmail
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility
(optional)
-y <n> - Email type (1-long with attachment, 2-long, 4-short, 8-reports,
16-configuration) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
Specifies an SNMP management console to receive SNMP traps from the VLS.
Where the options are:
-a <s> - SNMP server IP address (required)
-c <s> - VLS node IP address (required)
addSnmpServer
-m <s> - Community (Public, ...) (required)
-v <s> - Trap version (required)
-s <n> - Severity (1-Error, 2-Warning, 4-Info, or 8-Unknown) (required)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
getSnmp
Returns the SNMP management console configuration settings for notification
alerts.
Deletes the specified SNMP management console from the SNMP notification alert
settings. Where the options are:
-a <s> - SNMP server IP address (required)
deleteSnmpServer
-c <s> - VLS node IP address (required)
-f - Force. This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility
(optional)
-h - Displays command usage information (optional)
1
<s> = string; <n> = number; <f> = filename
212
CLI Command Set
12 Component Identification
This section provides illustrations and descriptions of the nodeand disk array components, LEDs, and
buttons.
NOTE:
For lights that blink or flash, the frequency of Hz is about the same number of blinks or flashes per
second.
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons
Front Panel Components
Item
Description
1
Diskette drive blank
2
CD–ROM drive
3
Front USB port
4
Hard drive 0
5
Hard drive 1
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
213
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
Status
• Green = System is on.
• Amber = System is shut down, but power is
still applied.
1
Power On/Standby button and system power
LED
• Off = Power cord is not attached, power
supply failure has occurred, no power supplies are installed, facility power is not
available, or the DC-to-DC converter is not
installed.
• Blue = Identification is activated.
2
UID button/LED
• Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
• Off = Identification is deactivated.
• Green = System health is normal.
• Amber = System is degraded. To identify the
component in a degraded state, refer to system board LEDs.
3
Internal health LED
• Red = System is critical. To identify the component in a critical state, refer to system
board LEDs.
• Off = System health is normal (when in
standby mode).
• Green = Power supply health is normal.
• Amber = Power redundancy failure occurred.
4
214
External health LED (power supply)
Component Identification
• Off = Power redundancy failure has occurred. When the node is in standby mode,
power supply health is normal.
Item
Description
Status
• Green = Network link exists.
• Flashing green = Network link and activity
exist.
5
NIC 1 link/activity LED
• Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, view the LEDs on the RJ-45
connector for status by referring to the rear panel
LEDs. See Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons.
• Green = Network link exists.
• Flashing green = Network link and activity
exist.
6
NIC 2 link/activity LED
• Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, the front panel LED is not active.
View the LEDs on the RJ-45 connector for status
by referring to the rear panel LEDs. See Rear
Panel LEDs and Buttons.
NOTE:
SATA hard drive LED functionality is not currently supported.
Rear Panel Components
Item
Description
1
FC host ports
2
VHDCI connectors
3
Power supply bay 2
4
Power supply bay 1
5
Serial connector
6
Video connector
7
Keyboard connector
8
Mouse connector (not used)
9
iLO management LAN port (service port)
10
10/100/1000 NIC 1 (user network)
1
1
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
215
1
Item
Description
11
10/100/1000 NIC 2 (service port)
12
Rear USB connector
VLS6105 shown
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
Status
• Green and Amber = Power on.
• Green = Online.
1–2
FC host port LEDs
1
• Amber = Signal acquired.
• Amber flashing = Loss of synchronization.
• Green and Amber flashing = Firmware error.
• Green = Activity exists.
3
iLO activity LED
• Flashing green = Activity exists.
• Off = No activity exists.
4
iLO link LED
• Green = Link exists.
• Off = No link exists.
• Green = Network activity.
5
10/100/1000 NIC 2 activity LED
• Flashing green = Network activity.
• Off = No network activity.
6
10/100/1000 NIC 2 link LED
7
10/100/1000 NIC 1 link LED
• Green = Linked to the network.
• Off = Not linked to the network.
• Green = Linked to the network.
• Off = Not linked to the network.
• Green = Network activity.
8
10/100/1000 NIC 1 activity LED
• Flashing green = Network activity.
• Off = No network activity.
216
Component Identification
Item
Description
Status
• Blue = Identification is activated.
9
• Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
UID button/LED
• Off = Identification is deactivated.
• Green = Powered on
10
1
• Amber = Power supply failure has occurred
or the power supply is not seated properly,
not plugged in to a power source, or not receiving power from the power source.
Power supply LED
VLS6105 shown. The VLS6510 does not have FC host port LEDs.
System Board Components
Item
Description
Item
Description
1
DIMM slots (1-4)
8
Power supply connector
2
NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) switch
9
Power supply signal connector
3
System maintenance switch (SW2)
10
Remote management connector
4
Processor 1 socket
11
SATA connectors
5
Processor 2 socket
12
PCI riser board assembly connector (for
slot 2 riser board)
6
Processor zone fan module connector
13
PCI riser board assembly connector (for
slot 1 riser board)
7
CD-ROM drive connector
14
System board battery
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
217
System Board LEDs
Item
Description
1
DIMM 4B failure
2
DIMM 3B failure
3
DIMM 2A failure
4
DIMM 1A failure
5
Overtemperature
Status
• Amber = DIMM has failed.
• Off = DIMM is operating normally.
• Amber = DIMM has failed.
• Off = DIMM is operating normally.
• Amber = DIMM has failed.
• Off = DIMM is operating normally.
• Amber = DIMM has failed.
• Off = DIMM is operating normally.
• Amber = System has reached cautionary or
critical temperature level.
• Off = Temperature is OK.
6
Processor 1 failure
7
PPM 1 failure
8
PPM 2 failure
9
Processor 2 failure
10
218
Power supply signal connector interlock failure
Component Identification
• Amber = Processor has failed.
• Off = Processor is operating normally.
• Amber = PPM has failed.
• Off = PPM is operating normally.
• Amber = PPM has failed.
• Off = PPM is operating normally.
• Amber = Processor has failed.
• Off = Processor is operating normally.
• Amber = Power supply signal cable is not
connected.
• Off = Power supply signal cable is connected.
Item
Description
Status
11
Standby power good
• Green = Auxiliary power is applied.
• Off = Auxiliary power is not applied.
• Amber = One fan in this module has failed.
12
• Red = Multiple fans in this module have
failed.
Power supply fan module failure
• Off = All fans in this module are operating
normally.
13
Refer to the HP Remote Lights-Out Edition II User
Guide.
System diagnostic
• Amber = Failover has occurred. Online spare
memory is in use.
14
• Green = Online spare memory is enabled,
but not in use.
Online spare memory
• Off = Online spare memory is disabled.
15
• Amber = PCI riser assembly is not seated.
Riser interlock
• Off = PCI riser assembly is seated.
Node LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations
When the internal health LED on the front panel of the node illuminates either amber or red, the node
is experiencing a health event. Combinations of illuminated system board LEDs and the internal health
LED indicate node status.
System board LED
and color
Internal Health
LED Color
Status
One or more of the following conditions may exist:
• Processor in socket X has failed.
Processor failure,
socket X (Amber)
• Processor in socket X failed over to the offline spare.
Red
• Processor X is not installed in the socket.
• Processor X is unsupported.
• ROM detects a failed processor during POST.
Amber
Processor in socket X is in a pre-failure condition.
Processor failure,
both sockets (Amber)
Red
Processor types are mismatched.
PPM failure (Amber)
Red
PPM has failed.
DIMM failure, slot X
(Amber)
Red
• DIMM in slot X has failed.
• DIMM in slot X is an unsupported type, and no valid memory
exists in another bank.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
219
System board LED
and color
Internal Health
LED Color
Status
• DIMM in slot X has reached single-bit correctable error
threshold.
Amber
• DIMM in slot X is in a pre-failure condition.
• DIMM in slot X is an unsupported type, but valid memory exists
in another bank.
DIMM failure, all
slots in one bank
(Amber)
Red
No valid or usable memory is installed in the system.
Overtemperature
(Amber)
Amber
The Health Driver has detected a cautionary temperature level.
Red
The node has detected a hardware critical temperature level.
Riser interlock (Amber)
Red
The PCI riser board assembly is not seated.
Online spare
memory (Amber)
Amber
Bank X failed over to the online spare memory bank.
Power converter
module interlock
(Amber)
Red
The power converter module is not seated.
Fan module (Amber)
Amber
A redundant fan has failed.
Fan module (Red)
Red
The minimum fan requirements are not being met in one or more
of the fan modules. One or more fans have failed or are missing.
Power supply signal
interlock (Amber)
Red
The power supply signal cable is not connected to the system
board.
Fan Module Locations
Item
Description
1
Power supply zone fan module (fan 1)
2
Processor zone fan module (fan 2)
220
Component Identification
Processor Zone Fan Module LED
LED Status
Description
Amber
One fan in this module has failed.
Red
Multiple fans in this module have failed.
Off
All fans in this module are operating normally.
VLS6200 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons
This section identifies and describes the front and rear panel components, LEDs, and buttons of the
VLS nodes.
Front Panel Components
Item
Description
1
DVD-CD drive
2
Front USB connector
3
HP Systems Insight Display
4
Video connector
5
Hard drive blank
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
221
Item
Description
6
Hard drive blank
7
Hard drive 2
8
Hard drive 1
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
Status
Green = System is on.
1
Power On/Standby button and system power
LED
Amber = System is shut down, but power is still
applied.
Off = Power cord is not attached, power supply
failure has occurred, no power supplies are
installed, facility power is not available, or
disconnected power button cable.
Blue = Identification is activated.
2
UID button/LED
Flashing blue = System is being remotely
managed.
Off = Identification is deactivated.
Green = System health is normal.
Amber = System health is degraded. To identify
the component in a degraded state, refer to HP
Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health
LED Combinations.
3
Internal health LED
Red = System health is critical. To identify the
component in a critical state, refer to HP Systems
Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED
Combinations.
Off = System health is normal (when in standby
mode).
Green = Power supply health is normal.
4
222
External health LED (power supply)
Component Identification
Amber = Power redundancy failure occurred.
Off = Power supply health is normal when in
standby mode.
Item
Description
Status
Green = Network link exists.
Flashing green = Network link and activity exist.
5
NIC 1 link/activity LED
Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, the front panel LED is not active.
View the LEDs on the RJ-45 connector for status
by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons.
Green = Network link exists.
Flashing green = Network link and activity exist.
6
NIC 2 link/activity LED
Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, the front panel LED is not active.
View the LEDs on the RJ-45 connector for status
by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons.
Rear Panel Components
Item
Description
1
Dual port FC card, host port, port 0
2
Dual port FC card, host port, port 1
3
VHDCI connectors
4
Power supply 2
5
Power supply 1
6
NIC 2 connector (not used)
7
NIC 1 connector (user network)
8
Keyboard connector
9
Mouse connector
10
Video connector
11
Serial connector to access CLI
12
Rear USB connector
13
Rear USB connector
14
iLO 2 NIC connector (service port)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
223
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
1
iLO 2 NIC activity LED
Status
Green = Activity exists.
Flashing green = Activity exists.
Off = No activity exists.
2
iLO 2 NIC link LED
Green = Link exists.
Off = No link exists.
Red, green, and amber on or flashing = Power
on.
3–5
FC port LEDs
LED that is on/flashing represents the link speed
(red = 1 Gbps, green = 2 Gbps, amber = 4
Gbps) = Online, I/O activity.
Red, green, and amber flashing alternately =
Firmware error.
Red, green, and amber off = Power off.
Green = Activity exists.
6
10/100/1000 NIC 1 activity LED
Flashing green = Activity exists.
Off = No activity exists.
7
10/100/1000 NIC 1 link LED
Green = Link exists.
Off = No link exists.
Green = Activity exists.
8
10/100/1000 NIC 2 activity LED
Flashing green = Activity exists.
Off = No activity exists.
9
10/100/1000 NIC 2 link LED
Green = Link exists.
Off = No link exists.
Blue = Identification is activated.
10
UID button/LED
Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
Off = Identification is deactivated.
224
Component Identification
Item
Description
Status
11
Power supply 2 LED
12
Power supply 1 LED
Green = Normal
Off = System is off or power supply has failed
Green = Normal
Off = System is off or power supply has failed
System Board Components
Item
Description
1
System maintenance switch (SW1)
2
NMI switch
3
FBDIMM slots (1-8)
4
Processor socket 2
5
Processor socket 1
6
DVD-CD drive connector
7
Power button connector
8
Fan module 3 connectors
9
Fan module 2 connectors
10
Fan module 1 connectors
11
SAS hard drive backplane power connector
12
Integrated Smart RAID controller connector
13
Power supply connector 1
14
Power supply connector 2
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
225
Item
Description
15
Internal USB connector
16
System battery
17
PCI riser board connector 2
18
PCI riser board connector 1
Accessing the VLS6200 HP Systems Insight Display
To eject the HP Systems Insight Display:
1.
Press and release the display.
2.
Extend the display from the chassis.
The display can be rotated up to 90 degrees.
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs
The display provides status for all internal LEDs and enables diagnosis with the access panel installed.
To view the LEDs, access the HP Systems Insight Display.
226
Component Identification
Item
Description
Status
Green = Protection enabled
1
Online spare memory LED
Flashing amber = Memory configuration error
Amber = Memory failure occurred
Off = No protection
Green = Protection enabled
2
Mirrored memory LED
Flashing amber = Memory configuration error
Amber = Memory failure occurred
Off = No protection
Amber = Failure
All other LEDs
Off = Normal. For additional information
detailing the causes for the activation of these
LEDs, refer to HP Systems Insight Display LEDs
and Internal Health LED Combinations.
NOTE:
The HP Systems Insight Display LEDs represent the system board layout.
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations
When the internal health LED on the front panel illuminates either amber or red, the server is
experiencing a health event. Combinations of illuminated system LEDs and the internal health LED
indicate system status.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
227
HP Systems Insight Display LED
and color
Internal health
LED color
Status
One or more of the following conditions may exist:
• Processor in socket X has failed.
Processor failure,
socket X (amber)
Red
• Processor X is required yet not installed in the socket.
• Processor X is unsupported.
• ROM detects a failed processor during POST.
Amber
Processor in socket X is in a pre-failure condition.
One or more of the following conditions may exist:
• PPM in slot X has failed.
PPM failure, slot X
(amber)
Red
FBDIMM failure, slot
X (amber)
Red
FBDIMM in slot X has failed.
Amber
FBDIMM in slot X is in a pre-failure condition.
FBDIMM failure, all
slots in one bank
(amber)
Red
One or more FBDIMMs has failed. Test each bank of FBDIMMs
by removing all other FBDIMMs. Isolate the failed FBDIMM by
replacing each FBDIMM in a bank with a known working FBDIMM.
Online spare
memory (amber)
Amber
Bank X failed over to the online spare memory bank.
Online spare
memory (flashing
amber)
Red
Invalid online spare memory configuration.
Online spare
memory (green)
Green
Online spare memory enabled and not failed.
Mirrored memory
(amber)
Amber
Bank X failed over to the mirrored memory bank.
Mirrored memory
(flashing amber)
Red
Invalid mirrored memory configuration.
Mirrored memory
(green)
Green
Mirrored memory enabled and not failed.
Overtemperature
(amber)
Amber
The Health Driver has detected a cautionary temperature level.
Red
The server has detected a hardware critical temperature level.
Riser interlock (amber)
Red
PCI riser cage is not seated.
Fan module (amber)
Amber
One fan is failed or removed.
Red
Two or more fans have failed or are removed.
228
Component Identification
• PPM is not installed in slot X, but the corresponding processor
is installed.
Hard Drive LEDs
Item
Description
1
Fault/UID LED (amber/blue)
2
Online LED (green)
Hard Drive LED Combinations
Online/activity
LED (green)
Fault/UID LED
(amber/blue)
Interpretation
On, off, or flashing
Alternating amber
and blue
The drive has failed, or a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive; it also has been selected by a management application.
On, off, or flashing
Steadily blue
The drive is operating normally, and it has been selected by a
management application.
On
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive.
On
Off
The drive is online, but it is not active currently.
Replace the drive as soon as possible.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive may terminate the
current operation and cause data loss.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
The drive is part of an array that is undergoing capacity
expansion or stripe migration, but a predictive failure alert has
been received for this drive. To minimize the risk of data loss, do
not replace the drive until the expansion or migration is complete.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive may terminate the
current operation and cause data loss.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Off
Flashing irregularly
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
The drive is active, but a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive. Replace the drive as soon as possible.
Flashing irregularly
Off
The drive is active, and it is operating normally.
Off
Steadily amber
A critical fault condition has been identified for this drive, and
the controller has placed it offline. Replace the drive as soon as
possible.
The drive is rebuilding, or it is part of an array that is undergoing
capacity expansion or stripe migration.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
229
Online/activity
LED (green)
Fault/UID LED
(amber/blue)
Interpretation
Off
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive. Replace
the drive as soon as possible.
Off
Off
The drive is offline, a spare, or not configured as part of an array.
Fan Locations
Item
Description
1
Fan module 1
2
Fan module 2
3
Fan module 3
VLS6600 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons
Front Panel Components
Item
Description
1
DVD-CD drive
2
Video connector
3
USB connectors (2)
230
Component Identification
Item
Description
4
Systems Insight Display
5
Hard drive 1
6
Hard drive 2
7
Hard drive blanks
8
Quick release levers (2)
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
Status
Blue = Identification is activated.
1
Flashing blue = System is being remotely
managed.
UID button/LED
Off = Identification is deactivated.
Green = System health is normal.
2
Internal health LED
Amber = System health is degraded. To identify
the component in a degraded state, refer to HP
Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health
LED Combinations.
Red = System health is critical. To identify the
component in a critical state, refer to HP Systems
Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED
Combinations.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
231
Item
Description
Status
Green = Power supply health is normal.
3
External health LED (power supply)
Amber = Power redundancy failure. To identify
the component in a degraded state, refer to HP
Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health
LED Combinations.
Red = Critical power supply failure. To identify
the component in a critical state, refer to HP
Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health
LED Combinations.
Green = Network link exists.
Flashing green = Network link and activity exist.
4
NIC 1 link/activity LED
Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, the front panel LED is not active.
View the LEDs on the RJ-45 connector for status
by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons.
Green = Network link exists.
Flashing green = Network link and activity exist.
5
NIC 2 link/activity LED
Off = No link to network exists.
If power is off, the front panel LED is not active.
View the LEDs on the RJ-45 connector for status
by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons.
Green = System is on.
6
Power On/Standby button and system power
LED
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs
232
Component Identification
Amber = System is shut down, but power is still
applied.
Off = Power cord is not attached, power supply
failure has occurred, no power supplies are
installed, or facility power is not available.
Item
Description
Status
Green = Protection enabled
1
Online spare memory LED
Flashing amber = Memory configuration error
Amber = Memory failure occurred
Off = No protection
Green = Protection enabled
2
Mirrored memory LED
Flashing amber = Memory configuration error
Amber = Memory failure occurred
Off = No protection
Amber = Failure
Off = Normal. For additional information
detailing the causes for the activation of these
LEDs, refer to HP Systems Insight Display LEDs
and Internal Health LED Combinations.
All other LEDs
IMPORTANT:
If more than one FBDIMM slot LED is illuminated, further troubleshooting is required. Test each bank
of FBDIMMs by removing all other FBDIMMs. Isolate the failed FBDIMM by replacing each FBDIMM
in a bank with a known working FBDIMM.
NOTE:
The HP Systems Insight Display LEDs represent the system board layout.
Rear Panel Components
Item
Description
1
Expansion slot 1 blank
2
Expansion slot 2 blank
3
Quad port FC card, host port, port 0
4
Quad port FC card, host port, port 1
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
233
Item
Description
5
Quad port FC card, host port, port 2
6
Quad port FC card, host port, port 3
7
T-10/T-15 Torx screwdriver
8
VHDCI connectors slot 5
9
VHDCI connectors slot 4
10
External option blank
11
NIC 2 connector (not used)
12
NIC 1 connector (user network)
13
Power supply 2
14
Power supply 1
15
iLO 2 NIC connector (service port)
16
Video connector
17
USB connectors (2)
18
Serial connector to access CLI
19
Mouse connector
20
Keyboard connector
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
1
Power supply LED
234
Component Identification
Status
Green = Normal
Off = System is off or power supply has failed
Item
Description
Status
Blue = Identification is activated.
2
Flashing blue = System is being managed
remotely.
UID button/LED
Off = Identification is deactivated.
Green = Activity exists.
3
NIC/iLO 2 activity LED
Flashing green = Activity exists.
Off = No activity exists.
4
NIC/iLO 2 link LED
Green = Link exists.
Off = No link exists.
Red, green, and amber on or flashing = Power
on.
5–7
LED that is on/flashing represents the link speed
(red = 1 Gbps, green = 2 Gbps, amber = 4
Gbps) = Online, I/O activity.
FC port LEDs
Red, green, and amber flashing alternately =
Firmware error.
Red, green, and amber off = Power off.
System Board Components
Item
Description
1
Fan board connector
2
PPM 1
3
PPM 2
4
Power supply backplane connector
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
235
Item
Description
5
PCIe slot 1
6
PCIe slot 2
7
NMI jumper
8
iLO 2 diagnostic LEDs
9
System maintenance switch
10
Internal USB connector1
11
System battery
12
PCI riser cage connector
13
Fan 4 connector
14
Fan 2 connector
15
Fan 3 connector
16
Fan 1 connector
17
FBDIMM slots (1–8)
18
Multibay interface connector
19
Processor socket 1
20
Processor socket 2
1
The lower USB connection is unavailable.
FBDIMM Slots
FBDIMM slots are numbered sequentially (1 through 8) and the paired banks are identified by the
letters A, B, C, and D.
236
Component Identification
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations
When the internal health LED on the front panel illuminates either amber or red, the server is
experiencing a health event. Combinations of illuminated system LEDs and the internal health LED
indicate system status.
HP Systems Insight Display LED
and color
Internal health
LED color
Status
One or more of the following conditions may exist:
• Processor in socket X has failed.
Processor failure,
socket X (amber)
• Processor X is required yet not installed in the socket.
Red
• Processor X is unsupported.
• ROM detects a failed processor during POST.
Amber
Processor in socket X is in a pre-failure condition.
One or more of the following conditions may exist:
• PPM in slot X has failed.
PPM failure, slot X
(amber)
Red
FBDIMM failure, slot
X (amber)
Red
FBDIMM in slot X has failed.
Amber
FBDIMM in slot X is in a pre-failure condition.
FBDIMM failure, all
slots in one bank
(amber)
Red
One or more FBDIMMs has failed. Test each bank of FBDIMMs
by removing all other FBDIMMs. Isolate the failed FBDIMM by
replacing each FBDIMM in a bank with a known working FBDIMM.
Online spare
memory (amber)
Amber
Bank X failed over to the online spare memory bank.
• PPM is not installed in slot X, but the corresponding processor
is installed.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
237
HP Systems Insight Display LED
and color
Internal health
LED color
Status
Online spare
memory (flashing
amber)
Red
Invalid online spare memory configuration.
Online spare
memory (green)
Green
Online spare memory enabled and not failed.
Mirrored memory
(amber)
Amber
Bank X failed over to the mirrored memory bank.
Mirrored memory
(flashing amber)
Red
Invalid mirrored memory configuration.
Mirrored memory
(green)
Green
Mirrored memory enabled and not failed.
Overtemperature
(amber)
Amber
The Health Driver has detected a cautionary temperature level.
Red
The server has detected a hardware critical temperature level.
Riser interlock (amber)
Red
PCI riser cage is not seated.
Fan module (amber)
Amber
One fan is failed or removed.
Red
Two or more fans have failed or are removed.
Hard Drive LEDs
Item
Description
1
Fault/UID LED (amber/blue)
2
Online LED (green)
238
Component Identification
Hard Drive LED Combinations
Online/activity
LED (green)
Fault/UID LED
(amber/blue)
Interpretation
On, off, or flashing
Alternating amber
and blue
The drive has failed, or a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive; it also has been selected by a management application.
On, off, or flashing
Steadily blue
The drive is operating normally, and it has been selected by a
management application.
On
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive.
On
Off
The drive is online, but it is not active currently.
Replace the drive as soon as possible.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive may terminate the
current operation and cause data loss.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
The drive is part of an array that is undergoing capacity
expansion or stripe migration, but a predictive failure alert has
been received for this drive. To minimize the risk of data loss, do
not replace the drive until the expansion or migration is complete.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive may terminate the
current operation and cause data loss.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Off
Flashing irregularly
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
The drive is active, but a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive. Replace the drive as soon as possible.
Flashing irregularly
Off
The drive is active, and it is operating normally.
Off
Steadily amber
A critical fault condition has been identified for this drive, and
the controller has placed it offline. Replace the drive as soon as
possible.
Off
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive. Replace
the drive as soon as possible.
Off
Off
The drive is offline, a spare, or not configured as part of an array.
The drive is rebuilding, or it is part of an array that is undergoing
capacity expansion or stripe migration.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
239
Fan Locations
VLS6800 Node Components, LEDs, and Buttons
Front Panel Components
Item
Description
1
Eject button for diskette drive
2
Diskette drive
3
DVD-CD drive
4
Eject button for DVD-CD drive
5
SCSI hard drive 1
6
Hard drive blank
240
Component Identification
Item
Description
7
SCSI hard drive 0
8
Hard drive blank
9
Power supply 1 (primary)
10
Power supply 2 (backup)
Front Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
Status
• Blue = Identification is activated.
1
Unit identification button/LED
• Blue flashing = System being managed remotely.
• Off = Identification is deactivated.
• Green = System health is normal.
• Amber = System is degraded. To identify the
component in a degraded state, refer to the
QuickFind Diagnostic Display LEDs.
2
Internal health LED
• Red = System is critical. To identify the component in a critical state, refer to QuickFind
Diagnostic Display LEDs.
• Off = System health is normal (when in
standby mode).
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
241
Item
Description
Status
• Green = System health is normal.
• Amber = System is degraded. To identify the
component in a degraded state, refer to the
QuickFind Diagnostic Display LEDs.
3
External health LED
• Red = System is critical. To identify the component in a critical state, refer to QuickFind
Diagnostic Display LEDs.
• Off = System health is normal (when in
standby mode).
• Green = System is on.
• Amber = System is shut down (auxiliary
power only).
4
Power On/Standby button
• Off = Power cord is not attached, power
supply failure has occurred, no power supplies are installed, or facility power is not
available.
• On = Drive activity.
• Flashing = High activity on the drive or drive
is being configured as part of an array.
5
Hard drive activity LED
• Off = No drive activity.
For more information about the meaning of the
various hard drive LED illumination patterns, see
Hard drive LED combinations.
• On = Drive is part of an array and is currently working.
• Flashing = Online activity.
6
Hard drive online status LED
• Off = No online activity.
For more information about the meaning of the
various hard drive LED illumination patterns, see
Hard drive LED combinations.
• On = Drive failure.
• Flashing = Fault process activity.
7
Hard drive fault status LED
8–9
Power supply LEDs
• Off = No fault process activity.
For more information about the meaning of the
various hard drive LED illumination patterns, see
Hard drive LED combinations.
See Power supply LED combinations.
Table 12 Power supply LED combinations
8 Power LED
(green)
9 Fault LED (amber)
Status
Off
Off
No AC power
242
Component Identification
8 Power LED
(green)
9 Fault LED (amber)
Off
On
Status
No power to this specific power supply
-OrPower supply failure
AC power present
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Power supply on and working properly
On
Blinking
Power supply current limit exceeded
System in standby mode
Table 13 Hard drive LED combinations
Activity LED
On
On
Online LED
Off
Flashing
Fault LED
Off
Off
Status
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive during this process causes data loss.
The drive is being accessed and is not configured as part
of an array.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive during this process causes data loss.
The drive is rebuilding or undergoing capacity expansion.
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive during this process causes data loss.
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
The drive is part of an array being selected by the Array
Configuration Utility.
-OrThe Options ROMPaq is upgrading the drive.
OK to replace the drive online if a predictive failure alert is
received, and the drive is attached to an RAID controller.
The drive is not configured as part of an array.
Off
Off
Off
-OrIf this drive is part of an array, then a powered-on controller
is not accessing the drive
.-OrThe drive is configured as an online spare.
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
OK to replace the drive online.
The drive has failed and has been placed off-line.
OK to replace the drive online if a predictive failure alert is
received (refer to the following section for details), provided
that the array is configured for fault tolerance and all other
drives in the array are online.
The drive is online and configured as part of an array.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
243
Activity LED
Online LED
Fault LED
Status
On or flashing
On
Off
Do not remove the drive. Removing a drive during this process causes data loss.
The drive is online and being accessed.
Rear Panel Components
Item
Description
1
iLO management LAN port (service port)
2
USB connector 1
3
USB connector 2
4
Keyboard connector
5
Mouse connector (not used)
6
Video connector
7
Serial connector
8
10/100/1000 NIC 2 (service port)
9
10/100/1000 NIC 1 (user network)
10
VHDCI connectors
11
FC host ports
12
AC power connector (for power supply 1)
13
AC power connector (for power supply 2)
244
Component Identification
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
LED color
1
Ethernet activity LED
Green
2
Ethernet link LED
Green
3
Rear Unit Identification button and LED
Green
Status
• On or flashing = Network activity.
• Off = No network activity.
• On = Linked to the network.
• Off = Not linked to the network.
• Blue = Identification is activated.
• Blue flashing = System being managed remotely.
• Off = Identification is deactivated.
System Board Components
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
245
Item
Description
Item
Description
1
Slot 1 (unpopulated)
9
Processor memory board slot 1 (processor)
2
Slot 2 (unpopulated)
10
Processor memory board slot 2 (boot processor)
3
Slot 3 (FC host bus adapter)
11
Processor memory board slot 3 (air baffle)
4
Slot 4 (unpopulated)
12
Processor memory board slot 4 (air baffle)
5
Slot 5 (Smart RAID controller board 3)
13
System board battery
6
Slot 6 (Smart RAID controller board 2)
14
System maintenance switch (SW3)
7
Slot 7 (Smart RAID controller board 1)
15
System ID switch (SW4)
8
Slot 8 (Smart RAID controller board 0)
16
iLO/Redundant ROM Override Switch
(SW5)
Processor Memory Board Components
Item
Description
1–2
Memory bank 1
3–4
Memory bank 2
5–6
Memory bank 3
7–8
Memory bank 4
9
Processor and heatsink
10
Processor power module
246
Component Identification
QuickFind Diagnostic Display LEDs
The QuickFind Diagnostic Display is located on the top of the access panel and displays the node
internal component and temperature status.
Item
Description
Status
Off = Normal
1
Fan
On = Attention
required
Off = Normal
2
Processor
On = Attention
required
3
Processor memory
board
4
Processor power
module
Action
Be sure fan is installed and seated properly.
If fan is installed and seated properly, replace the fan.
Processor pre-failure notification. Inspect the IML logs
and POST messages.
Processor might need to be replaced.
Off = Normal
Processor memory board power failure.
On = Attention
required
If problem persists, replace the processor or processor
memory board.
Off = Normal
PPM power failure. If problem persists, replace PPM.
On = Attention
required
If the PPM and the BRD LEDs are both on, there is a
configuration error.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
247
Item
Description
Status
Action
One or more components have experienced an elevated temperature or a thermal shutdown.
A thermal shutdown is indicated by the Therm Trip
LED.
• Be sure the processor heatsink is properly attached.
Off = Normal
5
Temperature
On = Attention
required
• Be sure there are no 1.7" DIMMs installed that
prevent airflow across the processor heatsink).
• Be sure that all fans are installed and working
properly.
• Be sure that the node environment meets posted
requirements.
For information about node environment requirements
refer to the “Optimum environment” section in Chapter
3.
Off = Normal
6
DIMM
On = Attention
required
Off = Normal
7
I/O power fault
On = Attention
required
DIMM failure or configuration error. Refer to the IML
or POST messages
A power fault on the system I/O board occurred. If
problem persists, replace the system I/O board.
The node experienced a thermal shutdown.
If one of the CPU thermal LEDs is amber, that CPU
experienced an overtemperature condition.
Off = Normal
8
Therm trip
On = Attention
required
• Be sure that the processor heatsink is properly attached. For more information, refer to the maintenance and service guide.
• Be sure the correct DIMMs (1.2" tall) are installed.
• Be sure all fans are installed and working properly
For more information, refer to the maintenance and
service guide.
Off = Normal
9
SCSI interlock
10
Power supply 1
11
Power supply 2
248
Component Identification
On = Attention
required
Off = Normal
On = Attention
required
Off = Normal
On = Attention
required
Ensure the SCSI backplane is installed properly.
Reseat SCSI backplane board and hard drives.
Look at the LEDs on the front of the power supply and
take the appropriate action.
Look at the LEDs on the front of the power supply and
take the appropriate action.
Item
Description
Status
Action
A bus error occurred.
Off = Normal
12
Bus error
On = Attention
required
The error might have been caused by one of the
adapter cards on this bus (see amber LEDs for which
slots might have caused the error).
Reseat the adapter cards.
If problem persists, remove or replace one or both of
the cards.
Fan Locations
Item
Description
Item
Description
1
Fan 1
5
Fan 5
2
Fan 2
6
Fan 6
3
Fan 3
7
Fan 7
4
Fan 4
8
Fan 8
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
249
Fan LED
LED
Status
Description
Off
Power is not applied to the fan
Green
Power is applied to the fan and the fan is functional
Amber
Fan failure
VLS6000–series Disk Array Components, LEDs, and Buttons
Front Panel Components
Item
1
Description
Drives 0, 1, and 2
(numbered from top to bottom)
2
Drives 3, 4, and 5
3
Drives 6, 7, and 8
4
Drives 9, 10, and 11
250
Component Identification
Front Panel LEDs
Item
Description
1
Hard drive fault/ID
bicolor LED
2
Status
Hard drive online
LED
Blue = The unit identification button on the rear of the disk array has been
pressed.
Amber = The drive has failed or is predicted to fail in the near future.
Green = The drive is online.
Off = The drive is offline or the disk array is powered down.
For more information about the meaning of the various hard drive LED illumination patterns, see Hard
drive LED combinations.
Table 14 Hard Drive LED Combinations
Online LED (green)
Fault/ID LED (amber/blue)
Status
On, off, or flashing
Alternating between
amber and blue
The drive has failed, or a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive. It has also been selected by the VLS management
application.
On, off, or flashing
Steadily blue
The drive is operating normally, and it has been selected by the
VLS management application.
On
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive. Replace
the drive as soon as possible.
On
Off
The drive is online, but it is not currently active.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive. To
minimize the risk of data loss, replace the drive.
Flashing regularly
(1 Hz)
Off
The drive is rebuilding.
Flashing irregularly
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
The drive is active, but a predictive failure alert has been received
for this drive. Replace the drive as soon as possible.
Flashing irregularly
Off
The drive is active, and it is operating normally.
Off
Steadily amber
A critical fault condition has been identified for this drive, and
the controller has placed it offline. Replace the drive as soon as
possible.
Off
Amber, flashing
regularly (1 Hz)
A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive. Replace
the drive as soon as possible.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
251
Online LED (green)
Fault/ID LED (amber/blue)
Status
Off
Off
The drive is offline or the disk array is powered down.
Rear Panel Components
Item
Description
1
Power supply bay 0
2
Controller module
3
VHDCI connector
4
Fan module 0
5
Fan module 1
6
Power supply bay 1
WARNING!
Do not use the handles on the power supply units to lift or hold the disk array. These handles are
designed only for holding the power supply units or removing them from the disk array, not for
supporting the weight of the disk array.
Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons
Item
Description
1
Arrow buttons (not used)
252
Component Identification
Item
Description
2
Disk array ID display (not used)
3
Unit identification button. Temporarily illuminates the blue LED on all the drives in the disk array.
4
Disk array monitor status LED (not used)
5
Disk array fault LED (not used)
6
Disk array power button
7
Power supply 0 LED
8
Power supply 1 LED
9
Controller module LED
10
Fan module 0 LED
11
Fan module 1 LED
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
253
254
Component Identification
13 Component Replacement
This section provides detailed instructions for replacing customer-replaceable VLS components. See
Customer Self Repair for details.
CAUTION:
Always replace components with the same make, size, and type of component. Changing the hardware
configuration voids the warranty.
Safety Considerations
Before performing component replacement procedures, review all the safety information in this guide.
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
To prevent damaging the system, be aware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up
the system or handling parts. A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor may
damage static-sensitive devices or micro circuitry. This type of damage may reduce the life expectancy
of the device. Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent
damage.
To prevent electrostatic damage:
• Avoid hand contact by transporting and storing products in static-safe containers, such as conductive
tubes, bags, or boxes.
• Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free workstations.
• Cover workstations with approved static-dissipating material. Use a wrist strap connected to the
work surface and properly grounded (earthed) tools and equipment.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam
packing.
• Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers.
• Always be properly grounded when touching a static-sensitive component or assembly.
• Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Damage
There are several methods for grounding. Use one or more of the following methods when handling
or installing electrostatic-sensitive parts:
• Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis.
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of 1 megaohm ± 10 percent resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snug against the skin.
• Use heel straps, toe straps, or boot straps at standing workstations. Wear the straps on both feet
when standing on conductive floors or dissipating floor mats.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
255
• Use conductive field service tools.
• Use a portable field service kit with a folding static-dissipating work mat.
If you do not have any of the suggested equipment for proper grounding, have an authorized reseller
install the part. For more information on static electricity, or assistance with product installation, contact
your authorized reseller.
Warnings and Cautions
Before removing the node access panel, be sure that you understand the following warnings and
cautions.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
• Do not disable the AC power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important safety
feature.
• Plug the power cord into a grounded (earthed) electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times.
• Unplug the power cord from each power supply to disconnect power to the equipment.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the drives and the internal system
components to cool before touching them.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
Preparation Procedures
To access some components and perform certain replacement procedures, you must perform one or
more of the following procedures:
• Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only)
• Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack, Extending the VLS6600
Node from the Rack, or Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
If you are performing service procedures in an HP, Compaq branded, telco, or third-party rack
cabinet, use the locking feature of the rack rails to support the node and gain access to internal
components.
For more information about telco rack solutions, see the RackSolutions.com web site (http://
www.racksolutions.com/hp).
• If you must remove a non-hot-plug component from the node, power off the system. See Powering
Off the System.
• Remove the node from the rack. See Removing a VLS Node from the Rack, Removing a VLS6600
Node from the Rack, or Removing a VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
256
Component Replacement
• Remove the node access panel. See Removing the VLS Node Access Panel, Removing a VLS Node
from the Rack, or Removing the VLS Node Access Panel.
If you must remove a component located inside the node, remove the access panel.
Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only)
1.
Locate the Torx T-15 tool on the back of the node.
2.
Slide the tool upward out of the retaining clips.
Figure 71 Removing the Torx T-15 tool
.
Extending a VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node from the Rack
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage, be sure that the rack is adequately
stabilized before extending a node from the rack.
WARNING!
Be careful when pressing the rail-release levers and sliding the component into or out of the rack. The
sliding rails could pinch your fingertips.
To extend a node from the rack:
1.
Loosen the thumbscrews that secure the node faceplate to the front of the rack.
2.
Extend the node on the rack rails until the node rail-release latches engage.
3.
After performing the replacement procedure, slide the node back into the rack:
a.
Press the node rail-release latches and slide the node fully into the rack.
b.
Secure the node by tightening the thumbscrews.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
257
Extending a VLS6600 Node from the Rack
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage, be sure that the rack is adequately
stabilized before extending a node from the rack.
WARNING!
Be careful when pressing the rail-release levers and sliding the component into or out of the rack. The
sliding rails could pinch your fingertips.
To extend a node from the rack:
1.
Pull down the quick release levers (1) on each side of the server.
2.
Extend the node on the rack rails until the node rail-release latches engage.
Figure 72 Extending the node from the rack
.
258
Component Replacement
3.
After performing the replacement procedure, slide the node back into the rack:
a.
Press the node rail-release latches (1) and slide the node fully into the rack.
Figure 73 Sliding the node back into the rack
.
b.
Press the node firmly into the rack to secure it in place.
Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage, be sure that the rack is adequately
stabilized before extending the node from the rack.
WARNING!
Be careful when pressing the rail-release levers and sliding the component into or out of the rack. The
sliding rails could pinch your fingertips.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
259
1.
Loosen the thumbscrews that secure the node to the front of the rack.
Figure 74 Loosening the front panel thumbscrews
.
2.
Extend the node on the rack rails until the node rail-release latches engage.
Figure 75 Extending the node from the rack
.
260
Component Replacement
3.
After performing the replacement procedure, slide the node back into the rack:
a.
Reach around the front of the node to press the rail-release levers at the front of both node
rails and slide the node into the rack.
Figure 76 Sliding the node into the rack
.
b.
Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the node to the rack.
Figure 77 Tightening the thumbscrews
.
Removing a VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node from the Rack
To remove the node from a rack:
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Disconnect the cabling.
3.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
261
4.
Remove the node from the rack. For more information, refer to the documentation that ships with
the rack mounting option.
5.
Place the node on a sturdy, level surface.
Removing a VLS6600 Node from the Rack
To remove the node from a rack:
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6600 Node from the Rack.
3.
Disconnect the cabling and remove the node from the rack. For more information, refer to the
documentation that ships with the rack mounting kit.
4.
Place the node on a sturdy, level surface.
Removing a VLS6800 Node from the Rack
To remove the node from a rack:
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
3.
Disconnect the cabling and remove the node from the rack. For more information, refer to the
documentation that ships with the rack mounting option.
4.
Place the node on a sturdy, level surface.
Removing the VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node Access Panel
WARNING!
Pressing the Power on/Standby button sets the node to the standby position, which removes power
from most areas of the node. However, portions of the power supply and some internal circuitry
remain active until the AC power cord is removed.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to cool
before touching them.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
262
Component Replacement
CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. Properly ground yourself before beginning
any installation procedure.
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack.
3.
Lift up on the hood latch handle which slides the panel toward the rear of the unit.
4.
Lift up the panel to remove it.
Removing the VLS6600 Node Access Panel
WARNING!
Pressing the Power on/Standby button sets the node to the standby position, which removes power
from most areas of the node. However, portions of the power supply and some internal circuitry
remain active until the AC power cord is removed.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to cool
before touching them.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. Properly ground yourself before beginning
any installation procedure.
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6600 Node from the Rack.
3.
Use the T-15 Torx screwdriver attached to the rear of the node to loosen the security screw on
the hood latch.
4.
Lift up on the hood latch handle and remove the access panel.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
263
Removing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel
WARNING!
Pressing the Power on/Standby button sets the node to the standby position, which removes power
from most areas of the node. However, portions of the power supply and some internal circuitry
remain active until the AC power cord is removed.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to cool
before touching.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. Properly ground yourself before beginning
any installation procedure.
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
3.
Unlock the access panel latch.
4.
Lift up on the latch, and remove the access panel.
Figure 78 Removing the access panel
.
264
Component Replacement
Installing the VLS6100, VLS6200, or VLS6500 Node Access Panel
1.
Set the access panel on top of the node about a ¾ inch (0.2 inch for the VLS6200) from the
opening with the hood latch open.
2.
Engage the anchoring pin with the corresponding hole in the latch.
3.
Push down on the hood latch.
4.
Slide the access panel into the closed position.
Installing the VLS6600 Node Access Panel
1.
Set the access panel on top of the node about a 1/2 inch from the opening with the hood latch
open.
2.
Push down on the hood latch.
3.
Slide the access panel into the closed position.
4.
Use the T-15 Torx screwdriver attached to the rear of the node to tighten the security screw on
the hood latch.
Installing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel
1.
Place the access panel on top of the node with the latch open. Allow the panel to extend past
the rear of the node approximately 1.25 cm (0.5 inches).
2.
Push down on the latch.
3.
Slide the access panel into the closed position.
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node Component Replacement
SATA Hard Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
NOTE:
SATA hard drive LED functionality and hot-plug capability are not currently supported.
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Press the drive latch release button (1).
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
265
3.
Pull the hard drive out of the node by the latch handle (2).
Figure 79 Removing a node hard drive
.
NOTE:
Because the system disks in the node use software RAID to mirror the two drives, the node cannot
boot up from drive 1; a bootable drive must be installed in drive bay 0. To replace drive 0: remove
drive 0, remove drive 1, install previous drive 1 into drive bay 0, then install the new, blank drive
into drive bay 1.
To replace the component:
1.
Pull out the latch handle out as far as it can go and slide the drive into the bay until the latch
mechanism engages the chassis. Then, firmly push in the latch handle to lock the drive in the
drive bay.
2.
Power on the node. See Powering on the VLS6000–series System.
On reboot, the replacement drive is automatically configured to RAID 1 — no administrator
action is required.
CD-ROM Drive
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
NOTE:
The ejector button for the CD-ROM drive is recessed to prevent accidental ejection; it may
be helpful to use a small, blunt object, such as a pen, to push the ejector button.
2.
266
Press the ejector button in firmly until the CD-ROM drive ejects (1).
Component Replacement
3.
Pull the CD-ROM drive out of the node.
Figure 80 Ejecting the CD-ROM drive
.
To replace the component:
1.
Carefully align the connector on the rear of the drive with the connector on the CD-ROM/diskette
drive interface board.
2.
Slide the drive into the bay until it clicks.
Power Supply
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.
2.
Press the power supply release lever, and then pull the power supply from the node.
Figure 81 Removing a node power supply
.
To replace the component:
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment, do not connect the power cord to
the power supply until the power supply is installed.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
267
1.
Remove the protective cover from the connector pins on the power supply.
2.
Slide the power supply into the bay until it clicks.
Figure 82 Installing an AC power supply
.
3.
Use the strain relief clip to secure the power cord (Figure 83).
Figure 83 Placing the power cord in the strain relief clip
.
4.
Connect the power cord to the power supply.
5.
Be sure that the power supply LED is green.
Power Supply Zone Fan Module
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
1.
Power off the node.
2.
Extend or remove the node from the rack.
3.
Remove the access panel.
4.
Remove the SATA cable from the cable clip to avoid damaging the cable.
268
Component Replacement
5.
Push levers on either side of the middle fan toward the front of the chassis (1). Rock the fan module
slightly and pull up and out of the node.
Figure 84 Removing the node power supply zone fan module
.
CAUTION:
When replacing the component, be sure the power converter module, which is located just in front
of the fan module, is properly seated in the node chassis.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
Processor Zone Fan Module
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
1.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack.
2.
Remove the access panel. See Removing the VLS Node Access Panel.
3.
Loosen the single thumbscrew that secures the processor fan module to the node (1).
4.
Push on the sheet metal tab near the thumbscrew to separate the fan tray connector from the
system board connector (2).
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
269
5.
Slide the component out the front of the node.
Figure 85 Removing the processor zone fan module
.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
DIMM
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack.
3.
Remove the access panel. See Removing the VLS Node Access Panel.
4.
Open the DIMM slot latches (1).
5.
Remove the DIMM.
Figure 86 Removing the node DIMM
.
CAUTION:
Use only Compaq branded or HP DIMMs. DIMMs from other sources may adversely affect data
integrity.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
270
Component Replacement
NOTE:
DIMMs do not seat fully if turned the wrong way.
When replacing a DIMM, align the DIMM with the slot and insert the DIMM firmly, pressing down
until the DIMM snaps into place. When fully seated, the DIMM slot latches lock into place.
VLS6200 Node Component Replacement
SATA Hard Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
NOTE:
The node contains one of several possible hard drives. The replacement hard drive must be the same
capacity as the original hard drive; refer to the label on the front of the original hard drive for the
correct supported replacement capacity and part number.
1.
Press the drive latch release button (1).
2.
Pull the hard drive (3) out of the node by the latch handle (2).
Figure 87 Removing a Node Hard Drive
.
To replace the component, pull out the latch handle (2) out as far as it can go and slide the drive into
the bay until the latch mechanism engages the chassis. Then, firmly push in the latch handle to lock
the drive in the drive bay.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
271
Figure 88 Preparing the Node Hard Drive
.
Figure 89 Installing the Node Hard Drive
.
NOTE:
The replacement drive is automatically configured to RAID 1; no administrator action is required.
DVD-CD Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
Power off the node.
NOTE:
The ejector button for the CD-ROM drive is recessed to prevent accidental ejection; it may
be helpful to use a small, flat, blunt object, such as a key or pen, to push the ejector button.
272
Component Replacement
2.
Press the ejector button in firmly until the DVD-CD drive ejects (1).
3.
Pull the DVD-CD drive out of the node (2).
To replace the component:
1.
Carefully align the connector on the rear of the drive with the connector on the DVD-CD drive
interface board.
2.
Slide the drive into the bay until it clicks.
Power Supply
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
273
2.
Press the power supply release lever (1), and then pull the power supply from the node.
To replace the component:
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment, do not connect the power cord to
the power supply until the power supply is installed.
1.
Remove the protective cover from the connector pins on the power supply.
2.
Slide the power supply into the bay until it clicks.
3.
Use the strain relief clip to secure the power cord.
4.
Connect the power cord to the power supply.
5.
Be sure that the power supply LED is green.
6.
Be sure that the front panel external health LED is green.
274
Component Replacement
Fan Module
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
1.
Power off the node.
2.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack or Removing
a VLS Node from the Rack.
3.
Remove the access panel.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
275
4.
276
To remove fan module 1:
a.
Remove the power supply air baffle.
b.
Remove fan module 1.
Component Replacement
5.
To remove fan module 2 or 3:
a.
Remove the power supply air baffle.
b.
Remove fan module 2 or 3.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
IMPORTANT:
After installing the fan module, firmly press the top of the module connectors to ensure the connectors
are seated properly.
FBDIMM
1.
Power off the node.
2.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the Node from the Rack or Removing
a VLS Node from the Rack.
3.
Remove the access panel.
4.
Open the FBDIMM slot latches.
5.
Remove the FBDIMM.
CAUTION:
Use only Compaq branded or HP FBDIMMs. FBDIMMs from other sources may adversely affect data
integrity.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
277
NOTE:
FBDIMMs do not seat fully if turned the wrong way.
When replacing a FBDIMM, align the FBDIMM with the slot and insert the FBDIMM firmly (1), pressing
down until the FBDIMM snaps into place. When fully seated, the FBDIMM slot latches (2) lock into
place.
VLS6600 Node Component Replacement
SATA Hard Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
278
Press the drive latch release button (1).
Component Replacement
2.
Pull the hard drive (3) out of the node by the latch handle (2).
Figure 90 Removing a node hard drive
.
To replace the component, pull out the latch handle (2) out as far as it can go and slide the drive into
the bay until the latch mechanism engages the chassis. Then, firmly push in the latch handle to lock
the drive in the drive bay.
Figure 91 Installing a node hard drive
.
NOTE:
The replacement drive is automatically configured to RAID 1 — no administrator action is required.
DVD-CD Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
279
1.
Power off the node.
NOTE:
The ejector button for the CD-ROM drive is recessed to prevent accidental ejection; it may
be helpful to use a small, flat, blunt object, such as a key or pen, to push the ejector button.
2.
Press the ejector button in firmly until the DVD-CD drive ejects (1).
Figure 92 Removing the DVD-CD drive
.
3.
Pull the DVD-CD drive out of the node.
To replace the component:
1.
Carefully align the connector on the rear of the drive with the connector on the DVD-CD drive
interface board.
2.
Slide the drive into the bay until it clicks.
Figure 93 Installing the DVD-CD drive
.
280
Component Replacement
Power Supply
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.
2.
Press the power supply release lever, and then pull the power supply from the node.
Figure 94 Removing a node power supply
.
To replace the component:
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment, do not connect the power cord to
the power supply until the power supply is installed.
1.
Remove the protective cover from the connector pins on the power supply.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
281
2.
Slide the power supply into the bay until it clicks.
Figure 95 Installing a node power supply
.
3.
Connect the power cord to the power supply.
4.
Be sure that the power supply LED is green.
5.
Be sure that the front panel external health LED is green.
Fan
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
NOTE:
The server supports variable fan speeds. The fans operate at minimum speed until a temperature
change requires a fan speed increase to cool the server.
The server shuts down in the following scenarios:
• At POST:
• The BIOS suspends the server for 5 minutes if it detects a cautionary temperature level. If the
cautionary temperature level is still detected after 5 minutes, the BIOS performs an orderly
shutdown and enters Standby mode.
• The BIOS performs an orderly shutdown if two or more fans have failed.
• The server performs an immediate shutdown if it detects a critical temperature level.
IMPORTANT:
An immediate shutdown is a hardware-controlled function and it overrides any firmware or
software actions.
282
Component Replacement
• In the operating system:
• The Health Driver performs an orderly shutdown if it detects a cautionary temperature level. If
the server detects a critical temperature level before the orderly shutdown occurs, the server
performs an immediate shutdown. Additionally, the Health Driver performs an orderly shutdown
if more than one fan is failed or removed.
• When Thermal Shutdown is disabled in RBSU, the server performs an immediate shutdown if
it detects a critical temperature level.
IMPORTANT:
An immediate shutdown is a hardware-controlled function and it overrides any firmware or
software actions.
1.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6600 Node from the Rack or
Removing a VLS6600 Node from the Rack..
2.
Remove the access panel.
3.
Pull up on the fan to remove it.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
IMPORTANT:
After installing the fan, firmly press the top of the fan to ensure the connectors are seated properly.
FBDIMM
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6600 Node from the Rack or
Removing a VLS6600 Node from the Rack.
3.
Remove the access panel.
4.
Move the hard drive cables.
5.
Remove the air baffle.
6.
Open the FBDIMM slot latches.
7.
Remove the FBDIMM.
CAUTION:
Use only Compaq branded or HP FBDIMMs. FBDIMMs from other sources may adversely affect data
integrity.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
283
NOTE:
FBDIMMs do not seat fully if turned the wrong way.
When replacing a FBDIMM, align the FBDIMM with the slot and insert the FBDIMM firmly (1), pressing
down until the FBDIMM snaps into place. When fully seated, the FBDIMM slot latches (2) lock into
place.
Figure 96 Installing the node FBDIMM
.
VLS6800 Node Component Replacement
SCSI Hard Drive
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
Press the ejector lever release button to unlock the ejector lever on the hard drive.
2.
Pull the ejector lever open to release the drive.
284
Component Replacement
3.
Slide the hard drive out of the cage.
Figure 97 Removing a hard drive
.
To replace the component:
1.
Press the ejector lever release button on the replacement hard drive to unlock the ejector lever.
2.
Insert the hot-plug SCSI hard drive into the drive cage. Be sure that the drive seats firmly into the
connector on the SCSI backplane.
3.
Close the ejector lever to secure the drive.
Figure 98 Installing a hard drive
.
The replacement drive is automatically configured to RAID 1 — no administrator action is required.
NOTE:
The hard drive online LED on the replacement drive flashes green or amber, indicating that the replaced
drive is being rebuilt from the data stored on the other hard drive. See Front Panel LEDs and Buttons.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
285
Diskette Drive
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Use the Torx T-15 tool to press the ejection button for the diskette drive , and pull the diskette
drive out of the drive bay. See Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only).
Figure 99 Removing the diskette drive
.
To replace the component:
1.
Insert the diskette drive into the drive bay until it seats.
2.
Power on the node. See Powering on the VLS6000–series System.
DVD-CD Drive
1.
286
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
Component Replacement
2.
Use the Torx T-15 tool to press the ejection button for the DVD-CD drive, and pull the DVD-CD
drive out of the drive bay. See Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only).
Figure 100 Removing the DVD-CD drive
.
To replace the component:
1.
Insert the DVD-CD drive into the drive bay until it seats.
2.
Power on the node. See Powering on the VLS6000–series System.
Power Supply
CAUTION:
To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage, do not operate the node unless all bays are
populated with either a component or a blank.
1.
If present, remove the Torx T-15 shipping screw from the bottom of the node with the Torx T-15
tool. See Locating and Removing the Torx T-15 Tool (VLS6800 node only).
2.
Press the release button on the locking lever upward.
3.
Pull down on the locking lever.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
287
4.
Remove the power supply from the bay.
Figure 101 Removing a power supply
.
To replace the component:
1.
Remove the protective cover from the connector pins on the new power supply, if present.
2.
Open the lever by pushing the lever release button upward.
3.
Slide the power supply into the empty bay until it locks into place.
4.
Close the locking lever.
5.
(Optional) For shipment or for optional added security, install the retaining screw, which ships
in a plastic bag with the power supply option kit. The pre-drilled hole for the screw is located on
the bottom of the node.
6.
Be sure that the power supply power (green) LED is illuminated and the fault (amber) LED is not.
Fan
CAUTION:
Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel. Operating the node without the
access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage.
1.
Extend or remove the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
2.
Identify the non-functioning fan by locating the amber LED on the QuickFind Diagnostic Display
on the top of the access panel.
3.
Remove the access panel. See Removing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel.
4.
Identify the non-functioning fan by locating the amber LED at the top of the failed fan.
288
Component Replacement
5.
Remove the non-functioning fan.
Figure 102 Removing a fan
.
To replace the component:
1.
Install the replacement fan.
2.
Be sure that the LED on the replacement fan is green.
3.
Reinstall the node access panel. See Installing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel.
4.
Press the rail-release levers at the front of both node rails and slide the node into the rack.
5.
Secure the node in the rack by tightening the thumbscrews.
Processor Memory Board
1.
Power off the node. See Powering Off the System.
2.
Extend the node from the rack. See Extending the VLS6800 Node from the Rack.
3.
Remove the access panel. See Removing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
289
4.
Remove the processor memory board.
Figure 103 Removing a processor memory board
.
To replace the component:
1.
Install the processor memory board.
2.
Re-install the node access panel. See Installing the VLS6800 Node Access Panel.
3.
Press the rail-release levers at the front of both node rails and slide the node into the rack.
4.
Secure the node in the rack by tightening the thumbscrews.
5.
Power on the node. See Powering on the VLS6000–series System.
Processor Power Module
1.
290
Remove the processor memory board. See Processor Memory Board.
Component Replacement
2.
Remove the processor power module from the processor memory board.
Figure 104 Removing a processor power module
.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
DIMM
1.
Remove the processor memory board. See Processor Memory Board.
2.
Open the DIMM slot latches (1).
3.
Remove the DIMM (2).
Figure 105 Removing a DIMM
.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
291
CAUTION:
Use only Compaq branded or HP DIMMs. DIMMs from other sources may adversely affect data
integrity.
To replace the component, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE:
DIMMs do not seat fully if turned the wrong way.
When replacing a DIMM, align the DIMM with the slot and insert the DIMM firmly, pressing down
until the DIMM snaps into place. When fully seated, the DIMM slot latches lock into place.
NOTE:
Be sure all DIMM retention clips are in the closed/locked position before re-installing the processor
memory board into the node.
Processor
CAUTION:
To prevent possible node malfunction and damage to the equipment, replace the processors with the
same make and type of processor.
CAUTION:
If reusing the heatsink, clean and apply thermal grease to prevent thermal failure. The syringe in this
kit contains 1.0 gm (0.5 ml) or 0.5 gm (0.25 ml) of grease designed for use as a thermal interface
between the processor and the heatsink.
1.
292
Remove the processor memory board. See Processor Memory Board.
Component Replacement
2.
Remove the processor heatsink.
Figure 106 Removing the processor heatsink
.
3.
Open the ZIF socket lever and remove the processor.
Figure 107 Removing a processor
.
To replace the processor:
1.
Open the ZIF socket lever. Be sure the lever is in the fully open position.
2.
Set the processor into the ZIF socket, and hold it in place while closing and latching the socket
lever. Verify that the processor is fully seated in the socket.
CAUTION:
Failure to fully seat and latch the processor in the ZIF socket might result in damage to the
processor and/or processor memory board.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
293
3.
If reusing the processor and heatsink, clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the heatsink
using an alcohol pad (included with the thermal grease kit) or a clean dry wipe to remove all
traces of the old thermal grease. Allow the alcohol to evaporate before continuing.
CAUTION:
The processor should be installed on the processor memory board before cleaning to prevent
damaging the pins.
4.
Squeeze one-half of the contents if the syringe contains 1.0 gm (0.5 ml) or the entire contents if
the syringe contains 0.5 gm (0.25 ml) evenly onto the top of the processor.
5.
Install the heatsink, ensuring that it is properly seated before latching it in place.
6.
Install the processor memory board. See Processor Memory Board.
VLS6000–series Disk Array Component Replacement
Hard Drive
CAUTION:
Before removing a hard drive from the disk array, be sure that a replacement hard drive is immediately
available. Removing a hard drive causes a significant change in the airflow within the disk array,
and the disk array could overheat if a replacement hard drive is not installed within a relatively short
time.
Be careful when replacing a drive. The drives in the disk array are fragile.
1.
Press the drive latch release button.
2.
Pull the drive out of the disk array by its latch handle about 3 cm (1 inch) so that it is disconnected
from the backplane connector.
CAUTION:
A drive with a rapidly spinning disk can be difficult to hold securely. To decrease the chance
of dropping the drive, do not remove it completely from the disk array until the disk has
stopped rotating. This usually takes a few seconds.
294
Component Replacement
3.
When the disk is no longer spinning, remove the drive from the disk array.
Figure 108 Removing a disk array hard drive
.
To replace the component:
1.
Pull out the latch handle on the drive out as far as it can go.
2.
Slide the replacement drive into the bay until it can go no further. About 1 cm (0.5 inch) of the
drive protrudes from the bay.
3.
Push the release lever all the way in. This action installs the drive completely in the bay and seats
it firmly against the connector in the disk array.
4.
Firmly close the latch handle to lock the drive in the drive bay.
5.
Observe the drive status LEDs to confirm that the replacement drive is functioning correctly. See
Front Panel LEDs.
Fan Module
CAUTION:
Before removing a fan module from the disk array, be sure that a replacement fan module is
immediately available. Removing a fan module causes a significant change in the airflow within the
disk array, and the disk array could overheat if a replacement fan module is not installed within a
relatively short time.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
295
1.
Lift the release lever and pull the fan module out of the enclosure.
Figure 109 Removing a disk array fan module
.
2.
Slide the replacement fan module into the disk array until it is firmly seated in the disk array.
3.
Confirm that the fan module starts operating immediately and that the status LED is illuminated
green.
Power Supply
CAUTION:
Before removing a power supply from the disk array, be sure that a replacement power supply is
immediately available. Removing a power supply causes a significant change in the airflow within
the disk array, and the disk array could overheat if a replacement power supply is not installed within
a relatively short time.
1.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the defective power supply unit.
2.
Squeeze the handle and the release lever together and pull the defective power supply unit out
of the disk array by the handle.
Figure 110 Removing a disk array power supply
.
3.
Insert the replacement power supply unit into the empty bay until it is firmly seated in the disk
array.
4.
Connect the AC power cord.
5.
Confirm that the status LED on the replacement power supply is illuminated green.
296
Component Replacement
Controller Module
1.
Stop backup application data transfers.
2.
Power off the disk array. See Powering Off VLS6000 Disk Arrays.
3.
Disconnect the SCSI cable from the VHDCI connector on the controller module.
4.
Squeeze the release lever and the finger hook together while pulling the controller module out
of the disk array.
Figure 111 Removing the disk RAID controller module
.
5.
Insert the replacement controller module into the disk array until it is firmly seated in the disk
array.
6.
Connect the SCSI cable to the VHDCI connector on the controller module.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the VHDCI connector, do not use excessive force when tightening the
thumbscrews on the connector.
7.
Confirm that the status LED on the replacement module is illuminated green.
8.
Power on the disk array. See Powering on VLS6000 Disk Arrays.
9.
Power on the node. See Powering on the VLS6000–series System.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
297
298
Component Replacement
14 Disaster Recovery
This section details the VLS disaster recovery procedures. It includes recovering from operating system
failures, disk array failures, and node failures.
Recovering from Operating System Failure
Re-install the operating system if it becomes corrupted or is lost as a result of node RAID volume failure.
CAUTION:
Only install the VLS operating system on the node hard drives. Installing any other operating system
on the node hard drives voids the warranty.
NOTE:
The VLS operating system contains all the hardware device drivers, firmware, and utilities required
to operate the VLS.
To re-install the operating system:
1.
Connect a keyboard to the keyboard connector.
2.
Connect a monitor to the video connector.
3.
Insert the VLS Quick Restore CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-CD drive.
The VLS Quick Restore CD auto starts.
4.
Press R on the keyboard to start the re-installation.
The re-installation takes 30 minutes or less to complete. The screen may freeze during the last
10 minutes of the re-installation. This is normal.
The VLS Quick Restore CD is ejected and the system reboots when the re-installation is complete.
5.
Restore the VLS. Systems running VLS firmware version 3.2 restore differently from systems running
versions 2.x or 3.1. See below.
Restoring a VLS running firmware version 3.2:
The warm failover process automatically restores the node to its previous configuration including the
serial numbers, front-end Fibre Channel WWPNs, virtual device configuration, and licenses. No
reconfiguration is required. See Warm Failover.
Restoring a VLS running firmware version 2.x or 3.1:
1.
Restore the configuration settings. See Restoring the Configuration Settings.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
299
2.
If one or more capacity and/or deduplication licenses had been added to the VLS, re-install the
VLS capacity and deduplication licenses. See Re-installing the VLS Licenses.
The node is now fully restored.
Restoring the Configuration Settings
The VLS virtual library configuration and network settings can be quickly restored from the configuration
file created by performing Saving Configuration Settings. See Restoring the Virtual Library Configuration
from a Configuration File.
If a configuration file was not created, you must reconfigure the network settings, and rebuild the
virtual library and virtual drive configurations. The cartridge configurations, however, do not have to
be rebuilt, as they are stored on the disk arrays. See Rebuilding the Virtual Library Configuration.
Restoring the Virtual Library Configuration from a Configuration File
Restoring the virtual library configuration from the configuration file restores the virtual library and
virtual drive configurations, and administrative and network settings (including the VLS serial number
and persistent Fibre Channel port WWPNs).
NOTE:
Configuration files are not backwards compatible with earlier firmware versions. For example, a
configuration file created on a system running firmware version 3.1.2 will not work on the system at
firmware version 3.1.0. Make sure your system is at the version that created the configuration file
before restoring the configuration.
To restore the virtual library and network settings from the configuration file:
1.
Set the network settings so you can open a Command View VLS session. See Setting the Network
Settings.
2.
Select Chassis in the navigation tree in Command View VLS.
3.
Click Restore Config under Maintenance Tasks. The Restore Config window opens.
4.
Click Browse.
5.
Locate and select the desired configuration file.
6.
Click Open.
7.
Click Next Step. A message displays indicating that the file was uploaded successfully.
8.
Click Next to start loading the configuration file.
After the configuration file is loaded, the system automatically applies the configuration and
reboots.
Rebuilding the Virtual Library Configuration
To reconfigure the network settings and rebuild the virtual library configuration:
1.
Set the network settings so you can open a Command View VLS session. See Setting the Network
Settings.
2.
Rebuild the virtual library and virtual drive configurations and re-enter your other configuration
settings, such as the notification alert settings. See Configuration, Management, and Monitoring.
300
Disaster Recovery
NOTE:
If the node system board was ever changed and the virtual library configuration and network settings
were not saved to a configuration file, the persistent VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port
WWPNs are lost and cannot be recovered. The VLS firmware will automatically generate a new VLS
serial number and new Fibre Channel port WWPNs based on the node system board's MAC address.
If this occurs, any capacity licenses installed on the VLS will no longer work, as they only work with
the VLS serial number for which they were issued. You can obtain new capacity licenses from HP
technical support using the new VLS serial number. You will also need to reconfigure your SAN to
reflect the new Fibre Channel port WWPNs.
Re-installing the VLS Licenses
If one or more capacity bundles (or existing disk arrays), deduplication licenses, and/or replication
licenses were added to the VLS, you must re-install the VLS licenses.
To re-install the VLS licenses from Command View VLS (HP recommended method):
1.
Locate the emails containing the license keys.
Your VLS license keys were emailed to you when you originally requested them. If you no longer
have these emails, contact HP technical support to obtain new license keys.
2.
Log into Command View VLS.
3.
Follow the Installing Additional Licenses procedure beginning with Step 9.
To re-install the VLS licenses from Command View TL:
1.
Locate the emails containing the license keys.
Your VLS license keys were emailed to you when you originally requested them. If you no longer
have these emails, contact HP technical support to obtain new license keys.
2.
Log into Command View TL.
3.
Delete the VLS licenses in Command View TL.
4.
Ignore the message saying to reboot the device.
5.
Re-install the VLS license keys. See the HP OpenView Command View for TL User Guide.
Warm Failover
After any configuration or license change, the VLS automatically saves (within one hour) the updated
configuration and licenses to a hidden virtual cartridge stored on the back-end disk arrays. When
you replace the node or node hard drives, the VLS uses this information to automatically restore the
system to a configuration identical to what it had before. This automated process eliminates the need
to manually restore the configuration.
Recovering from a VLS6000 Disk Array RAID Volume Failure
If two or more hard drives have failed in a single disk array RAID 5 volume, a disk array RAID volume
failure has occurred. If three or more hard drives have failed in a single disk array RAID 6 volume,
a disk array RAID volume failure has occurred. See Figure 39 for RAID volume configuration
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
301
information. A disk array RAID volume failure will corrupt all the data stored on the VLS storage pool
using that RAID volume, making it unrecoverable.
NOTE:
Only perform this procedure if a RAID volume failure has actually occurred. Other factors can result
in a false RAID volume failure being reported, such as a disk array being powered down or the SCSI
cabling to a disk array being disconnected at either end.
To recover from a disk array RAID volume failure:
1.
Repair the failed RAID volume (for example, replace the failed hard drives in the RAID volume).
See Hard Drive.
2.
Erase all the virtual media from the disk arrays and rebuild all the RAID volumes:
3.
a.
Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree, then select the storage pool that needs recovery.
b.
Click Rebuild Storage Pool in the task bar.
c.
Click Rebuild.
d.
Click Yes to confirm.
Recreate the cartridges that existed on the VLS.
VLS cartridge configurations are stored on the disk array(s) and have been erased.
Recovering from a Node RAID Volume Failure
To recover from a node RAID volume failure, which occurs when both node hard drives fail:
1.
Replace the failed node hard drives.
2.
Install the operating system on the new hard drives and restore the VLS. See Recovering from
Operating System Failure.
302
Disaster Recovery
15 Support and Other Resources
Related Information
Documents
HP provides the following documentation to support this product:
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system release notes
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system solutions guide
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system user guide
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system service guide
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system node installation posters
• HP StorageWorks 6000–series virtual library system disk array installation poster
See the Documentation CD provided with the VLS and our website for related documentation.
Websites
• HP website:
http://www.hp.com
• HP StorageWorks VLS Support:
http://hp.com/support/vls
• HP StorageWorks VLS Manuals:
http://www.hp.com/support/vls/manuals
• HP StorageWorks Sizer:
http://www.hp.com/go/storageworks/sizer
• HP Enterprise Backup Solutions Overview and Features:
http://www.hp.com/go/ebs
• HP Data Storage:
http://www.hp.com/go/storage
• HP Drivers and Software:
http://www.hp.com/support/downloads
• HP Partner Locator:
http://www.hp.com/service_locator
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
303
Document Conventions and Symbols
Table 15 Document Conventions
Convention
Element
Blue text: Table 15
Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses
Blue, underlined text: http://www.hp.com
Web site addresses
• Keys that are pressed
Bold text
Italic text
• Text typed into a GUI element, such as a box
• GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu
and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Text emphasis
• File and directory names
Monospace text
• System output
• Code
• Commands, their arguments, and argument values
Monospace, italic text
Monospace, bold text
• Code variables
• Command variables
Emphasized monospace text
WARNING!
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.
CAUTION:
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
NOTE:
Provides additional information.
The following equipment symbols may be found on hardware to which this guide pertains. They have
the following meanings:
WARNING!
These symbols, which mark an enclosed surface or area of the equipment, indicate the
presence of electrical shock hazards. The enclosed area contains no operator serviceable parts.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock hazards, do not open this enclosure.
304
Support and Other Resources
WARNING!
These symbols, which mark an RJ-45 receptacle, indicate a network interface connection.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug
telephone or telecommunications connectors into this receptacle.
WARNING!
These symbols, which mark a surface or area of the equipment, indicate the presence of
a hot surface or hot component. Contact with this surface could result in injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before
touching.
WARNING!
Power supplies or systems marked with these symbols indicate the presence of multiple
sources of power.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock, remove all power cords to
completely disconnect power from the power supplies and systems.
WARNING!
Any product or assembly marked with these symbols indicates that the component exceeds
the recommended weight for one individual to handle safely.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, observe local
occupational health and safety requirements and guidelines for manually handling material.
Rack Stability
Rack stability protects personnel and equipment.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
305
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:
• Extend leveling jacks to the floor.
• Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
• Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
• In multiple-rack installations, fasten racks together securely.
• Extend only one rack component at a time. Racks can become unstable if more than one component
is extended.
Contacting HP
Before you Contact HP
Be sure to have the following information available before calling HP:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Technical support registration number (if applicable)
Product serial numbers
Product model names and numbers
Applicable error messages
Operating system type and revision level
Detailed, specific questions
HP Contact Information
For the name of the nearest HP authorized reseller:
• See the Contact HP worldwide (in English) webpage (http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/
wwcontact_us.html).
• In the United States, call 1-800-345-1518.
• In Canada, call 1-800-263-5868.
For HP technical support:
• In the United States, for contact options see the Contact HP United States webpage (http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/contact_us.html). To contact HP by phone:
• Call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836). This service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week. For continuous quality improvement, calls may be recorded or monitored.
• If you have purchased a Care Pack (service upgrade), call 1-800-633-3600. For more information about Care Packs, refer to the HP website (http://www.hp.com/hps).
• In other locations, see the Contact HP worldwide (in English) webpage (http:// welcome.hp.com/
country/us/en/wwcontact.html).
Subscription Service
HP strongly recommends that customers register online using the Subscriber's choice web site: http:/
/www.hp.com/go-e-updates.
306
Support and Other Resources
Subscribing to this service provides you with e-mail updates on the latest product enhancements,
newest driver versions, and firmware documentation updates as well as instant access to numerous
other product resources.
After subscribing, locate your products by selecting Business support and then Storage under Product
Category.
Customer Self Repair
HP customer self repair (CSR) programs allow you to repair your StorageWorks product. If a CSR
part needs replacing, HP ships the part directly to you so that you can install it at your convenience.
Some parts do not qualify for CSR. Your HP-authorized service provider will determine whether a
repair can be accomplished by CSR.
For more information about CSR, contact your local service provider. For North America, see the CSR
website:
http://www.hp.com/go/selfrepair
HP Insight Remote Support software
HP strongly recommends that you install HP Insight Remote Support software to complete the installation
or upgrade of your product and to enable enhanced delivery of your HP Warranty, HP Care Pack
Service or HP contractual support agreement. HP Insight Remote Support supplements your monitoring,
24x7 to ensure maximum system availability by providing intelligent event diagnosis, and automatic,
secure submission of hardware event notifications to HP, which will initiate a fast and accurate
resolution, based on your product’s service level. Notifications may be sent to your authorized HP
Channel Partner for on-site service, if configured and available in your country. The software is
available in two variants:
• HP Insight Remote Support Standard: This software supports server and storage devices and is
optimized for environments with 1-50 servers. Ideal for customers who can benefit from proactive
notification, but do not need proactive service delivery and integration with a management platform.
• HP Insight Remote Support Advanced: This software provides comprehensive remote monitoring
and proactive service support for nearly all HP servers, storage, network, and SAN environments,
plus selected non-HP servers that have a support obligation with HP. It is integrated with HP Systems
Insight Manager. A dedicated server is recommended to host both HP Systems Insight Manager
and HP Insight Remote Support Advanced.
Details for both versions are available at:
http://www.hp.com/go/insightremotesupport
To download the software for free, go to Software Depot:
http://www.software.hp.com
Select Insight Remote Support from the menu on the right.
Product Warranties
For information about HP StorageWorks product warranties, see the warranty information website:
http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
307
Documentation Feedback
HP welcomes your feedback.
To make comments and suggestions about product documentation, please send a message to
[email protected] All submissions become the property of HP.
308
Support and Other Resources
A Troubleshooting
This appendix describes some common issues you may encounter while configuring or using the VLS
including automigration/replication and deduplication issues.
VLS Common Issues
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
Increase the maximum number of
LUNs per device the operating system is configured to see. To change
the maximum LUN per device setting:
Some of the virtual devices are not
detected by the operating system
when it scans the SAN for new
hardware.
There are more LUNs on the FC
host ports than the operating system
is configured to see. Once the
maximum number of LUNs on a
device is detected, the operating
system stops looking for more
LUNs. In the case of the VLS, the
operating system considers each
FC host port to be one device. So,
if the maximum number of LUNs an
operating system is configured to
see is eight, the operating system
will only see LUN0, LUN1, ...,
LUN7 and will not see LUN8,
LUN9, ..., and up on each FC host
port. By default Windows and HPUX hosts can see a maximum of 8
LUNs per FC host port.
• For Microsoft Windows—See
http://support.microsoft.com/
default.aspx?scid=kb%3benus%3b310072.
• For HP-UX—The value can only
be changed for HP-UX versions
11.31 and later. Increase the
number of LUNs per bus on the
HP-UX server by entering #
scsimgr set_attr -a
max_lunid=32. You can view
the connected IO by entering #
ioscan -m lun.
You cannot create legacy DSFs
for LUN IDs above 7; use persistent device special files instead.
See the HP-UX documentation
for more information.
• For other operating systems—See the operating system
web site.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
309
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
Use the VLS's LUN masking feature
to restrict the number of virtual
devices the host sees on the VLS FC
host ports, so it only sees the virtual
devices it needs to see. Then, use
the VLS's LUN mapping feature to
assign LUNs to the virtual devices
the host can see, such that the virtual device LUN numbers include a
LUN0 and no gaps in the LUN
numbering. See LUN Masking
(v3.x) and LUN Mapping (v3.x) for
instructions.
There is a gap in the LUN numbering on the FC host port. Most operating systems will stop looking for
virtual devices on an FC host port
once a gap in the LUN numbering
is detected. For example, if LUN0,
LUN1, and LUN3 are mapped to
an FC host port, the operating system will see LUN0 and LUN1.
When it does not find a LUN2, it
will assume there are no more
LUNs on the port and stop looking.
310
Troubleshooting
Remove the gap in the LUN numbering by editing the host's LUN mapping (see LUN Mapping (v3.x)), or
if a virtual device has been destroyed on the VLS, creating a gap
in the LUN numbering, restart the
VLS device emulations. The VLS
firmware will reassign LUNs to the
virtual devices as necessary to remove any gaps in the LUN numbering. See Restarting VLS Device
Emulations.
Symptom
The virtual tape drive devices either
disappear or move to a different
operating system path name
(\\.\Tape0) on a Windows host
node - but the Windows Device
Manager still shows these virtual
tape drive devices as being enabled and at the original BusNumber/TargetID/LUN Location.
Possible causes
Solution
There are two levels of logical
device binding in the Windows
OS. At the first level of logical
device binding, the FC HBA binds
the FC WWPN and FC LUN (Fibre
Channel layer devices) to a SCSI
Bus Number, SCSI Target ID, and
SCSI LUN (SCSI layer device). At
the second level, the Windows Removable Storage Manager (RSM)
will bind the SCSI Bus Number,
SCSI Target ID, and SCSI LUN
(SCSI layer device) to an OS
\\.\Tape# path name. Only tape
drives are subject to this second
binding level.
Delete the Windows NtmsData
database and put the RSM into the
Disabled state using the following
procedure :
NOTE:
If you have built and connected
Windows nodes before installing
the VLS system, the Windows
tape device paths can break,
change, or disappear when RSM
is run. (Windows runs RSM by
default.) When RSM initially
discovers any removable storage
device, such as a tape drive, it
will make an entry in NtmsData
database. Once a tape drive is
listed in this NtmsData database,
the Windows OS can potentially
either break the second level OS
path name bind or re-bind it to
a different OS path name, even
with RSM in a "Disabled" state.
1.
Disconnect the Windows node
from the SAN (label and unplug all FC cables).
2.
Delete all files and folders under the "./system32/NtmsData" folder (location of the
system32 folder varies
between Windows versions).
3.
In the Microsoft Computer
Management window, enable
and start the RSM.
4.
Bring up the Removable Storage utility in the Microsoft
Computer Management window.
5.
Verify there are no Tape or
Library devices listed (other
than the direct attached
devices such as the CD-ROM
drive).
6.
Stop and Disable the RSM
service in the Microsoft Computer Management window.
7.
Reconnect the Windows node
to the SAN (plug all FC cables
back in to the original HBA
Ports).
8.
Repeat this process on all
Windows backup server
nodes.
The VLS cartridge barcode numbers
displayed on Veritas Netbackup do
not match the actual VLS cartridge
barcode numbers.
Netbackup has a 6 character barcode limit. Only 6 characters of the
actual VLS cartridge barcode numbers will be displayed.
See the Netbackup web site to determine if the six character limit can
be changed. If the shortening of the
cartridge barcode numbers removes characters from the barcode
numbers, making them no longer
unique, the barcode numbers cannot be used with Netbackup. You
must create new cartridges with no
more than six character barcode
numbers.
Netbackup on HP-UX cannot build
a device file for a VLS library.
Netbackup on HP-UX cannot see
virtual devices on a VLS.
Manually create the device file for
the virtual library. See the Veritas
Netbackup manual.
Netbackup does not display the
cartridge barcodes for Autoloader
library emulations on the VLS.
Real autoloader libraries do not
support barcodes.
This is normal and will not cause
problems.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
311
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
To turn on barcode reader support
in Data Protector:
1. Click Device & Media.
HP StorageWorks Data Protector
5.1 does not display the VLS cartridge barcodes.
By default, the barcode reader
support is turned off in Data Protector 5.1.
2. Right-click the VLS library name
and select Properties.
3. Click the Control tab.
4. Click the Barcode reader support
box to select it.
VLS performance is being reduced
by test unit ready (TURs) from a
Windows host with access to the
VLS.
312
Troubleshooting
The Removable Storage Manager
or Removable Storage program on
a Windows host is submitting TURs
to the VLS.
Stop the Removable Storage Manager or Removable Storage program, and set the startup type to
Disabled on the Windows host using the Services utility located under Control Panel > Administrative
Tools.
Symptom
Possible causes
VLS performance is being reduced
by frequent tape drive polling.
Windows Removable Storage
Manager service (RSM) polls tape
drives on a frequent basis—every
three seconds in Microsoft Windows 2000, and every second in
Windows Server 2003. Windows’
built-in backup software (NTBACKUP) relies on the RSM polling
to detect media changes in the tape
drive. In SAN configurations, this
RSM polling can have a significant
negative impact on tape drive performance. For SAN configurations,
HP strongly recommends disabling
RSM polling.
Solution
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
313
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
Refer to the Microsoft website at:
http://support.microsoft.com/
default.aspx?scid=
kb;en-us;842411 or complete the
following steps to disable RSM
polling:
1.
Install the 1.0.4.0 or later
driver.
2.
Disable device polling in the
system registry.
• Establish a CLI session.
• Log into the system as Administrator.
• Run RegEdit and navigate
to the following registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\
SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\
hplto.
• To disable RSM polling,
edit the AutoRun value
found in this key. A value
of 0 (zero) indicates that
polling is disabled; a value
of 1 indicates that polling
is enabled.
3.
After completing steps 1 and
2, reboot the affected system.
4.
Repeat this procedure for
every server visible to tape
drives.
IMPORTANT:
Adding or removing tape drives
may cause an older driver .inf
file to be reread, which can
re-enable RSM polling. If tape
drives are added or removed,
check the registry for proper
configuration. If necessary,
repeat step 2 and 3 above.
To disable polling in the HP SDLT
driver (v3.0.2.0 or later):
314
Troubleshooting
1.
Open the Device Manager on
the server connected to the
tape drive.
2.
Double-click an SDLT tape
drive.
3.
Click the DLT tab.
4.
Check Increase performance by disabling support for Microsoft
Backup Utility.
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
5.
At reboot, there are spurious critical
FC port failures reported as notification alerts, usually on every port.
Later, Info notification alerts for
each FC host port are generated,
indicating the FC ports are operating normally.
This is expected behavior and does
not indicate a problem.
Repeat this procedure for each
server visible to each SDLT
tape drive.
None
Using Command View TL on the
management station for this VLS,
go to the "License Key Summary"
tab and verify the following:
• There is a License folder labeled
"VLS at..." with the Ethernet IP
address for this VLS system.
The Identity tab of Command View
VLS reports Total Usable Capacity
of 0 GB, even though there are
working disk arrays available to
the VLS system.
Whenever the VLS detects more
array enclosures than there are
correctly installed licenses, the VLS
system will disable ALL array storage and report 0 GB of Total Usable Capacity.
• The number of license instances
in this folder ("Quantity (LTU)")
is equal to or greater than the
number of array enclosures
connected to this VLS system in
addition to the minimum configuration. For example, a
VLS6100–series system has a
minimum configuration of 1 array enclosure and a
VLS6800–series has a minimum
configuration of 4 array enclosures. There must be at least 1
LTU for every array enclosure
over the minimum configuration.
A VLS6800–series with 16
connected array enclosure
needs 12 correctly installed LTU
license keys.
• Verify the correct VLS system
Identifier was used and entered
correctly when the license key
was created. If licenses that
were installed for this system
show up under the "Un-managed Licenses" license folder,
then Command View TL can not
match the Identifier for that licence to any known library
device.
After replacing drive 0 in a node,
the system will not boot.
A blank drive was installed in drive
bay 0.
If a blank drive is installed in drive
bay 0, the system will not boot. To
remedy this, switch the drive located in bay 0 with the drive located
in bay 1.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
315
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
When oversubscription is enabled
and you create enough cartridges
in a storage pool to put your free
storage capacity below the
threshold, the pool may reach critical status. If you then disable
oversubscription, your storage pool
will remain in critical status and will
not return to good status—even
after reboot.
When you disable oversubscription, the system does not monitor
the storage pool's capacity, even
to check that it is no longer at a
critical level. The status will not
change.
Re-enable oversubscription, set the
alert threshold so that the storage
pool is within the capacity
threshold, then wait for the pool to
return to good (green) status. Disable oversubscription and the storage pool will maintain good status.
Automigration/Replication Issues
Although Automigration is configured and managed through the Automigration/Replication tab on
Command View VLS, errors and events are reported through the usual notification alerts. See
Notification Alerts.
IMPORTANT:
If a destination library is directly connected to the VLS (LOOP mode), and you disconnect the destination
library to change its connection to be via a SAN (FABRIC mode), you will need to reboot the VLS in
order for this change to work. If you do not reboot, the destination library will be marked as FAILED
after you disconnect and reconnect it.
NOTE:
The “mirror_broken” state can occur when there is not enough room on the virtual tape to create the
copy, there are no available slots to create the copy, the library cannot read the header of the physical
tape, the library cannot determine that a tape without a header is blank, or the library cannot
successfully write the header to the virtual tape.
Destination library status icon
While the device status icon in the Command View VLS status banner indicates the overall VLS device
health on other tabs, the icon on the Automigration/Replication tab indicates the status of the destination
libraries.
A destination library status icon can be one of five states:
Error—An error occurred while the system was determining the status of the destination libraries.
Unknown—A destination library's operating condition is unknown. Contact HP Technical Support.
Normal—All destination libraries are operating normally.
Warning—At least one destination library is in a good state while at least one destination library
is any state other than good.
Warning for All—All destination libraries are in any state other than good.
316
Troubleshooting
Replacing a library
When a library fails, or when the library robotics card must be changed, the replacement will have
a different serial number from the original. To assign it the same pools, mapping, etc. as the original:
NOTE:
While the virtual tapes are in the firesafe, scheduled backups for those tapes will not occur.
1.
Make a note of all pool configuration information for pools associated with the library to be
replaced.
2.
Delete all pools associated with the library (see Deleting a Copy Pool).
NOTE:
Deleting the pools automatically moves all virtual cartridges from within the pool to the
firesafe.
3.
Unmanage the physical library to be replaced (see Managing and Unmanaging a Destination
Library).
4.
Replace the library or robotics card.
5.
Manage the new physical library (see Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library).
6.
Manually recreate the storage pools associated with the new library using the information written
down at the beginning of this procedure.
The virtual tapes that were moved into the firesafe will automatically return to their previous
locations.
Deduplication Issues
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
The VLS does not free up storage
on a cartridge until:
The VLS is not deduplicating the
backup jobs.
• At least two full backups of the
same policy exist on different
cartridges
• The delta-differencer has processed all of the backup sets on
the cartridge
Consider using cartridges that are
smaller than the sum of your daily
backup jobs so the cartridges deduplicate sooner.
• The cartridge is physically full
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
317
Symptom
Possible causes
Solution
The deduplication compression ratio is low.
The compression ratio depends on
the amount of data changed
between the backup sets. In addition, not all data is deduplicated.
For example, files less than 32 KB
in size and backup sets less than 1
MB are ignored. If your data sets
do not change significantly
between backups, or if they contain
many small files, the compression
ratio may be low. This is expected
behavior and does not indicate a
problem.
None
The deduplication compression ratio was fine, but suddenly went
down significantly.
After 50 versions of a backup set
have been deduplicated, the VLS
automatically restarts the deduplication process as though starting
from scratch. As a result, the compression ratio will drop.
In time, the ratio will improve as
more backup sets are deduplicated.
The restore performance will continue to degrade as you restore older
and older versions of a backup.
After 50 versions of a backup set
have been deduplicated, the VLS
automatically restarts the deduplication process as though from
scratch. The restore performance
will then improve because the restore versions are more recent.
The restore performance is degrading.
318
Troubleshooting
B Specifications
This section provides the VLS node and disk array specifications.
VLS6100 and VLS6500 Node
Item
Specification
Height
4.3 cm (1.70 in)
Depth
70.5 cm (27.8 in)
Width
42.6 cm (16.8 in)
Weight (fully loaded)
16.78 kg (37 lb)
Weight (no drives installed)
12.47 kg (27.5 lb)
Rated input voltage
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Rated input frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Rated input current
6.0 A (110 V) to 3.0 A (220 V)
Rated input power
580 W
BTUs per hour
1990
Rated steady-state power
460 W
SATA hard drive
80 GB capacity
7,200 rpm rotational speed
Power supply
460 W
CD-ROM drive
24x IDE
Memory
Processor
1 x 512 MB DDR2 SRAM (G4p server)
1 x 1 G DDR SRAM 266 MHz ECC, PC2700 (G4 server)
Intel® 3.00-GHz Xeon™ 1-MB L2 cache (800 MHz FSB) processor
(G4 server)
Intel® 3.00-GHz Xeon™ 2-MB L2 cache LV processor (G4p server)
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
319
VLS6200 Node
Item
Specification
Height
4.3 cm (1.70 in)
Depth
69.2 cm (27.3 in)
Width
42.6 cm (16.8 in)
Weight (fully loaded
17.9 kg (39.5 lb)
Weight (no drives installed)
14.1 kg (31.0 lb)
Rated input voltage
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Rated input frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Rated input current
7.1 A (120 VAC); 3.5 A (240 VAC)
Rated input power
852 W
BTUs per hour
2910 (120 VAC); 2870 (240 VAC)
Rated steady-state power
700 W
SATA hard drive
60 GB capacity
7,200 rpm rotational speed
Power supply
700 W
DVD-CD drive
8x/24x IDE
Memory
4 x 1024 MB DDR2 SRAM ECC
Processor
Pentium® quad-core Xeon™ processor (2.0 GHz)
320
Specifications
VLS6600 Node
Item
Specification
Height
8.59 cm (3.38 in)
Depth
66.07 cm (26.01 in)
Width
44.54 cm (17.54 in)
Weight (fully loaded)
27.33 kg (60 lb)
Weight (no drives installed)
20.41 kg (47.18 lb)
Rated input voltage
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Rated input frequency
50 to 60 Hz
Rated input current
10A (100 V) to 6.1A (200 V)
Rated input power
1205 W
BTUs per hour
4150
Rated steady-state power
1000 W
Hard drives
Two 60 GB 2.5 in HP SATA drives, connected as JBOD
Power supply
575 W
DVD-ROM drive
Slimline 8x24
Memory
Two 2048 MB DDR2 SRAM ECC
Processor
Two quad-core Intel Xeon 2.0 GHz
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
321
VLS6800 Node
Item
Specification
Dimensions
Height
17.5 cm (6.88 in)
Depth
69.2 cm (27.25 in)
Width
46.3 cm (19.0 in)
Weight (fully loaded)
44.5 kg (98 lb)
International input requirements
Rated input voltage
180 VAC to 264 VAC
Rated input frequency
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Rated input current
6.0 A
U.S. input requirements
Rated input voltage
90 VAC to 132 VAC
Rated input frequency
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Rated input current
12.0 A
Power supply output power
Rated steady-state power
800 W
Maximum peak power
800 W
SCSI hard drive
72 GB capacity
10k rpm rotational speed
Power supply
870 W
DVD-CD drive
EIDE (ATAPI) 8X/24X
Memory
4 x 1G DDR SRAM 266 MHz ECC, PC2700
Processor
AMD® 2.6-GHz Opteron™ 1-MB
322
Specifications
VLS6000–series Disk Array
Item
Specification
Dimensions
59.7 cm x 48.8 cm x 8.8 cm (23.5 in x 19.2 in x 3.5 in)
• Empty: 14 kg (32 lb)
Weight
• Fully loaded: 24.6 kg (54.3 lb)
• 50 or 60 Hz (nominal)
Input frequency (±5%)
• 47 to 63 Hz (range)
• 110 or 240 V (nominal)
Input voltage
• 90 to 254 V RMS (autoranging)
• At 240 V = 1.8 A (one power supply) or 1.9 A (two power
supplies)
Steady-state maximum current
• At 120 V = 3.7 A (one power supply) or 3.9 A (two power
supplies)
• 0.21 A at 240 V, 60 Hz
Standby current
• 0.15 A at 120 V, 60 Hz
Environmental Specifications
Operating
Non-operating
Shipping
10°C to 35°C (50°F
to 95°F)
-40°C to 66°C (40°F to 150°F)
-40°C to 66°C (40°F to 150°F)
40% to 60%
10% to 95%
5% to 95%
Altitude
-1000 ft to 10,000
ft
-1000 ft to 10,000
ft
-1000 ft to 40,000
ft
Vibration
5-1000-5 Hz, 0.25
g, sinusoidal, 1
Octave/min., 3-axis
5-1000-5 Hz, 1.0
g, sinusoidal, 1
Octave/min., 3-axis
5-1000-5 Hz, 2.0
g, sinusoidal, 1
Octave/min., 3-axis
Shock
5 g, every 11ms,
1/2 sine pulse, 3
axis
25 g, every 11ms,
1/2 sine pulse, 3
axis
30 g, every 11ms,
1/2 sine pulse, 3
axis
Temperature
1
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
2
1
All temperature ratings shown are for sea level. An altitude derating of 1°C per 300 m (1.8°F per 1,000 ft) to 3048 m
(10,000 ft) is applicable. No direct sunlight allowed.
2
Storage maximum humidity of 95% is based on a maximum temperature of 45°C (113°F). Altitude maximum for storage
corresponds to a pressure minimum of 70 KPa.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
323
324
Specifications
C Regulatory Compliance Notices
This section contains regulatory notices for the HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library system.
Regulatory Compliance Identification Numbers
For the purpose of regulatory compliance certifications and identification, this product has been
assigned a unique regulatory model number. The regulatory model number can be found on the
product nameplate label, along with all required approval markings and information. When requesting
compliance information for this product, always refer to this regulatory model number. The regulatory
model number is not the marketing name or model number of the product.
Product specific information:
HP StorageWorks 6000 virtual library system.
Regulatory model number: ES1019
FCC and CISPR classification: Class A
These products contain laser components. See Class 1 laser statement in the Laser Compliance Notices
section.
Federal Communications Commission Notice
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations has established
Radio Frequency (RF) emission limits to provide an interference-free radio frequency spectrum. Many
electronic devices, including computers, generate RF energy incidental to their intended function and
are, therefore, covered by these rules. These rules place computers and related peripheral devices
into two classes, A and B, depending upon their intended installation. Class A devices are those that
may reasonably be expected to be installed in a business or commercial environment. Class B devices
are those that may reasonably be expected to be installed in a residential environment (for example,
personal computers). The FCC requires devices in both classes to bear a label indicating the interference
potential of the device as well as additional operating instructions for the user.
FCC rating label
The FCC rating label on the device shows the classification (A or B) of the equipment. Class B devices
have an FCC logo or ID on the label. Class A devices do not have an FCC logo or ID on the label.
After you determine the class of the device, refer to the corresponding statement.
Class A equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
325
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at personal expense.
Class B equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit that is different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo, United States
only
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact us by mail or telephone:
• Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000
• Or call 1-281-514-3333
Modification
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that
are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Cables
When provided, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI
connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations.
Canadian Notice (Avis Canadien)
Class A Equipment
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la class A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
326
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Class B Equipment
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la class B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
European Union Notice
Products bearing the CE marking comply with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage
Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses
are the equivalent international standards and regulations):
• EN 55022 (CISPR 22)—Electromagnetic Interference
• EN55024 (IEC61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11)—Electromagnetic Immunity
• EN61000-3-2 (IEC61000-3-2)—Power Line Harmonics
• EN61000-3-3 (IEC61000-3-3)—Power Line Flicker
• EN 60950 (IEC60950)—Product Safety
Japanese Notices
Japanese VCCI-A Notice
Japanese VCCI-B Notice
Japanese Power Cord Statement
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
327
Korean Notices
Class A Equipment
Class B Equipment
Taiwanese Notices
BSMI Class A Notice
Taiwan Battery Recycle Statement
Recovery mark:
Recovery text:
Four-in-one recycling symbol
“Please recycle waste batteries”
328
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Laser Compliance Notices
English Laser Notice
This device may contain a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with U.S.
FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation.
WARNING!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in
the laser product's installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk
of exposure to hazardous radiation:
• Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside.
• Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than
those specified herein.
• Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit.
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser
products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the
United States.
Dutch Laser Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
329
French Laser Notice
German Laser Notice
Italian Laser Notice
330
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Japanese Laser Notice
Spanish Laser Notice
Recycling Notices
English Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
331
Bulgarian Notice
Czech Notice
Danish Notice
Dutch Notice
332
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Estonian Notice
Finnish Notice
French Notice
German Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
333
Greek Notice
Hungarian Notice
Italian Notice
Latvian Notice
334
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Lithuanian Notice
Polish Notice
Portuguese Notice
Romanian Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
335
Slovak Notice
Spanish Notice
Swedish Notice
Turkish Notice
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
336
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Battery Replacement Notices
Dutch Battery Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
337
French Battery Notice
German Battery Notice
338
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Italian Battery Notice
Japanese Battery Notice
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
339
Spanish Battery Notice
340
Regulatory Compliance Notices
Glossary
This glossary defines terms used in this guide or related to this product and is not a comprehensive
glossary of computer terms.
Accelerated
deduplication
A method of deduplication that uses object-level differencing technology.
appliance
An intelligent device programmed to perform a single well-defined function.
Appliances differ from general-purpose computers in that their software is normally
customized for the function they perform, pre-loaded by a vendor, and not
alterable by the user.
automigration
The process in which the virtual tape library acts as a tape copy engine that
transfers data from virtual cartridges on disk to a physical tape library connected
to the virtual tape device.
bandwidth
Also known as data transfer rate. The amount of data that can be carried from
one point to another in a given time period.
A real communications path usually consists of a succession of links, each with
its own bandwidth. If one of these is much slower than the rest, it is said to be
a bandwidth bottleneck.
cartridge
1) A removable storage module that contains magnetic or optical disks, magnetic
tape, or memory chips.
(2) Software emulation of the behavior and contents of a physical tape cartridge
on alternate media, such as disk, is called a virtual tape or virtual media.
chassis
A metal box that houses computer hardware.
CLI
Command-line interface. An interface comprised of various commands which
are used to control operating system responses.
data backup
The activity of copying files or databases so that they will be preserved in case
of equipment failure or other catastrophe. The retrieval of files you backed up is
called restoring files.
data compression
A software or hardware process that shrinks data files so that they occupy less
storage space, and can be transmitted faster and easier. Data is encoded so it
takes up less storage space and less bandwidth for transmission.
data restore
To recover data files stored on virtual or physical media.
data retention
period
The length of time data is retained (stored) on virtual or physical media.
data striping
The storing of sequential blocks of incoming data on all the different disk drives
in a virtual disk. This method of writing data increases virtual disk throughput
because multiple disks are working simultaneously, retrieving and storing data.
RAID 0, 3, 5, 6, 10, and 50 use striping.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
341
disk array
Two or more hard drives combined as a single logical unit for increased capacity,
speed, and fault-tolerant operation. Disk arrays are logically grouped into a
storage pool.
disk mirroring
Also known as data mirroring.
disk striping
The process of dividing a body of data into blocks and spreading the data blocks
across several partitions on several disks.
disk-to-disk
backup
The backing up data on disks rather than on tape. Disk-to-disk backup systems
provide a very fast single file restore capability compared with disk-to-tape
backup.
disk-to-disk-to-tape
backup
The process of archiving in which data is initially copied to backup storage on
a disk-based storage system, such as a VLS, and then periodically copied again
to a tape storage system.
dynamic disk
filesystem
A finely-tuned filesystem developed to handle large block I/O typical of a
streaming backup and restore environment. This filesystem is optimized for
sequential access and very large file sizes.
data migration
The process of moving data from one storage device to another, such as migrating
data from virtual media to physical media.
deduplication
The process of eliminating duplicate data from the backups on a virtual cartridge
to reduce the amount of disk space required.
echo copy
A software feature within automigration that automatically synchronizes the
physical cartridges to matching virtual cartridges (with the same barcodes) based
on user-defined policies, and is totally transparent to the backup application.
(Echo copy is similar to mirror copy.)
extent
The minimum amount of disk space allocated for writing by the VLS dynamic
disk filesystem. A smaller extent reduces wasted disk space, but decreases restore
performance. The VLS extent size is 32MB.
failover protection
A backup operational mode in which the functions of a system component (such
as a hard drive or power supply) are assumed by secondary system components
when the primary component becomes unavailable through either failure or
scheduled down time.
Fibre Channel
A serial data transport infrastructure and protocol used to implement storage
area networks (SANs).
file
A VLS file is a virtual cartridge.
Firesafe
The holding area for virtual media that is not assigned to a virtual library. Data
cannot be restored from virtual media located in the Firesafe until the media is
moved into a library.
hot plug
The ability to add and remove devices to an appliance while the appliance is
running and have the operating system automatically recognize the change.
infrastructure
The physical hardware used to interconnect computers. Infrastructure also includes
the software used to send, receive, and manage the signals that are transmitted.
342
Glossary
initiator
A media (host) server that runs the backup/restore application that passes
commands and data between the network and the VLS.
inputs/outputs per
second
A performance measurement for a host-attached storage device or RAID controller.
library
A storage device that handles multiple units of media and provides one or more
drives for reading and writing them, such as a physical tape library and virtual
tape library. Software emulation of a physical tape library is called a virtual tape
library.
logical unit
number (LUN)
An address used in the SCSI protocol to access a device within a target. In the
case of the VLS, a LUN is assigned to each virtual library and tape drive.
LUN mapping
A mechanism of changing the LUN assignments for a specific host.
LUN masking
An authorization process that makes a LUN available to some hosts and
unavailable to other hosts.
mean time until
data loss (MTDL)
The average time until a component failure can be expected to cause data loss.
This includes the consideration that RAID redundancy can protect against data
loss from the failure of a single component.
media access
control (MAC)
address
A low-level unique hardware identifier for every Ethernet port in the world that
is physically stored inside a network card or similar network interface. MAC
addresses are assigned by the IEEE.
media server
A computer whose purpose is to move or copy data from one location to another,
such as from network clients to tape cartridges in a library.
node
A server that contains the hardware and firmware required to run a virtual library
system. This refers to a hardware assembly containing a power supply, cooling
fans, motherboard, expansion boards, and internal hard drives to support the
VLS system.
oversubscription
A condition that exists when more virtual media storage is configured on a VLS
than there is physical storage available.
Because the VLS dynamically allocates storage space as user data is written, the
VLS allows you to allocate more storage for virtual media than is physically
available.
RAID
A RAID volume consists of more than one drive, but appears to the operating
system to be a single logical disk. RAID improves performance by disk striping,
which involves partitioning each drive's storage space into units. By placing data
on multiple disks, I/O operations can overlap in a balanced way, improving
performance.
RAID1-level data
storage
A RAID that consists of at least two drives that use mirroring (100 percent
duplication of the storage of data). There is no striping. Read performance is
improved since either disk can be read at the same time. Write performance is
the same as for single disk storage.
RAID5-level data
storage
A RAID that provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction
information. RAID5 configurations can tolerate one drive failure. Even with a
failed drive, the data in a RAID5 volume can still be accessed normally.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
343
RAID6-level data
storage
A RAID that provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction
information. RAID6 configurations can tolerate two drive failures. Even with two
failed drives, the data in a RAID6 volume can still be accessed normally. RAID6
read performance is similar to RAID5, since all drives can service read operations,
but the write performance is lower than that of RAID5 because the parity data
must be updated on multiple drives.
redundancy
In a redundant system, if you lose part of the system, it can continue to operate.
For example, if you have two power supplies with one that takes over if the other
one dies, that's redundancy.
replication
The process of writing data to virtual tape, and after the backups are complete,
writing the data to another virtual tape, known as the replication target, over the
LAN/WAN. Similar to automigration.
SSL certificate
Secure Sockets Layer certificate. A protocol designed to enable applications to
transmit information back and forth securely. Applications that use this protocol
inherently know how to give and receive encryption keys with other applications,
as well as how to encrypt and decrypt data sent between the two.
Some applications that are configured to run SSL include web browsers like
Internet Explorer and Netscape, mail programs like GroupWise, Outlook, and
Outlook Express, FTP (file transfer protocol) programs, etc. These programs are
automatically able to receive SSL connections.
To send an SSL connection, however, or to open a secure connection, your
application must first have an encryption key assigned to it by a Certification
Authority. Once it has a unique key of its own, you can establish a secure
connection with every other application that can "speak" the SSL protocol.
SATA
Serial Advanced Technology Attachment.
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface. A standard, intelligent parallel interface for
attaching peripheral devices to computers, based on a device-independent
protocol.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. A widely used network monitoring and
control protocol. Data is passed from SNMP agents, which are hardware and/or
software processes reporting activity in each network device (hub, router, bridge,
and so on) to the workstation console used to oversee the network. The agents
return information contained in a MIB (Management Information Base), which
is a data structure that defines what is obtainable from the device and what can
be controlled (turned off, on, and so on).
smart copy
A software feature within the automigration process that is under the control of
the backup application and managed via the VLS device's SMI-S interface. This
requires the backup application to support the HP smart copy interface. (Smart
copy is similar to snapshot.)
SMI-S
Allows control of the virtual tape library by a connected destination library for
the purpose of implementing automigration. SMI-S support allows applications
attached to the VLS to detect the virtual library configuration and to allow some
users to change the state of the VLS.
SAN
Storage area network. A network of storage devices available to one or more
servers.
344
Glossary
storage pool
Multiple disk arrays logically grouped together from which the dynamic disk
filesystem allocates storage. The disk arrays in a VLS are automatically configured
into one storage array.
tape drive
(1) A device that reads data from and writes data onto tape.
(2) A software emulation of a tape drive is called a virtual tape drive.
virtual tape
A disk drive buffer that emulates one physical tape to the host system and appears
to the host backup application as a physical tape. The same application used
to back up to tape is used, but the data is stored on disk. Also known as a piece
of virtual media or a VLS cartridge.
Data can be written to and read from the virtual tape, and the virtual tape can
be migrated to physical tape.
virtual tape drive
An emulation of a physical transport in a virtual tape library that looks like a
physical tape transport to the host backup application. The data written to the
virtual tape drive is really being written to disk.
virtual tape library
A disk drive buffer containing virtual tape and virtual tape drives.
WWNN
World wide node name. A globally unique 64-bit identifier assigned to each
Fibre Channel node process.
WWPN
World wide port name. A unique 64-bit address used in a FC storage network
to identify each device in a FC network.
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
345
346
Glossary
Index
B
A
accelerated deduplication
See deduplication
adding
workload assessment template, 189
adding slot mapping
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
additional information, 303
Advanced Search (for slots), 98
At End of the Policy Window
LAN/WAN, 84
SAN, 84
authorized reseller, 306
automated reports, 190
backup summary, 191
performance history, 191
policy-cartridge summary, 191
replication data for ISV import, 191
replication job history, 191
SAN health history, 191
system capacity, 191
automigration
cancelling a job, 107
concepts, 74
configuring job reports, 113
defined, 73
destination library, 77
echo copy, 74
firesafe, 88
job history, 114
exporting to CSV file, 115
job status, 113
job summary, 115
pausing a job, 107
replication, 75
reporting, 111
restarting services, 101
resuming a job, 107
smart copy, 75
supported library configurations, 77
viewing cartridges in source libraries, 88
availability window
editing, 94
barcode templates
adding, 170, 205
assigning, 165
removing, 170, 205
battery replacement notices, 337
C
cabling
disk array
VLS6100, 57
VLS6200, 57
VLS6500, 57
VLS6600, 57
VLS6800, 61
node
VLS6100, 55
VLS6200, 55
VLS6500, 55
VLS6600, 55
VLS6800, 60
Canadian notice, 326
Cancel Tape Transport, 106
capacity
adding, 67
creating tape drives, 162
licenses, 69
managing, 65
storage pools, 68
removing, 68
upgrading disks, 67
VLS6200, 21
VLS6500, 22
VLS6600, 23
VLS6800, 26
cartridge
See cartridges
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
347
cartridge status
In Use/Deduplicating, 111
Initializing, 112
Mirror Active, 111, 112
Mirror Complete, 112
Mirror failed — corrective action needed,
111
Not migrated in Copy Pools threshold limit,
111
Paused, 111
Pending, 111
Waiting for first backup, 112
Waiting for policy window, 111
cartridges
changing capacity, 171, 209
changing library association, 171, 209
changing write access, 171, 209
configuring status screen, 113
creating, 164, 206
deleting, 168
destroying, 207
details, 112
moving, 169
replicating outside policy window
systems with deduplication, 106
systems without deduplication, 99
reusing barcode numbers, 169
summary, 112
unloading, 172
viewing details, 171, 206
viewing in automigration source libraries, 88
viewing the slot details, 95
viewing the status, 95
certificate error, in browser, 136
Change Drives (for smart copy pool), 90
changing slot mapping
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
Clear Faults, 196
CLI command set, 199
configuration commands, 202
connection commands, 199
conventions, 199
help, 200
management commands, 209
monitoring commands, 210
network settings configuration commands,
200
output commands, 200
348
Command View VLS
closing a session, 138
description, 133
Login window, E-mail Administrator link, 146
opening a session
from Command View TL, 136
from web browser, 135
restarting, 137, 209
window regions, 134
commands, CLI, 199
components
disk array
controller module, 297
fan module, 296
hard drive, 294
power supply, 296
VLS6100, 19
CD-ROM drive, 266
DIMM, 270
power supply, 267
power supply zone fan module, 268
processor zone fan module, 269
SATA hard drive, 265
VLS6200, 20
DVD-CD drive, 272
fan module, 275
FBDIMM, 277
power supply, 273
SATA hard drive, 271
VLS6500, 21
CD-ROM drive, 266
DIMM, 270
power supply, 267
power supply zone fan module, 268
processor zone fan module, 269
SATA hard drive, 265
VLS6600, 23
DVD-CD drive, 280
fan, 282
FBDIMM, 283
hard drive, 278
power supply, 281
VLS6800, 24
DIMM, 291
diskette drive, 286
DVD-CD drive, 286
fan, 288
power supply, 287
processor, 292
processor memory board, 289
processor power module, 290
SCSI hard drive, 284
configuration, 141, 202
rebuilding the library, 300
restoring settings, 210, 300
saving settings, 174, 209
configuring
automigration/replication GUI, 115
current status reports, 183
deduplication options, 119
notifications, 183
logical capacity, 184
physical capacity, 184
performance history reports, 184
performance notifications, 183
performance reports, 183
SAN health notifications, 184
SAN health reports, 184
conventions
document, 304
text symbols, 304
Copy Now, 99
copy pools, 81, 89
See also echo copy pool
See also smart copy pool
changing slot mapping for LAN/WAN
library, 93
changing slot mapping for SAN library, 92
deleting, 94
details, 99
editing, 91
moving to another library, 91
copying data to physical tape, 19
Create Echo Copy Pool, 82
Create LAN/WAN Replication Target, 107
Create Smart Copy Pool, 89
Create Virtual Library, 160
CSV data, exporting, 183
current status report, 185
customer self repair, 307
D
data
restoring from LAN/WAN virtual cartridge,
86
restoring from SAN physical cartridge, 85
data compression, 164
Data Protector, configuring, 120
date and time setting
setting, 201
viewing, 201
Declaration of Conformity, 326
deduplication
backup report, 121
cartridge report, 122
configuring, 119
defined, 117
installing licenses, 69
licensing, 119
overview, 117
system capacity statistics, 123
viewing reports, 120
viewing statistics, 120
Deduplication Timeout, 84
deleting
copy pools, 94
workload assessment template, 189
Deploy Firmware, 103
destination library, 78
See also SAN destination library or
LAN/WAN destination library
import/export details, 99
managing, 78
unmanaging, 78
DHCP
deselecting, 201
selecting, 144, 201
disaster recovery
disk array RAID volume failure, 302
node RAID volume failure, 302
operating system failure, 299
disk array
front panel components, 250
hard drive front panel LEDs, 251
hard drive LED combinations, 251
powering off, 131
powering on, 125
rack mounting, 40
rack mounting order
VLS6100, 35
VLS6200, 35
VLS6500, 35
VLS6600, 35, 36
VLS6800, 35
RAID configuration, 65
RAID volume failure recovery, 302
rear panel components, 252
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 252
shipping carton contents, 35
specifications, 323
DNS server address, setting, 144, 201
document conventions, 304
documentation, providing feedback, 308
domain
name setting, 144, 201
Drive Assessment Test, 104
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
349
E
F
Echo Copy on Source Cartridge Eject, 83
echo copy pool
availability window
start day, 84
start time, 84
window duration, 84
creating, 82
loading blank media, 86
loading media, 87
operations, 81
restoring from a physical cartridge, 85
echo copy pool policy
at end of the policy window
LAN/WAN, 84
SAN, 84
deduplication timeout, 84
echo copy on source cartridge eject, 83
priority, 84
retention days, 83
send notification if cartridge not migrated in,
83
send notification if cartridge not replicated
in, 84
sizing factor, 83
source cartridge size limit, 83
start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges, 83,
84
echo copy, concepts, 74
Edit Configuration, 113
Edit Data Protector Configuration, 120
Edit LAN/WAN Replication Target Settings, 109
Edit Policy Window, 94
editing
workload assessment template, 189
Eject Media, 101
electrical damage, reducing risk, 59, 62
electrical shock, reducing risk, 59, 62
electrostatic discharge
grounding methods, 29
preventing, 29, 255
email settings, 178
emergency login, 138
emulations
See VLS device emulations
Enable/Disable Enhanced Data Integrity Check,
120
environmental specifications, 323
European Union notice, 327
Export Cartridge Details, 112
Export Log File, 112
exporting CSV data, 183
exporting data, 105
failover
warm, 301
FC host port
changing settings, 202
Federal Communications Commission notice,
325
Fibre Channel host port, 202
changing the default settings, 147
LUN management, 150
firesafe, 167
automigration, 88
firmware, updating, 173
fully qualified name, setting, 144, 201
350
G
gateway to network, setting, 144, 201
Global LAN/WAN Replication Target Settings,
109
glossary, 341
grounding methods, 255
H
help, obtaining, 306
host
creating WWPN alias, 152
name setting, 144, 201
HP
contacting, 306
document conventions, 304
storage documents, 303
storage web site, 303
Subscriber's choice web site, 306
I
icon
cancel job, 107
navigation tree, 176
Notification alert, 176
pause job, 107
resume job, 107
status banner, 175
Identity tab
Contact, 146
Contact Phone, 146
E-mail, 146
IP address, 141
Location, 146
VLS IP address, 201
VLS serial number, 174
Warranty Serial Number, 146
importing tapes, 106
In Use/Deduplicating, 111
Initializing, 112
Initiate Tape Transport, 105, 106
Insight Remote Support, 307
installation, 29
ESD precautions, 29
grounding methods, 29
identifying shipping carton contents, 31
rack requirements, 31
rack warnings, 31
racking planning resources, 30
removing packing materials, 30
tools, 29
unpacking, 30
installing into rack
VLS6100, 45
VLS6500, 45
VLS6600, 46, 48
IP address, setting, 144, 201
Japanese notices, 327
Library Assessment Test, 104
library policy
editing, 94
licenses
capacity, 69
deduplication, 69
installing, 69
re-installing, 301
replication, 69
Load Blank Media
echo copy pool, 86
smart copy pool, 90
Load Media for Overwrite
echo copy pool, 87
smart copy pool, 91
Load Media for Restore, 85
logical capacity report, 186
LUN management, 150
default LUN numbering, 150
LUN mapping, 153, 158
LUN masking, 151
operating system LUN requirements and
restrictions, 151
K
M
Korean notices, 328
mailslot
details, 99
Manage LAN/WAN Replication Library, 79
Manage SAN Automigration Library, 79
management, 171, 209
management URL, editing, 102
media
ejecting from a drive into empty mailslot, 101
ejecting from a slot into empty mailslot, 101
loading into an echo copy pool, 87
moving to another slot, 100
mirror
restarting broken, 88
Mirror Active, 111, 112
Mirror Complete, 112
Mirror failed — corrective action needed, 111
monitoring
destination library (automigration), 95
system status, 210
Move Media, 100
moving cartridges, 169
J
L
LAN/WAN cartridge
restoring data from, 86
LAN/WAN destination library
operations, 105
LAN/WAN library
editing availability windows, 94
editing the policy, 94
unmanaging, 80
LAN/WAN replication library
managing, 79
LAN/WAN replication target
changing the password, 110
clearing the source VLS, 110
defined, 107
deleting, 110
editing, 109
global configuration, 109
operations, 107
laser compliance notices, 329
library
creating, 203
destroying, 167, 203, 204
Netbackup requirement, 160
placing offline, 99
placing online, 99
N
Netbackup
library requirement, 160
VLS emulation, 160
netmask, setting, 144, 201
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
351
network settings
setting, 141, 201
viewing, 141, 201
352
node
components, 255
powering off, 130
rack mounting
VLS6100, 44
VLS6200, 53
VLS6500, 44
VLS6600, 46
VLS6800, 48
RAID volume failure recovery, 302
rebooting, 129, 209
shipping carton contents
VLS6100 and VLS6500 node, 32
VLS6200 node, 33
VLS6600 node, 33
VLS6800 node, 34
VLS6100
access panel, installing, 265
access panel, removing, 263
extending from the rack, 257
fan module locations, 220
front panel components, 213
front panel LEDs and buttons, 214
node LEDs and internal health LED
combinations, 219
powering on, 125
processor zone fan module LED, 221
rear panel components, 215
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 216
removing from the rack, 261
specifications, 319
system board components, 217
system board LEDs, 218
VLS6200
access panel, installing, 265
access panel, removing, 263
extending from the rack, 257
fan locations, 230
front panel components, 221
front panel LEDs and buttons, 222
hard drive LED combinations, 229
hard drive LEDs, 229
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs, 227
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and
Internal health LED combinations, 228
powering on, 125
rear panel components, 223
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 224
removing from the rack, 261
specifications, 320
system board components, 225
VLS6500
access panel, installing, 265
access panel, removing, 263
extending from the rack, 257
fan module locations, 220
front panel components, 213
front panel LEDs and buttons, 214
node LEDs and internal health LED
combinations, 219
powering on, 125
processor zone fan module LED, 221
rear panel components, 215
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 216
removing from the rack, 261
specifications, 319
system board components, 217
system board LEDs, 218
VLS6600
FBDIMM slots, 236
HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and
internal health LED combinations, 237
access panel, installing, 265
access panel, removing, 263
extending from the rack, 258
fan locations, 240
front panel components, 230
front panel LEDs and buttons, 231
hard drive, 278
hard drive LED combinations, 239
hard drive LEDs, 238
HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs, 233
powering on, 125
rear panel components, 233
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 234
removing from the rack, 262
specifications, 321
system board components, 235
VLS6800
access panel, installing, 265
access panel, removing, 264
extending from the rack, 259
fan LED, 250
fan locations, 249
front panel components, 240
front panel LEDs and buttons, 241
hard drive LED combinations, 243
power supply LED combinations, 242
powering on, 125
processor memory board components, 246
QuickFind diagnostic display LEDs, 247
rear panel components, 244
rear panel LEDs and buttons, 245
removing from the rack, 262
specifications, 322
system board components, 246
Torx T-15 tool, 257
Non Deduplicated Copy, 106
Not migrated in Copy Pools threshold limit, 111
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
353
notification alerts, 176
configuring, 183, 190
logical capacity, 184
physical capacity, 184
SAN health, 184
deleting, 177, 211
editing email settings, 178
receiving as SNMP traps, 179, 212
receiving by E-mail, 211
SMI-S support, 181
testing the mail notification settings, 179
viewing in Command View VLS, 177
viewing using CLI, 211
notification thresholds, 189
NTP server address, setting, 201
O
operating system
failure recovery, 299
re-installing, 299
oversubscription
defined, 148
enabling and disabling, 148, 202
P
passwords
changing, 171, 209
default, 135
forgot administrator password, 138
Paused (cartridge status), 111
Pending, 111
performance history report, 185
performance repports, 183
physical capacity report, 187, 190
policy
See library policy
echo copy pool, 82
polling frequency, setting, 146
Priority, 84
R
rack
planning resources, 30
requirements, 31
warnings, 31
rack mounting requirements, 35
rack stability, warning, 305
RAID configurations
storage, 65
354
rails
attaching to node
VLS6100, 45
VLS6500, 45
VLS6600, 47
installing in rack
VLS6100, 44
VLS6500, 44
installing into rack
VLS6600, 46
Re-manage LAN/WAN Replication Target, 79
Reclaim Space task, 149
regulatory compliance
Canadian notice, 326
European Union notice, 327
identification numbers, 325
Japanese notices, 327
Korean notices, 328
laser, 329
Taiwanese notices, 328
remote support, 307
removing slot mapping
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
replication, 75
See also automigration
concepts, 75
configuring job reports, 113
installing licenses, 69
job history, 114
exporting to CSV file, 115
job status, 113
job summary, 115
outside the policy window
systems with deduplication, 106
systems without deduplication, 99
reporting, 111
restarting services, 101
tape initialization, 76
whole cartridge, 76
replication target
viewing slots, 109
reports
automated, 190
configuring, 183
current status, 183
performance history, 184
SAN health, 184
CSV data, 183
current status, 185
logical capacity, 186
performance, 183
performance history, 185
physical capacity, 187, 190
SAN health, 187
storage use, 183
Restart Automigration/Replication Services, 101
Restart Broken Mirror, 88
Restore Media, 86
restoring data
from a LAN/WAN cartridge, 86
from a SAN cartridge, 85
Retention days, 83
running a workload assessment, 189
S
SAN cartridge
restoring from, 85
SAN destination library
deploying firmware, 103
generating drive support ticket, 103
generating library support ticket, 103
operations, 95
running drive assessment test, 104
running library assessment test, 104
scanning, 102
uploading firmware, 102
SAN health report, 187
SAN library
editing availability windows, 94
editing the policy, 94
managing, 79
unmanaging, 80
Scan (destination library), 102
secure shell session
closing, 139
opening, 138
Send notification if cartridge not migrated in,
83
Send notification if cartridge not replicated in,
84
serial number
VLS, 174
warranty, 146
serial user interface
closing a session, 139
emergency login, 138
opening a session, 139
shipping carton contents
disk array, 35
VLS6100 and VLS6500 node, 32
VLS6200 node, 33
VLS6600 node, 33
VLS6800 node, 34
Sizing factor, 83
slot mapping
adding
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
automigration, 92
changing
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
removing
LAN/WAN, 93
SAN, 92
replication, 93
slots
locating with Advanced Search, 98
replication target, 109
smart copy, 75
SMI-S, 75, 89
smart copy pool
changing the number of drives, 90
creating, 89
loading blank media, 90
loading media for overwrite, 91
operations, 89
SMI-S
defined, 89
modifying security, 181
Source cartridge size limit, 83
specifications, 319
disk array, 323
environmental, 323
node
VLS6100, 319
VLS6200, 320
VLS6500, 319
VLS6600, 321
VLS6800, 322
SSL certificate, installing, 136
Start Day, 84
Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges, 83, 84
Start Time, 84
status of cartridges, 111
Stop Tape Export, 106
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
355
storage exerciser
configuring, 192
defined, 192
storage pools
configuring, 68
rebuilding, 69
viewing, 68
storage reports, 183
storage space, freeing up, 172
storage, dynamically assigned, 148, 172
Subscriber's choice, HP, 306
suffix, removing for deduplication, 120
support and other resources, 303
Support Ticket (library drive), 103
Support Ticket (library), 103
support ticket, creating, 182
symbols in text, 304
symbols on equipment, 304
system status monitoring, 175
individual hardware and virtual device status,
175
navigation, 176
notification alerts, 176
overall device status, 175, 210
T
Taiwanese notices, 328
tape drive
creating, 162, 204
data compression, 164
deploying firmware, 103
destroying, 167, 168
details, 99
replacing, 101
uploading firmware, 102
tape export
stopping, 106
tape initialization
defined, 76
exporting data for, 105
importing tapes for, 106
tasks
Cancel Tape Transport, 106
Clear Faults, 196
Copy Now, 99
Create Virtual Library, 160
Eject Media, 101
Export Cartridge Details, 112
Export Log File, 112
Initiate Tape Transport, 106
Load Blank Media, 86
Load Media for Overwrite, 87
Load Media for Restore, 85
Move Media, 100
Non Deduplicated Copy, 106
Reclaim Space, 149
Stop Tape Export, 106
View Log, 112
technical support, 306
telco racks, 256
text symbols, 304
thresholds for notifications, 189
tools, installation, 29
trace log files
creating a support ticket, 182
saving to individual files, 182
viewing, 182
troubleshooting, 309
deduplication, 317
TSM, VLS emulation, 160
U
unmanaging a SAN or LAN/WAN library, 80
unpacking, 30
Upload Firmware, 102
user interface
Command View VLS, 133
descriptions, 133
requirements, 133
secure shell connection, 138
serial connection, 138
user preferences, setting, 146
V
View Log, 112
virtual library
creating, 160
virtual tapes
creating, 85
VLS
introduction, 19
warranties, 307
356
VLS device emulations
with Netbackup, 160
with TSM, 160
VLS device emulations, restarting, 172, 209
VLS6600
attaching rails, 47
installing into rack, 46, 48
installing rails into rack, 46
W
Waiting for first backup, 112
Waiting for policy window, 111
warm failover
defined, 301
warning
rack stability, 305
warranties, 307
warranty serial number, 146
web sites
HP Subscriber's choice, 306
websites
customer self repair, 307
HP documentation, 303
HP storage, 303
whole cartridge replication, 76
Window Duration, 84
workload assessment, 189
running, 189
workload assessment simulation, 189
workload assessment template
adding, 189
deleting, 189
editing, 189
world wide port numbers, 174
WWPNs, 174
HP StorageWorks 6000–series Virtual Library System User Guide
357
358
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement